Exploring Our

Multidimensional Selves:
A Shamanic Perspective
C. Allie Knowlton, LCSW
Exploring Our Multidimensional Selves: A Shamanic Perspective
©2013 C. Allie Knowlton, MSW, LCSW, DCSW & Spirit Passages
ISBN: 978-1-4675-8286-5

Cover image ©2013 Evelyn Rysdyk with special thanks to Sven Geier at
www.sgeier.net for his Kappa Space fractal.

Dreaming Bear Publishing

A division of
Spirit Passages
PO Box 426, Yarmouth, Maine 04096
www.spiritpassages.com

All rights reserved.

No part of this publication may be reproduced or used in any form without written permission from the publisher.
 Foreword

We typically define what we see, hear and touch as reality. However, what we see
with our eyes is only a tiny portion of the electromagnetic spectrum that we call
visible light. Raptors, like hawks and eagles, and some other animals see below
red into the infrared part of the spectrum and so can see the heat trails left behind
by their prey. Many fish, amphibians, reptiles, birds, and even some mammals
like rats and mice can see the higher frequency of ultraviolet light. Our hearing
has similar limitations as it only picks up a small range of audible sound. Ele-
phants and whales can hear infrasounds, such as the movement of underground
water or the shifting of tectonic plates, while your family dog, bats and other
creatures can hear ultrasonic vibrations that are completely inaudible to us.

While we may define the reality that lies beyond our five senses as intangible, it is
as real as anything we can perceive. The dimension of reality that hawks perceive
which includes infrared light is alien to our experience and yet very real. In a
way, the hawk’s reality exists in a parallel dimension to our own. Indeed, every
being participates in creating an individual dimension of reality. My perceptions
define my world, your perceptions define your reality and the hawk defines her
own. And when we look beyond the definitions that limit our ability to grasp the
marvelous phenomenon of All That Is, we find even more possibilities.

Physicists now suggest that there are multiple parallel planes of existence, each
with their own Universe. This means that All That Is—our cosmos—is just one
part of a Multiverse comprised of many universes and dimensions of existence.1

For millennia, shamans have chosen to reach beyond their ordinary senses into
other dimensions of reality. Using the shamanic journey, they have explored the
shamanic realities of Upper, Lower and Middle worlds and have stepped outside
of our linear time stream. Shamans have done this to receive the information,
guidance and insight that contributed to their personal and tribal survival.
They were able to achieve these feats because our spirits are not limited by our
definitions of time or space. In the process of their explorations, the shamans
perceptions of what was possible were altered. To accommodate their new
perceptions, their reality shifted into something new. This shift may have been
the catalyst that brought upon the great leap forward taken by our Upper
Paleolithic ancestors. At this time, there was an explosion of new art and
technology that included images of the numinous worlds beyond the senses.
In a shaman’s eyes, it is clear that they were inspired by other worlds to change
this one.

Today, we are confronted by new threats to our survival. Our species and our
biosphere are in grave peril. It is clear that Allie Knowlton and others like her
believe that the solutions to this catastrophe may lie in our ability to step beyond
the limitations of our consensual reality. In so doing, we can learn new strategies
and experience transformation. This change can help us to dream a new, healthy
possibility into being.

Over the two decades that I have witnessed Allie’s work, she has never wavered
in her belief that human beings can reach beyond their previous experience of Self
to become the “ones that we have been waiting for.” For even longer than that,
she has supported her clients to heal from terrible trauma and reclaim joy. The
multidimensional explorations she shares in these pages are the next natural step
in her desire to support a larger shift to health and balance for all beings. It is a
passion that I also share.

Like our ancient shaman ancestors, today’s intrepid spirit walkers want to make
sure that future generations have a healthy world in which to flourish and grow.
They are willing to accept that there are worlds beyond this one, and willing to
look there for the inspiration and wisdom required to make new possibilities
manifest. Like the sailors of the fifteenth century, today’s explorers need to be
willing to travel beyond the map. To do this we need to gather our metaphoric
compasses and sextants then develop our skills, faith and courage to take us the
rest of the way.

It is clear that Allie stands ready to support her fellow explorers as we redraw the
maps of our reality. What lies ahead is the possibility of a new and glorious
version of our world. I’m on board, how about you?

Evelyn C. Rysdyk
2013

Evelyn is the author of:

- Spirit Walking: A Course in Shamanic Power
- The Spirit Walker’s Guide to Shamanic Tools: How to Make and Use Rattles, Drums, Masks,
Flutes, Wands and Other Shamanic Implements
- Modern Shamanic Living: New Explorations of an Ancient Path
 Introduction

This book is about making a paradigm shift. While the intention is to support all
of us to define ourselves and our reality differently it began as a personal
spiritual journey. The non-physical spirit teachers I work with reminded me
that, before coming into my present lifetime, I had made a soul agreement to
participate in an exploration.This exploration has evolved over seventy years of
my life, allowing me to develop relationships with beings in other dimensions
who I choose to call “our multidimensional neighbors.”

During more than twenty of those years, my partner Evelyn and I have
supported the spiritual journeys of thousands of people. Over that time and
through our personal explorations, we realized the importance of this paradigm
shift for all of us. In working with others, my partner and I have repeatedly seen
individuals who have had experiences “outside the box.” As these people have
had opportunities to share and be affirmed about the more unusual events in
their life, they have gained more confidence, clearer direction and inner peace.
Their transformations have confirmed for me the importance of making my
personal experiences of multidimensionality available to a wider audience.

To begin, it is important to state that shifting into other dimensions does not
require a change in position in time/space. Instead, it is a shift in vibration that
allows us to perceive our existence as multifaceted and unlimited. In my
explorations, I came to understand that these “other dimensions” are right here.
They are a perceptual breath away from our current experience. It is our
perceptions that need to change and this happens as a part of raising our
vibration. As we change a new expanded awareness of reality supplants the old.

As we raise our vibrations, we physically experience states of being outside of

our ordinary definitions of reality. This transformation can expand us beyond our
present perceptual experiences of disease, traumas, as well as our constraining
definitions of what it means to be human.

Furthermore, in transforming ourselves, we also change the nature of the

physical plane. The New Physics suggests that physical matter is created by
human consciousness.2 In essence, each of us participates in the reality of the
material world. As we shift our understanding of reality, we participate in a
metamorphosis of all that we now know as real. This shift does not lessen the
deliciousness of our sensory human experience. Instead, it creates a reality where
extraordinary human experiences become a natural feature of the ordinary
world. In addition, this shifting process is dynamic in that each new baseline
we reach continues to evolve even further.

My goal is to support you to expand into and integrate your multidimensional

capacities and to access wisdom, guidance insight and healing from beyond our
ordinary experience of reality. Even though our culture has been dominated
primarily by the rational mind, we are starting to see a balance occur. The New
Physics has accumulated vast amounts of data revealing the existence of a non-
local field. The non-local field is a feature of reality that exists beyond ordinary
time and space.3 In this realm, all activity and possibility exists. Additionally, we
human beings have a non-local aspect of ourselves. By tapping into this non-local
realm, we can access power and energy to benefit our physical experience.
Shamans call this realm beyond the senses, the spirit world and throughout the
ages shamans have crossed the boundary between the reality of our ordinary,
daily life reality and that “other place.” They have traveled from the physical to
the non-physical realm and back again, earning them the name “those who walk
between the worlds.”

Until more recently, little serious attention has been given to the potential of the
world outside of our ordinary experience. Perhaps, it has been our explorations
beyond our planet by the space program that has opened our eyes to worlds
beyond the known. The search for intelligent life beyond this planet has mentally
prepared us to explore beyond the three-dimensional, concrete reality. Many of
us are ready to know the part of our selves and the others that exist beyond what
we can see, hear, taste and touch. It is this exploration that excites me and has
driven the process you will read in these pages. To accomplish this intention I
address the following specific topics in this book:

First: In encouraging others to recognize, honor, and be in relationship with

themselves as multidimensional beings, I have shared how my own process has
progressively evolved over time. My own progress in this work includes a
controversial decision I made to learn how to take my own physical body into
another non-physical dimension. My desire for this is to be able one day to take
other people into dimensions that can restore their physical bodies.

Second: As science continues to explore our expanded universe and images of

galaxies beyond our own fill our media, it seems wise to also continue develop-
ing our capacities to access those beings I choose to call our multidimensional
neighbors. It is my belief that stretching our minds and hearts into the spaces be-
yond needs to happen metaphysically as well as scientifically. I also believe these
perspectives can complement and inform each other.

Third: Another reason for sharing this material is to support the many children
who are being born with total recall memory of other nonphysical “places” they
have lived prior to this lifetime. The parents of these Indigo Children or Crystal
Children and even many of those who are therapeutic professionals are often
unprepared to support the complex needs of these youngsters. Because they are
often labeled “too sensitive” these young people need to hear from adults with
similar perceptual awareness who are leading successful and fulfilled lives. They
need encouragement from people who understand that other dimensions exist.
These adults can provide a much-needed network for support and guidance.
Such supports are crucial for the mental, emotional, physical and spiritual
wellbeing of these specially gifted children. It is equally important for those
adults who are the forerunners of this generation.

Fourth: In our healing practice we hear the stories of people who say,
“I have never told anyone this before” as an introduction for sharing their
life-changing experiences with beings in other dimensions. They have refrained
from sharing these rich experiences for fear of being considered crazy, being
hospitalized and/or put on psychological medications--even by well meaning
family and caregivers. Some have feared being accused of being part of some
mysterious and dangerous cult. Others speak of a deep sadness, frustration,
anger, and despair at never having felt fully at home in this world. They are quite
relieved to discover that they are among a growing number of people who
recognize their origins lay in other dimensions. Some of them are aware of having
come to this third dimension to assist in the transitional period we are engaged
in at this time. In order for this population to be sustained and encouraged to
offer their transformative insights to us, it is crucial to provide them with a
supportive container in which they feel safe to share.

Fifth: My spirit teachers are insistent that we need to move out of our present
limiting perspectives of who we are as humans. They share that it is time to
accept our place as multidimensional beings in a creatively evolving,
multidimensional cosmos. It is time to move from the mindset of fear to
embrace the courage it takes to explore our heritage as souls inhabiting human
bodies. This includes recognizing that this choice of embodiment is only one
of our options and that it carries amazing benefits. One of these benefits is the
ability to reconnect to other dimensions and bring what we learn there here to
assist in the evolution of this planet. It is time for us to explore vibrational
dimensions as well as physical universes.

Sixth: Lastly, I want to reinforce that recognizing and embracing ourselves as

multidimensional beings does not necessarily require us to learn how to change
in position in time or space, rather it is our shifting vibrations that allow us to
embrace our full capacities that reach beyond our current definitions. What is
required is the willingness to engage in developing intentional relationships with
ourselves and those beings in other dimensions who we are guided to meet. This
provides the safety and direction to open us to the unlimited potential we are
capable of as humans. We already possess the capacity to shift our vibrations, our
frequencies to support this evolution. It is our willingness to accept this new
vision of the cosmos that is our next step.
In fulfilling the above intentions, I will invite you in these pages to look at many
different aspects of this new vision. I will be addressing the idea that reality has
many parallel dimensions. In addition, my explorations have shown me that we
are able to be in several of these parallel realities simultaneously. There are very
practical reasons for intentionally accessing other dimensions and I will introduce
you to ways I have found to do this safely. My own stories will be complemented
by interviews I have done with other people having similar experiences so that
you will have a greater breadth of experiences to support your own evolution.
Where appropriate, I have intruded relevant images to reinforce the content. To
flesh this exploration out even further, I have included personal stories of some
of the people with whom I have been fortunate to work and experiences reported
by other authors who are in alignment with this body of work. It is my intention
for this book to reach many more individuals who have either consciously or
unconsciously been exploring realms beyond this reality.

I will also examine some of the challenges to this process that include healing
conscious and unconscious attachments to our perceived limitations. Every time
we make a change, we are confronted by the feelings of potential loss. This fear of
loss can hold us back from choosing to continue participating in this paradigm
shift, especially since these shifts may not be initially perceivable. In other words,
we unconsciously cling to the known even though it no longer serves us, because
we cannot as yet see what comes after it. This becomes a looped trap as we cannot
experience the benefits without some risk.

This explains my own initial reluctance in following through with this project. I
had fears of being seen as even more “out there,” which implied for me a loss of
status as well as feelings of not being understood which can be isolating. In my
own process, I found that by simultaneously expanding my perceptions and
being willing to work through the fears as they arose, allowed me to more
gracefully shift into a newer way of being. It offered a confirmation that in any
dimension of existence, relationship is the heart of being connected on all levels.

Ultimately, this book represents my own journey of expanding my perceptions as

a multidimensional being and the potential this offers for healing and awakening
new human potentials. My spirit teachers have continued to affirm that my
focus is not to be on scientific verification, although I have included some as
seems relevant, but on qualitative, experiential explorations. It is my hope that
this exploration will also provide you with insights into as you experience the
magnificence of your multidimensional self!

C. Allie Knowlton
www.spiritpassages.com
 1. How It All Began

Let me first express my gratitude to my teachers in the spirit world, those faithful
beings who have been so patient with me. They have been with me for as long as
I can remember and have taken different forms as was appropriate to my age or
life situation. Most children have what adults call imaginary friends. What I now
know is that these beings are real. They are spiritual guides that support a child
as she or he grows. My first spirit guide met me in my dreams when I was very
small. She offered encouragement and healing. She also accompanied me in my
ordinary life to nurture and teach me, while helping to mitigate the negative
impacts of my alcoholic mother. I dearly loved my mother, and the guide helped
me to be able to sustain far less damage than I might otherwise have experienced.
As I grew older, my guide met me in my beloved woods. In our times together in
the forest, she showed herself to me as a faerie being. She introduced me to many
of her friends. Together, they helped to fill my childhood with a deep knowing
that everything is alive and related to every else on this beautiful earth.

In the church that provided my first experience of community, my spirit Teacher

became the Christ Being. This is not only the form known as the historical Jesus,
but also the Christ Consciousness. Of course, I could not fully understand this
concept until many years later. Indeed, I am still learning what that ideal means
for us in our time. For many decades, the Christ Being was the one entity who
made sense to me in a world that did not.

A pastor who lived in my neighborhood, and could play touch football as well
as preach, helped me to develop a passion for the teacher, Jesus. This dear pastor
paved the way for me to be accepted as a student at Bangor Theological
Seminary at age seventeen. My reason for going was to embrace more of the
truth the Christ Being represented. At that time, this decision felt like the best way
to support others to access their own guidance for daily living while
affirming their own inner wisdom and truth. I am grateful for that education and
the experiences I had as a rural pastor. During that time, I found people of all
ages who were as hungry as I for finding meaning and joy in life.

As my life continued, more perplexing, traumatic life experiences unfolded.

This led me to develop a deep desire to explore how people can heal from such
devastating events. I began to study psychology and was introduced to the
numerous teachers in that discipline. They offered many methods of working
with family dynamics and trauma of all varieties. In retrospect, my years as a
clinician in a mental health center and private practice provided me with a crash
program in compassion and human behavior. It fed my curiosity about how
spirituality could support the journey to wholeness. This has become an integral
part of my quest. No matter how one’s life story evolves, there are resources
within and around us that can support us to be whole.
In the midst of this chapter of my life, my mother was dying of cancer. While I
was at her bedside praying for her gentle release from pain, I heard what I call the
“God Voice.” This clear, strong voice told me that in two years my life would take
a dramatic change of direction.

And so it did, almost exactly to the day. Attending a conference with hundreds of
women at a local university, a skilled facilitator led us on an experiential journey
to meet our medicine woman guide. Prior to that time, I had not been able to see
images during such exercises so I just set the intention to relax and listen to her
voice. To my surprise, this time a Native American woman appeared to me!
Without knowing why, I started to weep. The woman placed a pair of brown
moccasins on my feet. I immediately recognized them as the same ones I had
purchased several years before during a dramatic life crisis. As she slipped the
moccasins on she said clearly, “Keep on your path and be brave. I am with you.”

Near the conclusion of the guided meditation, the facilitator asked us to request
the name of our guide. To my surprise, the guide said, “Zelda.” She said this with
a look that implied that names were quite irrelevant. This experience opened a
new chapter in my life journey. It was then that my work with beings in other
dimensions and spirit teachers began in earnest.

Initially, my work with Zelda involved me writing down questions and listening
for her responses. At some point, this evolved further so that I could actually
channel her wisdom for others to receive her guidance. During that time, the
words of the “God Voice” came true. My life did dramatically change. My
connection to the spirit world was opening up more everyday. This continued
even as I maintained a full-time job, kept up my responsibilities as a wife and
mother, and opened a private practice as a social worker on the coast of Maine.

Over the years, my relationship with my guide, Zelda continued to evolve. The
work with her helped me to expand my perceptions of reality. I gained even more
confidence in myself as I developed trust with her. In hindsight, Zelda and the
Christ Being were preparing me for yet another course in my spiritual education.

The next step in my process began with a series of illnesses. These called me to
pay more attention to my physical body. In hindsight this time was about
supporting my body to catch up with my rapidly evolving spirit. While my
health care provider was attending to my physical symptoms, she rather bluntly
advised me to examine what was going on at other levels of my being. She
recommended that I go to a psychic! Since I had my own guide, I felt this was
an odd suggestion but physical pain is a great motivator.

I met with the psychic who was very well respected across the state. In the course
of her reading, she told me that my symptoms were calling me to follow the
path of the shaman. In spite of her reputation, I frankly thought that she was
off the mark. I took her advice into my own meditation process. There, I found
surprising confirmation for her advice. This led to me to meet with the
acupuncture practitioner the psychic had suggested could help me with my
next step. As it turned out, the acupuncturist’s office was right around the corner
from my private psychotherapy practice. Along with his profession, he was in
the midst of training to be a teacher of the shamanic journey process.4

While prayer had been a part of my life for as long as I can remember, shamanic
journeying was a new experience. I was lying on a massage table with head-
phones on, listening to the sound of drums. This method quickly carried me
into an expanded state of consciousness that felt very familiar. The journey felt
like prayer or meditation with pictures. The sound of the drumming helped me
to better “see” the world of the spirits. This was a change as my interactions
with Zelda had been primarily auditory.

As the drumming continued, I found myself in a snowy landscape. While this was
delightful, I was not expecting the emotional response I had upon meeting my
first spirit ally in animal form. I learned that this was a power animal. This is a
spirit animal that becomes a shaman’s constant companion, advisor and protector.
The power animal is able to exist in both the spirit world and this world. Like
other guides, they exist in multiple dimensions.

When my animal arrived, it was in the form of a large polar bear with a cub. As
she emerged I began to weep uncontrollably. To be honest, I was initially quite
embarrassed. At that time
in my life, I was very
uncomfortable crying in
front of a stranger. I had
no idea what was really
happening to me yet, a
familiar feeling of inner
peace welled up inside.
This told me that, in spite
of the newness of this
experience, it felt right for
me. Even though my
rational, left-hemisphere
mind craved to under-
stand, I allowed myself to
simply follow where the
process was leading me.
My facilitator also assured me that my emotional response was a classic ecstatic
shamanic experience. It was something that shamans around the planet had
experienced for thousands of years.

This new spirit teacher, who presented herself in the form of a polar bear,
immediately began teaching me. She reminded me of information I already
knew but had not yet integrated into my life. She introduced me to intriguing
possibilities and all of what she shared somehow felt right to me. At the time, I
recognized that this being shared with me opened up a powerful feeling of
“coming home.” It took several additional journeys to understand the
implications of that feeling and recognize that another new chapter in my life
with the spirit world had begun.

Along with the new feelings of being more “at home”, I realized that I felt
something else. While I was not fully clear about it then, I now recognize that
this other feeling was a profound inner knowing that I was following my soul’s
direction. Now I understand that our souls use every possible opportunity to
support us to recall the agreements we made before coming into our present
form. Often these “knowings” are drowned out by the busyness of life or the
chatter of the rational mind. Sometimes it is simply that the personality self is
not yet ready to listen. Whatever the reasons, it is good that our souls are so
persistent about trying to help our personalities to remember who we are and
what we are being called to do. I know I received many of these soul reminders
in my process. Another one of those reminders happened in upstate New York
during the time my relationship with Zelda was unfolding.

I was huddled, shivering under a faded plaid car blanket to ward off the early
morning chill. The sides of a huge white tent flapped the remnants of the
previous night’s rain inside to wash away the fogginess of my sleepless night.
I was there to listen to the teachings of Tsultrim Allione who had just returned
home from Europe. She was facilitating a conference at Omega Institute on the
topic, “Women Have Wisdom.” Tsultrim was a Buddhist nun who was ordained
by H.H. Karmapa in Bodhgaya after extensive travel in India and Nepal.
Following her completion of three and a half years of intensive training, she
left the monastic life to share what she had learned about the Buddhist path.
She focused on Buddhism as experienced through the Dakini or feminine
principle. At that time, she was one of the few Buddhist teachers sharing the
feminine perspective of this tradition in the Western world.

I was particularly drawn to Tsultrim because I experienced her modeling a

powerful synthesis of the spiritual and sensual, with no split in priority. I felt
her to be a kindred spirit. We are both Mainers and she had begun her spiritual
quest in Tibet the same year as I had gone to a seminary. We both began our
journeys as teenagers and now she was teaching her first class in the United
States. Prior to attending the program, I had read her informative book, Women of
Wisdom.5 Our lives have woven in and out of each other over time. I am grateful
to her for her assistance in editing a chapter of my book, Odiana, which is a more
in depth personal story of meeting my first spirit guides and the impact of these
relationships in my life.6 Since those early days, Tsultrim has been recognized as
the official emanation of Machig Labdrön who was an eleventh century teacher
and practitioner of Tibetan Tantric Buddhism.7

Back under the tent, Tsultrim waited for us to settle. We were expecting her to
lead us in some Buddhist mantras as she usually did to prepare us for the days
work. Instead, she announced that even though it wasn’t part of her original plan,
she was going teach us The Song of the Vajra. She explained that this was from the
language of Odiana, an enlightened place in Northwest of India. She continued to
explain that whenever you hear stories about ancient Tantric teachers going
“someplace” for teaching, they went to Odiana. She shared that while some
people say that it is a symbolic place, she learned from her teachers that it is an
actual place that exists in another dimension.

Tsultrim then went on to share that her teacher Namkhai Norbu was a Tibetan
Lama who although born in Dege, Egypt, was recognized at the age of three as
the incarnation of a previous great Master of the Dzogchen tradition. He had
become her teacher of the doctrines of the Dzogchen School.8 Tsultrim continued
preparing us for our morning exercise with great excitement. “My teacher (Norbu)
receives whole teachings in dreams and writes down volumes of these teachings. He also
goes into other dimensions. These dreams I want to tell you about are of other dimensions
in which he received The Song of the Vajra. This is the language of the Dakini, to help us
make contact with their dimension.”9

She continued, “Although The Song of the Vajra is considered by many to be a mantra, it
is different from a mantra, in that it is not used to obtain a certain effect, but rather to link
the internal energy of the individual who is in a confused state with the universal flow of
energy. It is something like the music of the spheres that Western mystics speak of. The
sounds vibrate in the body of the individual, and this vibration brings forth waves which
massage the vibration of the being, bringing an integration with the spherical sounds of
the universe.” 10

Tsultrim then went on to explain that Norbu’s first dream occurred in 1984 in a
place near Singapore, and that the “other dimension included a temple where a god-
dess, who looked like Tara but had her left foot down and held in her hand a sphere, was
called Kuma Devi, a Dzogchen teacher in Odiana. She was a princess, a daughter of a king
of Odiana and recorded so in history.”11 Tsultrim began to read from her journals
where she had recorded her teacher’s dream in other dimensions. She carefully
interpreted word-by-word, concept-by-concept what she herself had written
down from the master of The Song of the Vajra. I immediately began to experience
a profound sense of belonging to the places beyond this known Universe. Based
upon the feelings I had of a profoundly deep inner resonance, I realized that I had
already been exposed to these same concepts by my own spirit teachers. It was
clear to me that their teachings also came to me from other dimensions.

From that moment on I knew that a priority in my life needed to be exploring

more of these other dimensions. My feelings I of being at home with the informa-
tion from these realms, allowed me to recognize and affirm myself as a multidi-
mensional being although I had no idea how this journey would evolve.
 2. What Does It Mean To Be A Multidimensional Being?

Over the course of our lives and in a myriad of different situations, we are asked
every kind of imaginable question. If any of those interviews, forms or applica-
tions had ever asked the question, “What is your primary passion?” I would have
had to answer, “exploring what it means to be a multidimensional being." Over the
years, when I made this kind of comment in conversation, it was usually met
with a response such as, “I have hard enough time figuring out what it is to be a
human being in day to day life in this dimension without opening Pandora's box to the
beyond!” However, as the world has shifted, the responses I get from people have
begun to change.

In our healing practice, a growing number of people ask if we can help them with
some unusual experiences they are having. For some people, these incidents
seem to occur suddenly with no apparent warning. Others share that they have
had odd experiences starting when they were very young children, even in the
crib. In every case, people share that which occurred in their lives was beyond
what we collectively understand as ordinary reality. They may have had
interactions with beings that were not from this plane of existence. Others may
have felt a relentless summons from their own soul to honor an agreement made
prior to becoming physical. Some have found solace in books or publications that
catalog the near death experiences of children and adults while others have
searched for experiences like their own in the pages of fiction. In every case, there
has been a longing to find validation for what are profound events in their lives.

While many of the experiences people report may have seemed strange, each of
us has access to a world that has parallels to these experiences. The world of our
dreams has a richness that makes ordinary reality pale by comparison. In our
dreams, we regularly have experiences that defy our typical definitions of reality.
We quite literally step beyond the limitations of ordinary time and space. This is
similar to the planes of existence that tribal shamans also access in their journeys
into the spirit world. These other realities offer powerful information, symbols
and metaphors that can be incredibly beneficial. We can use the information
gathered in these other worlds to heal old wounds, solve problems and enhance
our wellbeing. Indeed, every night whether we recall our dreams or not, we are
transported into experiences outside of our time/space continuum.

Since our access to these realms beyond is a universal human ability, we can
learn to access them intentionally. First, we need to negotiate with our minds to
allow it to happen. I find that what helps the mind to surrender its overly tight
grip on the definition of reality is to provide more convincing data!

In the late nineteen nineties, a physician published his studies of the impact of
organ transplants on the recipients. In his study, Dr. Paul Pearsall was led to ex-
plore the nature of the soul. He found that there was “something” of us that lives
beyond our physical body. He talked about this part of us as an invisible energy
or force that impacts the physical plane.

He writes, “One group of brilliant scientists--- base their entire approach to understand-
ing the cosmos on the presence and nature of a ‘fifth force’, or subtle “L” energetic intelli-
gence, which is invisible to our mechanical instruments but infinitely pervasive in its
influence. These energy scientists cannot do their experiments or begin to understand
quarks and stars or particles and waves without referring to a subtle and often ‘tricky’
fifth force.”12 He goes on further to explain more about this “L” energy. “One
reason “L” energy can be so difficult to study is that it may be what scientists call non
local, meaning that it exists not just in one place at one time but everywhere all the
time.”13

His words were intriguing to me as he provided a scientific explanation for reali-

ties that lie beyond and yet are connected to this one. In more detail he describes:
“The quantum physics principle of non locality says that, in the minuscule buzzing
quantum world of which our body’s cells are a part, there are no barriers, time is relative,
that mass, energy and information are one and the same and that objects once connected
forever retain the info-energetic memory of that connection and separateness of any kind
in the world, human or otherwise is mere illusion.” In other words, he is saying that
what we believe is real is just a creation of our mind. He further clarifies this as
he writes, “Although it may seem impossible to our brain, “L’s” energy’s (one way of de-
scribing an energy not otherwise definable, a fifth energy force), influence means that
space and time are the brains approximation of reality and its own version of reality.
Quantum physics suggests that we are all a timeless connection and not the mechanical
limits of miles and walls. Non locality refers to the energetic intelligent field of which all
that is or ever has been or will be is forever a part.” 14

From Dr. Pearsall’s perspective, it would seem that as multidimensional beings

we are part of “the energetic intelligence field of which all that is or ever has been or
ever will be is forever a part.” My Teachers in the spiritual dimensions simply say
that we are part of All That Is and therefore can never be separate. If this is so, it
makes sense for us to be as curious about the aspects of All That Is that we don’t
yet know.

The ongoing process of becoming aware of All That Is can be a delightful adven-
ture! We can ask questions such as, “What is the multidimensional complexity I have
as a human being?” or “Who or what are the other beings I am connected to in other di-
mensions?” We may also ask, “What are other beings’ perceptions of their connections
with me?” As our time becomes more and more chaotic, we may even ask, “What
can these other beings and places offer to me for this present time?” In the spirit of reci-
procity, we may even choose to ask, “Since we are so connected to all beings and dimen-
sions, how can I contribute to them?”
To honor and respect the strain the above line of questioning may create in
your mind it would be advisable to share a little of how my own Spirit teachers
prepared me for what felt at that time to be reality-stretching information. Many
years ago, my partner and I co-facilitated a workshop that we entitled, Past Lives:
A Shamanic Approach. In a shamanic journey I did to prepare for that workshop,
my spirit teachers showed me several of my lifetimes simultaneously. In helping
me to understand that these lifetimes were actually concurrent to this one, they
displayed scenes of my “past” lives in circles of light like spotlights on a stage. In
the same way that the attention of an audience is directed by the movement of a
spotlight, we can choose to focus on other incarnational experiences by shifting
our focus.

As a kinesthetic person, (a person whose primary way of receiving information

is through their physical body awareness), I was able to feel that each of the
spot lit experiences were “me.” My partner’s spirit teacher explained this
phenomenon of concurrent experience by using the metaphor of stations on a
radio or channels on a television. She reminded me that all of the stations are
playing at the same time. We choose what channel we want to focus on by
switching from one to another. When I first received this information about liv-
ing simultaneous realities from my teachers, it was a huge stretch. The idea that
the past, present and future were all happening at the same time and that I was
in many different places simultaneously was stunning!

Over the years, I have had many more journeys and have stretched even further.
The encouragement from my spiritual teachers has led me to explore far deeper
than I might have imagined all those years ago. Much of the material in this book
officially began during an intense, nine-month process. My intention was to
fulfill a promise to one of my spirit teachers. She had asked me to do a series
of journeys once a week for nine months. I was to audiotape each one and
transcribe the content of each tape in a journal. This structured way of working
helped me to not only broaden my perceptions but enabled me to fully integrate
all that I was learning. This supported my mind to expand its definitions of
reality.

My partner’s primary spirit teacher, who is her great, great Grandmother,

suggests that our brain functions like the boxes in the Post Office. As we live our
lives, the brain sorts information and experiences. It categorizes and files them
away in appropriate boxes. If there is no appropriate box the brain either
deconstructs the information and files the pieces or learns to create new boxes.
It seems that repetition of a new idea supports the creation of new pathways that
allows the mind to assimilate what it is learning. This is especially the case when
the new information seems to be in conflict with what it already believes it
knows! In addition, we have more than just our brain to assimilate information.
In The Biology of Transcendence, A Blueprint of the Human Spirit, the author Joseph
Chilton Pearce, examines our neural organization to address how we can
transcend our current evolutionary capacities and limitations. In his book, he
share that the latest research identifies that our intelligence is not limited to our
brain. While we have four areas of neural tissue in our brain, the new discipline
of neurocardiology, has identified a fifth center of neural tissue. That center is
located in our heart. In other words, we are of two interconnected minds! Our
head brain defines reality through the experiences of our sensory organs while
the heart brain is able to perceive that which is intangible.

In his insightful research, Pearce illustrates how the dynamic interaction of our
head brain (intellect) and heart brain (intelligence) gives us the capacity to
transcend our limitations and evolve from one evolutionary place to the next. In
other words this can allow us to connect to our quantum experience of ourselves
as non-local beings who are in constant relationship with other planes of
existence and other beings. Pearce firmly believes that we are made to transcend,
that it is our biological imperative and a state we have been moving toward for
millennia.15

Cosmologists are continuing to elaborate on the multidimensionality of

existence. Quantum physics has developed many ways to explain that which we
cannot easily perceive. In many cases, the scientists understand that everything
is not only interconnected but is in constant interaction. In having spiritual
methods to explore these other places and times, we have the ability to
consciously choose how to work with those interconnections in a way that is
mutually beneficial for all who choose.

I have been taught ways that are safe to reach beyond the limits of our collective
experience to step into relationship with other dimensions and other realities
whose constructs of time and space are totally different from my own. Through
my explorations, my brain now has a “box” for multidimensional living. I invite
you to share in some of my shamanic journeys to help you to create new “boxes”
for own multidimensional possibilities.
 3. Multidimensional Explorations

My partner and I have facilitated a weekly shamanic journey drumming circle for
many years. During one of the circles, I was advised by my spirit teacher that I
would soon be helping people to walk in new dimensions. I did not know what
that meant then but was certain that I wanted to explore this idea further.

That evening happened to be the dark of the moon. I knew from my astrology
friends that this was a good time to start a new project or adventure. Later that
night, I began my new work. At 3:00AM, while it was still quite dark and also my
spirit teacher’s favorite time to connect, I went on a shamanic journey. During
journeys, my physical body lies on a mat on the floor in our healing room.
Covered with a light blanket against the early dawn chill (that you can even
experience during July in Maine) I listened to drumming through headphones.
The drum’s beats at 240 beats per minute to helped my consciousness to gently
and quickly shift into the shamanic state of consciousness.

The place I begin my journeys is along Panther Kill Creek in the Catskill Moun-
tains in New York. I use my memories of that place and my imagination to bring
me into the scene. Three trees lean over the creek creating a tunnel of exposed
tree roots. This creates a tunnel into the rich soil. I jump into the hole and my
journey leads me down into the Lower World of spirit. There, a special spirit is
waiting for me. It is my protector spirit and polar bear power animal, She Ma. I
ask her if she would take me to meet with the spirit teacher who offered me the
invitation to explore other dimensions.

She Ma and I slowly walked with dignity into a cave. It was the same cave that I
had visited in the drumming circle journey. She Ma and I move into the center of
the cave where a glowing being is there to greet us. The being and I greet each
other with a reverent bow. It is the namaste gesture. This means the being has ac-
knowledged my divinity as I have honored hers. After we have greeted each
other, she puts her huge paw in front of her also in a bow of confirmation. It is
clear from her gesture that she understands this being is indeed very powerful. I
knew from the circle journey that the teacher’s name was Arathea.

“Arathea,” I address her, “I am here upon your invitation to learn how to move safely
into other dimensions, first in journey form and then with my physical body. What would
you like to teach me this morning?” My power animal enfolds me in her energy as
Arathea begins expanding into a huge bubble with beautiful iridescent colors
flowing around. My bear and I move inside the bubble that expands and very
quickly. Very soon it is larger than the cave and expanding through it. Like a
soap bubble blown by a child, the bubble Arathea creates enfolds everything it
touches. It keeps expanding and expanding until the point when I feel the cave is
gone. While we haven’t moved from our location, the cave has been replaced by a
city. It is a city like none found here on Earth. We move forward. The buildings in
this place are not made from any substance I recognize. Everything has a golden
hue. The scale of the structures gives me the feeling of skyscrapers.

As we walk along, life forms begin emerging from everywhere. They are
translucent beings. They come up to me, tipping their heads in a way to indicate
that they are curious about me. I sense that we communicate telepathically. They
want to know who I am and why I am here. I tell her my name and I am here to
learn how to come into other dimensions safely so that at some point I can assist
others to so the same.

A being moves in front of me. It has the texture of jellyfish and resembles the
being at the end of the movie, The Abyss. The being shimmers in a fashion that
gives me the feeling it is pleased that I have come to learn. As I am sensing this, I
get a nod from the being that lets me know that I interpreted correctly. At that
point, two long thin plasma hands extend from the being in greeting. I put both
of my hands out and take the being’s hands in mine. Immediately, I feel little
electric currents moving through my entire body. I ask this being its name. It
responds, “Adea.”

“Mine is Allie,” I say in reply “and this is She Ma.” From their demeanors, I can tell
that they know each other already! Apparently these two have already been
talking about me to beginning this work In this extraordinary place.

Adea indicates for me to follow and we go into an open space that seems to be a
central plaza. Fountains are spraying water out of what looks like lotus flowers.
We walk along the fountain area on what appears to be black and white tile floor.
Gathered there are other beings who are tipping their heads from side to side
with curious looks. Adea is introducing us to those who have come. She explains
that I am here from the earthly dimension. I greet them all with the namaste bow.
A being comes forward who is taller than Adea. Obel is its name. Obel bows in
greeting and I get the sense that we are to follow.

She Ma who is both around me and beside me, seems very calm and relaxed.
Her easy, almost detached demeanor helps me to feel confident to trust my own
instincts. As we walk, things begin to appear that I did not see before. It is a
familiar sensation as it is the same effect that happens when I am on a healing
journey to bring back soul essences for a client.16 There is no way for me to
discern if things are materializing to give form to the spaces around me so that
my mind can be more comfortable in this unusual place, or that they actually
exist. Obel hears my thoughts and says, “This all exists in this form although the ma-
terials are not the materials you have in your earth dimension.” I understand from
what Obel tells me that the “scenery” I am experiencing functions like a kind of
bridge for the mind. It allows me to take in the information I am receiving by
providing familiar reference points even though that is not the nature of this
place.

We enter into a building. Once inside, we begin to rise up. There is no elevator.
We simply rise. My sense is we are in an observation tower. Although it is not
fully tangible, I perceive that there is a railing and the space is enclosed as if by
glass. From this vantage point, I am able to see a far distance. Below me is a
very busy, thriving place that gives me a great sense of peace. It is such a deep
experience of peace that I sigh deeply.

I sense Obel asking me if I have any questions. I ask, “Does everyone in this
dimension feel this same peace or is this just centered in this city?” Many colors run up
and down this being’s body and I hear music so I get the sense that this teacher is
laughing! Obel responds, “This is like your dimension. There are those who achieve a
deep sense of peace and those who are in process. But the opportunity to experience
profound peace resides here, for in that state of peace there are abilities a soul can achieve
that cannot be experienced when it is attached to a physical body.”

At this point I am aware of being distracted from his response by my own

physical body feeling extremely cold even though it is July and I am covered with
a blanket. Again, Obel anticipates my question. “There is no sense of temperature
here like hot or cold, just uniform atmosphere better described as a uniform vibration. It is
a high frequency vibration. That is why there is no need to have bones, skeletal structure.”

Obel watches where my gaze travels. As there is not much around me that I am
accustomed to, I choose to stick to what I trust best which are my feelings. As I
look out from the observation tower, I get a feeling of orderliness and peaceful-
ness as the beings below me go about their lives. They seem to float along and
quickly shift from place to place by their intentions. There is no sense of moving
but materializing where they need to be.

Although I have not spoken aloud, Obel nods in approval of my mental observa-
tions. So I ask, “What are the soul tasks of the beings here?” The teacher looks
thoughtful with a trace of sadness on his visage. “The purpose of this place is for the
soul to experience formlessness. It sounds strange, but on your earth dimension you tend
to limit the soul to what is contained in your bodies and there are those who need to expe-
rience that the soul can reside within the container and yet be more than that container.
So, again, since no bones or muscles are required here, beings experience every fiber, cell
of their container as their soul. The sadness you perceived is that in this particular loca-
tion there are still some who do not yet understand that they are also more than their
physicality but truly all soul. It is an opportunity that all have not yet accepted.” He
informs us that we are not authorized to go further in this place until some other
time if it becomes appropriate. “Here souls are experiencing taking many forms fairly
rapidly, almost like trying on clothes for the day to see what you would like to wear. These
beings are here who need to understand that soul resides within, for in some places of ex-
istence, including your own earth dimension, there are many who perceive that the soul
itself does not reside in the body. They perceive the spirit resides within the body, a life-
force, but that the soul resides somewhere else and can be tapped into in meditation.”

I share with Obel that my present understanding includes the belief that the soul
inhabits the human body and can also be in many dimensions, many forms si-
multaneously, but that many people on the earth dimension do not yet know or
believe this. I share that this is a bit of a stretch for my brain, but that I have had
the conscious experience that has helped me to understand. At one time while I
was in meditation, I found myself both sitting on a meditation pillow and simul-
taneously speaking in German to a ten-year-old girl in Germany. Even though in
my present body I do not know how to speak the German language, I could feel
myself being in both places at the same time.

Obel takes She Ma and myself to a space where we are shown a viewing screen. It
is a familiar kind of scene that I have experienced before in my shamanic jour-
neys. On the screen, I am being shown a multi-layered, holographic image of
myself. I see myself as I do in the mirror and also see myself like one of the
beings in this dimension. That aspect of me has the same translucent body as
Obel. In another part of the hologram I perceive myself as a rainbow with no dis-
cernable human form. Obel says to me, ”Let’s walk in the kaleidoscope of your soul.”
As we move into me, the colors have marvelous energies, blue swirling kinds of
psychedelic colors and vibrations. This is very challenging to describe as it comes
with many energy surges and floods of emotion. I feel the different aspects
separately even though they are all one.

Obel explains, ”To experience your multidimensionality all at once would be an overload
for your human nervous system, but to see as many as possible would be quite beneficial!”
I understand and so ask if I can see these aspects of my soul’s experience more
clearly so that I may identify them.

Suddenly, I am experiencing what feels like a void, a place of all potential and
yet nothing here is manifested. In this place, there are no longer any edges or
known parameters. In this place of nothing that is everything, I can feel myself
living simultaneous lifetimes. I also know that I have to let go of any expectation
that my brain will understand this! I just allow myself to feel the expanded sense
of self.

At this point Obel indicates that it is time for me to return to my own dimension.
He lets me know that I can come back here again at any time. I thank him. We
move back to the fountain where Adea is waiting. I bow and thank them again. In
the bubble we return to the cave where the bubble dissolves and Arathea again
takes the form of a figure standing in front of me. I thank Arathea and She Ma then
return my consciousness to the room where I am lying.

Upon my return, I am amazed to realize that I had been journeying for an hour
even though it felt as though I had only been doing so for a few minutes. The en-
tire experience left me with sensations that both time and space are not what I
was taught in school! The world around us is not what we think it is. Things are
not as they seem. This was a confirmation of the exact message I received from
meeting my first spirit teacher!
 4. Our Heritage

Our shaman friend, Bhola Banstola, has a heritage of thirty generations of

Nepalese jhankris (shamans) in his family. He was born in the mountain district of
Bhojpur, to the south of Mount Everest and currently divides his time between
Nepal and Italy. He and his wife organize pilgrimages to Tibet, India, Bhutan,
Nepal, the Himalayan
Mountains and other
sacred sites. For
several years, my
partner and I have
invited Bhola to
Maine to present
workshops on
Nepalese shamanism.
Typically, fifty people
gather on a weekend
to continue their
spiritual journeys
with this genuine and
warm human being.
During the time he is
here in Maine, he
lives with us. We
spend many hours in
conversation and
when he offers individual healings for others, we are fortunate to assist and drum
with him using the unique Nepalese drum called a dhangro. This is a two-sided
drum with a female skin on one side and male skin on the other side. The gender
of each side is designated by the relationship to the handle’s three-sided blade
called a phurba. When Bhola sings and beats his drum he also spins it back and
forth using differing beats based on his healing songs. It takes some practice to
follow his changing rhythms!

Summer solstice 2009, Bhola was guided by his spirit teachers to support his
Maine students to explore how the Lower, Middle and Upper realms of the spirit
world also exist within our own bodies. While this is exercise certainly was a
multidimensional exploration and will be discussed further on in this book, at the
time my spirit teacher chose to take me in another direction!

During the exercise, a group of monks showed up in my journey to clarify my

own specific lineage. I had researched my ancestral roots and discovered that I
was part Penobscot native. These people are a small tribe that is part of the
Wabanaki Confederacy or “People of the Dawn.” This group includes the
Penobscot, Passamaquoddy, Mi’kmaq, Maliseet, and Abenaki peoples. I was able to
trace back several generations but found that church records that would validate
my heritage had been burned. This was difficult for me as I remembered my
grandmother and knew she was Native American. Though she died when I was
young, I remember her features and the long black braid that hung down her
back. Another of her granddaughters remembers her weaving baskets with other
native women. Though it is now impossible to prove, I hold this knowing of my
own ancestral heritage in my heart.

Under the guidance of the monks, I experienced being part of what they called
the Creative Elemental Energies. This could also be thought of as the source
energies of All That Is. I was taken to a time before the Earth was inhabited. I
existed in other places and dimensions--a formless potential. When the earth was
ready to be a place of incarnation, I came in many forms. I was born with many
different bodies and in many cultures over time. I brought this initial Creative
Energy all across the planet. My task was to bring a creative, loving essence
everywhere I incarnated. This is still an important part of my soul journey. To
bring this loving essence also involves being willing to release any human
limitations that arise. These limitations arise as our personalities usually have
no clue what task our soul has chosen to fulfill. We can be caught up in the
minutia of our daily lives and forget who we really are and why we decided to
incarnate. This remembering can be a daunting task! As I received this informa-
tion from the monks, I found that tears streamed down my face. This was a
validation of the truth of their information.

Each of us has had soul experiences of being both formed and formless. All of us
are capable of being instruments of change. Bhola shares in his teachings that in
this lifetime, fifty percent of who we are comes to us through our heritage. The
other fifty percent of who we become is what we ourselves create. Our souls have
such an amazing capacity when we choose to expand our awareness of our
unlimited heritage.

Part of the focus of this book is to encourage the notion that our heritage
includes experiences in other dimensions. These may be times before choosing to
come to this planet or interim lifetimes where we chose to have another kind of
experience. As we tap into this larger sense of who we are we expand our ability
to not only live our lives but also to creatively impact our planet. It is time for our
human species to recognize the resources this lineage offers us. Unfortunately for
most of us, our current educational, cultural and spiritual traditions usually do
not include awareness of this potential. This gap of understanding provides us an
opportunity. Since this is relatively new territory, we are left fully open to explore
the richness of our multidimensional heritage!

We may have gotten glimpses and confirmations of our larger selves from
dreams, meditations, guided imageries during deep bodywork, trance dancing,
shamanic journeys, exploratory workshops or vision quests. Our unexplained
memories, and unexpected experiences take us beyond this ordinary reality to
remind us that there is more to life than we have ever dared to imagine! This
opens up a wider variety of choices for us.

When someone has an awareness of having experiences in other dimensions in

our healing sessions or workshops, they are often puzzled and sometimes very
uncomfortable. One of the ways that my partner and I help to make this kind of
experience more easy to discuss is to use the expression, “being from away.”
This expression is usually used to describe someone who lives in Maine but was
born elsewhere. They quickly understand that we are not speaking about being
from another state or country and using this somewhat humorous euphemism
helps to give the person a sense of relief.

In an effort to access more resources to help people who are opening to an ex-
panded perception of their soul’s heritage, I did a journey to my spirit council.17
When I asked my council how to support those acknowledging this heritage, one
of my council members Lacea, stepped forward. Lacea shared with me that human
beings have not only the DNA that has created our bodies, we also have addi-
tional DNA that can be “awakened.” This DNA carries with it abilities that ex-
pand our current definition of what it means to be human.

The awakening of this “sleeping” DNA can occur during fetal development, or at
other times. Sometimes our soul has prepared a kind of timer in our bodies so
that the DNA spontaneously awakens when it is most needed. While this specific
idea of awakening DNA may be new, they can be described in other terms. For
some people it occurs as a kundalini awakening (an experience that includes
feelings of intense, spiritual energies surging up the spine) and for others during
an initiatory experience. Sometimes we simply achieve a level of maturity that
allows us to hold this larger view of our selves or experience our perceptions of
reality tearing open it during a life crisis.

Lacea further elaborated that when there is no context for this kind of experience,
it can be traumatic. As with other kinds of trauma, this can elicit a wide variety
of human responses. She reminded me that the shamanic process of soul
remembering is useful to support people to integrate their expanded awareness
of self in beneficial ways.18 In this process, a shamanic practitioner goes on behalf
of a person into the spirit world. The intention for the journey is to be shown the
person at the moment prior to coming into form. It is at that point that the soul
declares its intention for the incarnation and chooses through whom it will be
born. The focus of the journey is to witness the soul agreements and/or purposes
the person has chosen for the current lifetime. Soul intentions may include bring-
ing unconditional love to the earth as a whole or to a specific family, completing
a soul purpose, healing a previous traumas, participating in healing another
person, a species, the earth or bringing a specific vibration that is needed here.
The possibilities are endless. The soul’s intentions are shown to the practitioner in
the journey so that they can help the person’s personality to remember. When
people are prepared to do this journey first hand it facilitates grounding their
expanded experience of reality into their everyday life.

In my visit with the council, Lacea reminded me that I have worked with people
who are angry that they are “from away.” Their personality selves do not
remember that they made the choice to come at this time to the earth. Lacea
reminded me that all beings that come into physical form on the Earth have
agreed at a soul level to do so. Sometimes the person is actually part of a group of
beings who have come to be supportive at this time. She elaborated that this
assignment may not have been in their awareness on a personality level. Meeting
a spokesbeing from their group in a meditation, a shamanic journey or in dreams
can provide a context for remembering on a soul level. This, can be translated to
the personality and physical body of the seeker. Whether the person came as part
of a group or with another intention, once the person is able to accept their soul’s
intent, the person’s physical, emotional, mental and spiritual body can be more at
ease and integrated. This frees them to be able to consciously choose how to
fulfill their commitment. For many, learning their soul’s intent provides a new
purpose for being in physical form that makes sense and opens their lives up
for more joy!

Another fascinating way to embrace a person’s lineage is recalling other lifetimes.

Since our souls are having concurrent experiences, it is possible to access the
gifts in those lifetimes to use here. For example, in the shamanic process of soul
retrieval, a practitioner may be guided to return a soul essence of a person who
lived in another time frame of history. While we speak about these as “past lives”
we recognize that they are simple happening in another dimension of time.19
These soul essences may carry an ability, talent or wisdom that is beneficial or
even essential for now.

Often the aspect of the soul may require a healing. Once healed, they may either
rejoin their larger soul self outside of time or be brought back to the person
requesting the healing. This aspect can provide support that is unique in that is
it a part of the person’s own soul. It is the “past” self bringing its resources and
wisdom into the present. This is an idea also promoted by author, Gregg Braden
who often says that the ancient ones we revere are really ourselves in the past
preparing the way for ourselves in this life time!

In the Ringing Cedars series, the Russian author, Vladimir Megre presents the
teachings of a person named, Anastasia. She is a reclusive wise woman who
offers her insight in the series. She once asked him to reflect upon his own beliefs.
“Tell me, Vladimir, what do you consider to be an extraterrestrial civilization?” He
responded, “Well, I would say the population of some other planet or star, or something
invisible existing quite close by. If people can communicate with individuals who lived in
the past, it must mean these individuals reside in some kind of invisible world.” I was
intrigued by her reply. “Every Man, Vladimir, is so constructed that he has access to
the whole Universe -- both the visible and invisible. Every Man may communicate with
anything or anyone he wishes. It works pretty much the same as through your radio
receiver. There are so many stations broadcasting all kinds of information, out of which
the owner of the receiver must select what he is going to listen to.”20

What is amazing to me is the infinite variety of ways people in our times are
connecting with the concepts of other dimensions. Quantum physicists are
approaching this fascinating reality from the perspective of parallel universes.
Fred Alan Wolf is a physicist and author of five books, including Taking the Quan-
tum Leap that has won many awards. He is also “reader friendly” with a sense of
humor. He writes in his book, Parallel Universes, The Search for Other Worlds,
regarding a new paradox of time, “’If the future does send messages back to us, then
doesn’t that imply the existence of a future now? We take it for granted that the past was
real. We see it in our memories. However, if that was all there was to memory, our minds
would be bombarded by the vagaries of the uncertainty principle and we wouldn’t be able
to remember anything at all. … I think that the ability to remember the past is based on
our ability to remember the future as well. Both the past and the future must somehow
have previously existed as far as our memories are concerned. Only in this way can any
determined record exist. Thus any memory of the past -- something we witness in the
present -- is also being determined by the future. But if the future exists, just where is it?
In a parallel universe, naturally.”21

Whether we approach our multidimensionality from a perspective of one

multifaceted universe, parallel universes, other worlds or expanded states of
consciousness, clearly it is becoming a significant focus in our times. Spiritual
explorations of consciousness and various scientific disciplines are in agreement
about our ability to access experiences and information outside of our consensual
reality of ordinary time and space. What interests me is the question, how useful
is it? What does experiencing multidimensionality have to do with being here
and now on planet earth?

One of my dearest friends, a wise woman who loves this earth and continues to
return into a physical body to support its evolution, describes the shamanic
journey as a process that is “formatted for each individual’s screen.” In other
words, the information one receives in a shamanic journey is revealed or
explained in such as way as can be easily understood. This accounts for why a
group of shamanic journeyers can each have their own personal journey imagery
that essentially communicates the same premise or truth. In addition, the content
of journeys can stretch the journeyer beyond her or his current comfort zone so
that it becomes possible to perceive even more information.

Many years ago, my zone of comfort was greatly challenged when I was taken in
a shamanic journey to the very core of the earth. There, I met a group I call the
Little Gold Beings. They informed me that their job is to monitor the energy grid
system of the earth. Because my mind was already filled with the images of the
Earth’s molten lava or crystalline core, I asked many questions about how they
could exist within such an environment! They responded by showing me a com-
plex space, something like a vast computer array. The many systems in this place
were designed to monitor the activity of the planet’s energy. They asked me to in-
clude support for their work in my daily prayers. They asked me to become a
conduit, allowing the Source of All That Is to move through my body into the en-
ergy grid system of the earth. I was shown how to do this in a way that was safe
for my body. For many years now, I have done this daily. After I had been faith-
ful to this practice for quite a while, I met with these Beings again to see if my
daily ritual really did make a difference. They showed me specific events that had
occurred and how the Little Gold Beings had incorporated the energy directed
through my body to support and modulate them. Even though their “place” is
not part of this dimension, my mind has come to comprehend that they actually
exist and that they continue their commitment to support our planet from a di-
mension other than the one we inhabit.

Our brains’ left hemispheres really do like confirmation of experiences outside of

our comfort zone. As a result, I am always happy to read the work of others who
are being challenged in their views of reality and have similar experiences to my
own! Tanis Helliwell M.Ed. is an organizational consultant and teacher of inner
mysteries. She is a resident of Vancouver, Canada and since 1976 she has worked
to create healthy organizations and help people to develop their personal and
professional potential. In her book, her true story of her Summer with the Lep-
rechauns in Ireland she shares her unexpected experience with members of the
Elemental World that includes faeries, elves, devas, gnomes, leprechauns and
others. According to the particular leprechaun she came to know, these beings
seek to connect with and become co-creators with committed human beings who
believe in the elemental kingdom and have a desire to assist nature in healing the
Earth.

One night as she prepared for meditation in her cottage retreat, she felt a pres-
ence that was not her usual leprechaun friend. Asking her to suspend her disbe-
lief, the being responds to her request by saying, “I’m a being from the center of the
Earth.... We are an old race on this planet -- much older than humans -- and we do not
live in your dimension, We have little contact with humans but we are aware of all changes
that occur on this planet. We seek to work with humans who are helping to reestablish the
natural balance of the Earth in accordance with spiritual laws. This you are doing, and
this is the reason I’m here.” He continues,
“Our race has mastered the elements in a way
far superior to humans,,,We can control the
electromagnetic forces of the Earth to move in
space and time and between dimensions.”22

This being invites Tanis to join him in his

dimension to begin to learn how to shift
her atoms to be able to walk through solid
hedges as he demonstrated for her benefit.
After many unsuccessful tries to follow
his instructions,23 she was unable to do so.
She was exasperated. Her new teacher
understood. “Most humans are only
conscious in the first three dimensions. You
can see these as a stationary point, a line, a
cube. But there are twelve dimensions in all.
Your etheric body, or body elemental, works in
the fourth dimension and it has accomplished
what you have asked it to do. However, there is
great resistance in your mind to believe that
you can accomplish this in your third dimen-
sional reality. Even as you visualize yourself
doing it, part of your mind is saying it can’t
do it.... It’s just that most humans are not
conscious above the fifth dimension. When I
say, ‘above’ it’s not entirely accurate because
all dimensions exist simultaneously. It would be more accurate to say that the higher the
dimension, the more pure and subtle the energies.”24

When Tanis returned from the dimension of the Being who her Leprechaun friend
called the Ambassador, she plied him with questions about the Beings in the
center of the Earth. “There are ambassadors from the center of the Earth assigned to
every race evolving on the planet. The ambassador to the elementals has been working with
us before my time. Unlike humans, elementals have known about the beings in the center
of the Earth all along. They don’t communicate with elementals generally, but talk to our
masters and also to elementals who work directly with the earth element such as gnomes
and dwarfs. Since our caste was formed, the ambassador has spoken to us many times....
He’s teaching us how to maintain the Earth’s gravity and polarity... He even took us to the
center of the Earth to see what his people were doing. The ambassador is teaching us to
move the atoms in our bodies so that we can become denser or lighter.. If we can control
the movements of our atoms, then we can travel to many more dimensions without
affecting the life there.... Your atoms and mine are mixing up every time we meet, and
that changes both of us. When we talk and when we think about each other, our atoms
move together. Neither of us can control this presently, and we must learn to if we’re to
travel to other dimensions and not intersect with the atoms of beings there.”25

In my own work, it became clear to me that the process of calibrating my energy

to visit with the beings I have met in other dimensions is done for exactly the
same reason. It is important for us as humans to be able to connect, interact with
and learn from other dimensional beings to enhance the wellbeing of each. We
have gifts, information, truths to offer one another to enhance but not interfere
with the purposes of each dimension. I also believe, however, that in any
interaction, human and/ or with our multidimensional neighbors, changes and
shifts occur for all involved. I find this exciting and fully accept that this is part
of our responsibility to observe and monitor.

Although at this point in my life journey I have not yet successfully physically
shifted into another dimension, learning how to calibrate my energy system, as
my own spirit teachers have been guiding me to do, is at least a first crucial step.
I have a confirmation that learning how to allow my mind to give permission for
me to shift my atoms is the next step! This is, indeed, part of our heritage as
human beings on this planet.

Gregg Braden in his book The Divine Matrix, Bridging Time, Space, Miracles and
Belief addresses this process by using the analogy of our consciousness as a
computer system. “For all intents and purposes, the operating system of a computer is
fixed and doesn’t change. In other words, it ‘is’ what it is. When we want to see our
computer do something different, we don’t change the operating system -- we change the
commands that go to it. The reason why this is so important is that consciousness appears
to work in precisely the same way.”

He continues, “If we think of the entire universe as a massive consciousness computer,

then consciousness itself is the operating system, and reality is the output. Just as a
computer’s operating system is fixed and changes must come from the programs that
speak to it, in order to change our world, we must alter the programs that make sense to
reality: feelings, emotions, prayers, and beliefs.”26

Braden does offer the perspective that it is entirely possible to alter our
programming because both scientists and mystics agree that we are holographic
beings. “It ought to be equally apparent that we’re holographic bodies living in the
holographic consciousness of a holographic universe. We’re powerful beings expressing
ourselves through the bodies that extend beyond the edge of our cells to become the
universe itself. By simply ‘being’ who we are, we encompass the whole of creation, mir-
roring everything from the largest phenomenon to the minutest occurrence, from the
lightest of light to the darkest of dark.... Our bodies mirror the patterns of the universal,
embedded within more patterns, embedded within still more patterns and so on”27

He continues, “In the living hologram of our conscious computer, each and every piece
of the hologram, no matter how small, lives within the realm of its own space. As such,
it’s in the service of the greater whole. The subatomic particles, for example, are what the
atoms are made of and what determines how they work; the atoms, in turn, make up the
molecules and indicate how they work; the molecules comprise the cells of our bodies and
constitute how we work and our bodies are a mirror of the cosmos...” 28

Braden adds, “What a powerful model! Holographic consciousness provides for a change
made anywhere in the system becoming a change everywhere in the system. Even with six
billion-plus people now sharing our world, we all benefit to some degree from the choices
of peace and healing that are held by just a few.... Through our knowledge of the Divine
Matrix, we now have everything we need to embrace our power to create and apply what
we know to the great challenges of our time.” 29

For me a part of addressing these great challenges is to becoming better

acquainted with our multidimensional neighbors, honoring that being
multidimensional is part of our heritage and accepting that multidimensionality
is an integral part of holographic cosmos As we do this, we recognize that we
are all connected and impacting one another. As we become more conscious of
how we interact we can move forward with excitement instead of fear.
 5. Partnering With Our Multidimensional Neighbors

I feel privileged to have learned about our multidimensionality. I also have an

urgency to impart my experiences to you. This is because I believe that it is
ultimately very practical information. In this accelerating transition period on
our planet, we need to tap into every beneficial resource available to us that can
help us to access and trust the wisdom we carry in our being. Our souls and
our cells already carry what we need.

In a recent journey on behalf of a client, my partner was introduced for the first
time to the mother of her primary teacher. Her great, great, great Grandmother’s
mandate to us was clear. “In our generation we had our own baton to carry in the race
to support the human species to move forward. Now you have the baton to carry. It in-
cludes eradicating the multigenerational patterns you have played out of abused and the
abuser, victims and victimizer, tormented and the tormentor. These patterns must be
ended forever on your planet for it to reach its fullness.”

With a mandate of this magnitude, it seems like a “no brainer “ to access our
multidimensional selves and welcome the support of our multidimensional
neighbors. It also goes a long way to explain the growing number of people who
have incarnated here from other dimensions. In our shamanic healing practice,
we have met many people who have a longing or homesickness for somewhere
that they remember, a place that feel more like home than this realm. When these
clients tentatively share that from the time of their birth they have never felt
fully at home, they are usually quite relieved when we are both receptive and un-
derstanding of their feelings.

Our first experience of meeting someone with this story was many years ago in
our Foundation for Shamanic Studies (FSS) Three-Year Training Program
facilitated by Michael Harner and Sandra Ingerman. One of our dear friends from
the program was visiting us in our home. With great reservation, she broached
this subject. “How can I tell my husband of seven years that I am ’from away’?” In her
shamanic journeys, she had met the beings she had left to incarnate as an
emissary to planet earth. She shared with us her memory of being five years old,
packing a suitcase of her favorite things and walking off down the street to go
“home.” While her parents were loving people, she loved her little brother, and
she was well provided for, still she did not feel at home. She reached the end of
the street before she realized she had no idea where this home was or how to get
there. Now, many years later and after several successful careers, she had contact
with that dimension. She began to more fully understand why her perceptions
were often so different from those around her and also how useful her special
perspective is to people and situations here! This is how our friend shares her
story.

“This was an awareness since childhood – a ‘knowing’ that ‘home’ was somewhere in the
stars. I used to gaze upwards towards the Pleiades as a kid, with this inexplicable, deep
yearning to go home. It was much later as an adult, only have intentionally engaging in
my own healing process – not only shamanically, but also via Jungian dream analysis –
that my psyche brought me back again to the crossroads were I could either make a con-
scious choice to integrate these ‘alien’ parts of my being and risk taking the road less trav-
elled (and all the challenges and rewards that come with that choice), or to continue living
a split life organized around survival. The dream that broke through during my first
analysis was where I met a man with whom I had a deep soul connection. He told me he
was from another planet. My analyst at the time- one of those ‘out of the box’ analytic
moments that can be extraordinarily healing- just looked at me and replied. ‘Welcome!’”

What is significant in her story is that once she had an awareness and acceptance
of her home being another dimension of experience, she was able to intentionally
tap into their resources. In so doing, she felt more comfortable in her own body.
In essence, she was bringing more of her home vibration into all aspects of her
life. This supported her to heal the pain of loneliness she had felt in her earlier
years, to release the adaptive behaviors and defenses she had developed in an
effort to appear content with her life and to feel more free to embrace her unique
gifts.

This healing allowed her to be even more emotionally present. The effect was
acknowledged, appreciated, and supported by her husband even though his own
journey into form was quite different from her own. In time, they brought a
beautiful new life into their family. Their daughter is also “from away” and her
life is much more full of joyful support because of how our friend embraces the
awareness and wisdom from her home dimension.

Sometime later, a teenager was referred to us. She had a psychiatric history that
had begun when she was only five years old and expressed feeling suicidal. This
young woman was in a family with parents who loved her and could not com-
prehend her desire to die at such a young age. Through the years she had tried
various forms of self-mutilation to express her pain, and to tune out life.
When we first met her, she arrived with straggly hair covering her face. She was
wearing an oversized, Marilyn Manson t-shirt with sleeves that revealed the
many scars on her arms. Presenting herself as the picture of alienation, she had
prepared herself for another experience of being with people who didn’t “get it.”

Since she didn’t offer very much to help us to connect, we began to speak about
those we know who do not feel “at home” in this world. Although not much of
her demeanor shifted during the initial session, she agreed to return to hear more
of what she called “the weird stuff” that we do. We saw her again and when the
timing was right, we taught her how to connect with the beings she felt were
more compatible with her perceptions. Even though we did other forms of
shamanic healing on her behalf, it was learning the shamanic journey process that
put her in direct communication with her ”soul’s family.” These were beings in
another dimension with whom she was finally able to feel at home.

Having tried so many avenues of escaping this reality, she now began turning
her energy and attention to sharing some of the beliefs and ideas she knew to be
of value. She developed a website to share this information and was surprised at
the positive responses that she received. As she rapidly grew in her confidence,
she participated in activities supporting teens in emotionally and physically
abusive situations. While she moved forward in her life, she continued asking her
own guides to help her make sense of her place in this world. Through all of her
changes, her parents continue to love her. They have the awareness that while
they may not understand her perspectives, they fully support her efforts since she
no longer wants to harm herself.

Over the years, we have noticed commonalities among those who are “homesick”
for other dimensions. One of the common signs we see is an aversion to staying
fully present and being in the body. These individuals dissociate so much of the
time that many are not actually aware that they are dissociating. This may mani-
fest in a wide variety of physical symptoms, anxiety, depression, compulsions,
addictive behaviors, physical diseases, difficulties in maintaining significant rela-
tionships and more. People may or may not be conscious that their ambivalence
to “being here” includes fear of re-experiencing that first, original separation
from home, fear of being rejected for who they are, and the cultural ambivalence
about third dimensional reality which seems to have embedded itself over thou-
sands of years in collective attitudes that dishonor women, and devalue mother,
mater, matter, and therefore Mother Earth. Our friend who wanted to run away
from home shares that “resolving one’s personal ambivalence is the first step…but the
exquisite sensitivity that many of us who are or have been ‘homesick’ possess will occa-
sionally plunge us back into what first seems like old feelings and energies. Acknowledg-
ing that we can also be accurate barometers of the collective as part of our community
healing work is a way to reframe what can feel like a disturbing re-entry into stuff that we
thought we resolved on an individual soul level.”

Of course, dissociation can also be a sign of an early trauma history, so we

always spend time listening to a person’s story. In an atmosphere of compassion,
we listen to their words, observe their body language and ask gentle questions to
help them uncover the source of their discomforts and emotional pain. We have
found that when people are fully received for who they are and where they are
in their life process, they become much more candid with us and also with
themselves. As a result, we have been able to meet many people who have had
conscious awareness of their connections to beings and places beyond this
dimension.
In preparing for writing this book, I invited several of them to share their stories
in more detail in an interview modality. I asked each the same questions, letting
go of the outcome of where their responses might redirect my focus. The follow-
ing is an interview with a dear friend who I have known for many years, but had
never heard the origins of her connection with other dimensions.

Transcript from interview with S. D.

Allie Knowlton: “When were you first aware of spirits around you that were not in
physical form?”

S. D.: ‘I don’t sense that they were sprits. I sensed they were different. They were my
friends. They raised me, brought me up. They called themselves sprites. There were the lit-
tle ones who would hide behind the trees. They were always playful and cheerful. They
taught me songs, some I remember to this day. Funny little songs, cheerful songs. They
were extremely psychic and intuitive. Like there were wild boars in the woods and they al-
ways let me know where they were and showed me how to fine tune, scope out to find
where they were. Today I would call them nature spirits. As a child I just knew that they
were different.”

A: “Where did you grow up?”

S.D.: “Rockport, Massachusetts, in the woods. There amazing woods there with granite
quarries, and the ocean with its vastness. Just rocks with the tide pools. Being blessed
with growing up in a dysfunctional home, I spent my world in the safety of nature.”

A: ”How did you physically feel with the sprites around you?”

S.D.: "Loved! Totally loved! Unconditionally loved and happy and safe. Life was magical
when they were around. When they were around , there was always something going on,
something cheerful, miraculous, and safe. Things happened that there was no way it could
happen. Like when the wild boars came, they said jump up on the rock. The rock was eight
feet high and I was just a little girl and short! How did I get up there? They told me when
it was safe. I would look way down and wonder how did I get here? I guess I had that be-
lief instilled in me and still do today that miracles are a common everyday thing and we
can do what we need to do. The limitation came as I was trained out of that by school and
society.”

A: "You obviously have clear memories of that time in your life.”

S.D.: "Yes, I sure do. That was more family than this reality family. They are the ones
that were there for me. And fun!”
A: "Who, if anyone, supported the life that you lived in that magical world?”

S.D.: "Physically, actually no one, but in a metaphor there was a hermit who lived way in
the woods. I ran into him a few times, It was real. He wasn’t living life in the fast lane or
trying to impress anyone, or be anything for anyone. He was just living how he saw how
to fulfill his soul. He lived in a little shack in the woods. Every time I ran into him he
showed me different plants. Being in the woods I was hungry anyway. ‘So did you know
about these?’ He would ask me. What I learned from others about this hermit was ‘watch
out for that hermit, he’s a crazy guy’, but when I ran into him it was totally delightful.
He was one with nature and at peace within himself and his own soul. He had that
sparkle, that purity within himself of being one with and in nature. He was like a light
shining. Support? No one except metaphorically by him. He was quiet inside. The outside
world was scary. I didn’t meet anyone who were really at peace within themselves.”

A: “Was that like being with a “family” in the woods that were happy and contented and
being in the world with people around you that didn’t seem contented or have that aware-
ness?”

S.D.: “I couldn't understand it. At one point I remember as a child screaming up at the
sky at night, ‘I want to go home. There has been a mistake here.’ I knew the people in the
home I was in were loving people and doing the best they can, but their minds were sick.
They were caught in their own illusions.”

A: "Do you sense that as a child?”

S.D.: "Yes, and they were pressing their illusion on me, too. Another aspect of that is my
wanting to be in the spirit world. That was the one that had a passion for life and in life,
alive, full of passion. I found myself wanting to live in that world, because that was every-
thing to me and this world was messed up. I was out of my body -- way out. So a lot of me
left. I was under the illusion that the more I left my body the more I could live in that
world. At a later date, I made that determination that I really needed to be in my body, to
be grounded in my body in this world. What prevented me back then was my biggest fear
that by being in my body I would be disconnected from the spirit world. I didn’t want to
lose my friends, to be disconnected from my spirit family that had been there for me all my
life. And how would that be and what would that look like. That was a scary picture to
me, because I thought it would be disconnection from that. So I think that was my strug-
gle about coming back into my body, and actually learning, that no, I am connected but in
a different way. The fear was losing that connection, yes. I was out there, way out. I don’t
think there was anyone more out of their body than I was!”

A: "How did you resolve that fear of being disconnected from the spirit world and being
out a lot”
S.D.: "I had good communication. I was connected to the spirit world in a profound way
and when I had questions, the spirit in an instant showed me the scenario. Actually there
was a different scenario supposed to be played out for my life here, my soul’s purpose for
coming here and that did change. They showed me the whole scenario of the potential to be
played out in this lifetime and I made the decision to stay because there still will be bene-
fits for my soul’s evolution. Not what I chose before I came here, but when I went to the
grand computer in the sky and made my plan for when I came in here. I wonder if anyone
else’s plans go to the earth dimension fumbled along the way? I was shown that informa-
tion when I was screaming up into the sky ‘I want to go home’, on a soul level beyond the
human mind, but on the soul ‘s mind.”

A : "Do you remember the specific age when you had that experience?”

S.D.: "Probably around kindergarten age.”

A: "So you had the experience of re-choosing.“

S.D.: "Because the adoption didn’t go through. The soul had chosen a whole different sce-
nario. The adoption was already planned. The couple was already chosen. The people
backed out at the last moment.”

A: "So they backed out not your mother?”

S.D.: "Yes. They backed out. I didn’t know that until the spirits told me because of that
clear communication. Whatever the questions were, the answers would come. They never
tell you what to do, they just show you all the scenarios and you decide what to do.”

A: "My own belief is that some children do leave when they are young and things have
changed and some like yourself choose to stay.”

S.D.: “The communication just comes in telepathically, or somehow, and it is our job to
turn it into English! How can you get such a grand plan into the English language!
When people started noticing how psychic I was they started calling me evil. So I was
evil.”

A: "About how old do you think you were when people were noticing your psychic abili-
ties?”

S.D.: "Probably six or seven, first grade. [They labeled me] With that evil thing. That was
a lot for a young child and the energy detachment. To be labeled evil when I believed it is
God’s information coming through to help us.”

A: “In some other cultures when adults realized a child had these abilities they would say,
‘this child should go and study with so and so.’ But even in those countries often times
the parents were scared that their child was different. So how did you deal with that dis-
connect?”

S.D.: "Disappeared more into nature. I was only in that house at bedtime. There were en-
tities in that house from the abuses, alcoholic and all this dark energy running around. A
lot of the nights I would stay awake all night. There was a weeping willow whose
branches came close to the ground so I could sleep there during the day and no one could
see me. That tree would watch over me and keep me safe and was cheerful. The nature
spirits are cheerful and upbeat.”

A: ”As I know you, that is your natural way of being.”

S.D.: ”Oh, yes!”

A: "When you talked about the spirits around the house. Did you see spirits there as
well?”

S.D.: "Oh yes. And then as a child I would be going down these stairs or up these stairs
journey style. I would see a set of stairs. When I woke up I would search the house for the
stairs. Where did my grandmother hide the stairs? It was wild. Good though.”

A: "When you were in the house and saw spirits that were not particularly helpful, what
did you do to protect yourself?”

S.D.: "As a child I would take the salt shaker and put a circle of salt around my bed and
my grandmother would always yell at me about making a mess on the floor and where
was the salt shaker. Strange how the intuition comes through.”

A: "Your family just didn’t have the understanding for that at all.”

S.D.: "No. As a young child , getting that information from spirit , it must be true. It was
an empowerment piece for me, too, knowing I would be safe if I did that. I could sleep if I
did that, if I didn’t, I couldn’t.”

A: “What do you think was the impact on your physical body experiencing the difference
between these delightful spirits you met in nature and those you saw in your house that
were scary and dark?”

S.D.: "It’s funny. I could see all those emotionally energies of jealously, envy, anger, that
built those dark entities. When I went outside, I could be cleansed by the nature spirits in-
side and out of all those dark energies. Without them I probably would have had some sort
of break down for sure. To be in total insanity and then go outside and in five to fifteen
minutes be real clear and pure -- to be cleansed again. Nature will always heal you and
give you everything you need in a gentle way.”

A: "Maybe you also resolved it my being out of your body.”

S.D.: "I moved out at twelve and resolved not to relate to adults. People were not safe. I
got a job at a stable taking care of horses. Nature was great. I would be on a horse in the
middle of the woods and everything would be fine:”

A: "At what point did you realize that your peers were not on the same page as you?”

S.D.: "Probably kindergarten. Getting excited that I would be with other girls my age and
then seeing that they had a whole different perception of reality than I did. There was one
girl. Her family had a farm. She was in tune with the animals. Some of the girls had no
concept except this illusionary world. Strange to talk to them, actually. I'm remembering
some instances as we are talking about it.”

A: “Do you recall any specific memory?”

S.D.: ”I remember being in kindergarten, a blond headed girl running over and hugging
me and wanting to be my friend. I started talking to her, and oh! Her picture of the world
was not my picture of the world.”

A: "Do you remember the feeling?”

S.D.: “Odd.”

A: "I remember you telling one time about an experience with the wind.”

S.D.: "We had a big hurricane and everyone was taping up their windows. The tree told
me it was going to fall. I told my grandmother the tree was going to fall. She said, ‘Oh no,
no, no.’ The tree was really old and you couldn’t stretch your arms around it. I kept say-
ing it’s going to fall and finally after a million times. I guess she sensed in my voice that
it would fall. I wanted everyone to move to the back room and she said no, it’s going to fall
this way. The tree told me where it was going to fall and it did right where it told me. I
think as a child I influenced it too because I rocked with it. I was one with it and in
communication with it. I was watching it rock. I kinda felt guilty like I made that tree
fall.”

A: "Developmentally we know that up to at least the age of seven all children have what
is called magical thinking where they believe that they cause everything, both good and
bad. I’m wondering if that developmental period and your strong connection with the
natural world came together to create that feeling of guilt.”
S.D.: "I don’t know. I also knew I had a power about me, too. I believed it. I could jump
up on a rock six feet higher than myself without even running, just sort of leaping. I
could just leap and be up there. How did that happen! So I knew I had the power to make
that tree fall. But also I was so in tune with the trees and nature that I could have felt it.
Who knows maybe it was some psychic anger I had towards the household situation that
tree took the hit and fell for me. It could have been a lot of different things. I knew exactly
where it was going to fall.”

A: "So did you finally convince them to not be in that area?”

S.D.: "No, they won’t listen to me, so we went into the back room and the tree fell and
came through part of the roof in the back room. I ran out at the last minute and yelled,
‘It’s coming this way!’ A child was never validated!”

A: "I have another question. What was the sense of your power as a child? You had both
this magical sense and terrifying things happening to you in this situation you were liv-
ing in. How did you perceive your power?”

S.D.: "I think I gave it up. I think at some point I felt --- I don’t know. I gave something
away, like that sacrificial lamb. The abuse was the abuse. If I started anything my grand-
mother would get beaten up and then it would be my fault. So I guess I gave a lot of my-
self up to appease. Yuk. It’s crazy. It’s insane!“

A: ”But you said it with the word appease. That’s what you came for, to make a difference
from what you said earlier, so if you wanted to make a difference you took the blame, it
seems, to try to make things better.”

S.D.: "Yea, amazing. It’s the adults who are supposed to make the difference, to take re-
sponsibility. It shouldn’t be up to the children! The children are always the ones to take it
on when the adults don’t.”

A: "So there was a sense of something lost in that period of time in your connection with
your own power.”

S.D.: "Absolutely. A whole lot!”

A: "Is that about the same time that the abuse started with your grandfather?”

S.D.: "That abuse went on the whole time with my grandfather until I was twelve. But
that was at an older age. I just remember that one time when enough was enough. My
grandmother was on the floor all broken up. I just said, ‘Fuck it’ so to speak. I’ll do what I
need to do so that wouldn’t happen anymore So I gave something big up at that time. She
just wouldn’t move. She wanted to stay with that alcoholic grandfather. She wouldn’t
move. It’s crazy.”

A: "That must have created a lot of confusion between your reality that made sense to you
and what you experienced in your house and at school!”

S.D.: "What happened is that I stopped going to school and started going into the woods
everyday. I think I was out of school two or three months before anybody took any action
on it. The result of that time in the woods is that I saw how this world is reality crazy and
that world was beautiful and my wanting to be in that world. I think at different times
I've had opportunities in my life where I knew I could just walk off into that woods and
become invisible. I think literally. I could just walk into the woods into a different dimen-
sion. There are three distinct points were I was at that crossroads.”

A: "In those three different times, did you follow through and have a different experience,
or did you stay?”

S.D.: "No. I remembered , whoa was I really tempted. Because I knew it would be delight-
ful. Maybe I wasn’t ready to jump off that cliff. Each time I “d be ready, I want that, to
get out of this crazy world and into some sanity. But again, it was unfamiliar. What
would it really be like? How would it look? How would it smell? How would it feel? That
child was not being ready to jump off that cliff each time. I was almost there each time, al-
most. I could take a step in that direction and then take a step back.”

A: "Did you know at that time that you had a choice?”

S.D.: "Always my choice. Always my choice.”

A: "That kind of experience always blows me away, how incredibly resilient children are
that they can have those ‘knowings’ and there would be no judgment either way. Someone
could reach that point and decide to jump off the cliff, as you say. I think it is powerful
that we know even as children that we have that choice.”

S.D.: "Spirit said, it would be good for you to do this, good for you to do that and this is
the dynamics of this, and this is the dynamics of that. Whatever way you go it’s good.
They show you the different variables and dynamics of and It’s your choice. I think that’s
happened in my life when I was on the edge. I could flip out and how that would all play
out, or I could hold myself together and that’s how that would play out. Spirit gave me a
picture of myself on this wall and ‘Ok Suzanne. You can go this way and it will all be
beautiful, or you can go this way and it will all be beautiful.’ Different challenges, differ-
ent lessons.”

A: "Many believe that we are living in parallel realities, and that part of me is choosing
this path and another part of me is simultaneously following another path, -- so the soul
has a chance to follow all of those choices, like a radio band where all the stations are all
playing at one time but we tune into one band at a time. If we turned the dial we would be
experiencing ourselves in what we have called our past life or a future life. Yet actually we
are living it all at one time!”

S.D.: "It is like a vision I had at one time. We are all from God. We are all part of God’s
Light. We are parts of God experiencing Itself so to speak. So here is the Big Light. Then
another part of that vision is here is [me] and here is [my] light and all the past lives and
here is [my] light experiencing itself. Microcosm/macrocosm. I went in with a prayer
about some past life stuff going on for someone else. That’s how I saw it. I saw it like the
bright lite children’s toy. One light will pop up when that one needs a healing. All know
that each one of us is God experiencing Itself.“

A: "At this time in your life, how do you feel about how those experiences and choices you
made as a child impact your life now?”

S.D.: "Love it. Hum. I guess I’ll answer it in metaphor. I had a dream and in this dream I
was on the other side of a river and I needed to get to the other side of this river. It was re-
ally beautiful over there. I looked down and saw all these poisonous snakes in the river.
Millions of them. Big poisonous snakes in the river. They were orange and ugly, so obvi-
ously I wasn’t going to just jump in and be dead before reaching the other side. So in my
dream I stood there and asked what are these. Each snake spoke. Each snake was one of my
little ‘persnickerties’, my shit things. I stood there and said, ‘Oh my God, they are the
ones that have made me what I am. They helped me to become more compassionate. They
all had names and came forth and told me what they were . And some were, oh that’s not
me and some were oh so distinctly me! The seen and the unseen. I just stood there with
total love and appreciation and gratitude. I just said ‘thank you’ and they all sort of
parted. I dove in and slowly and enjoyably swam to the other side. I have to say that my
soul chose to come and have all those experiences. So I’m not going to be mad at myself
and kick my own ass. I do enough of that! The only battle we have is the battle with our-
selves. That wasn’t beauty, but it certainly created beauty. I know that divine union is
total enjoyment of life and in life I know that it is joyous and happy and delightful. I know
that. I have absolute and total faith in God and Spirit. Total faith. I know the only thing
that blocks the way is us. I am just searching for ways that we don’t block ourselves.
We’ve kicked ourselves in the ass long enough. What do we need to do to just let it flow? I
think how working with the Spirits has affected me? They can cure anything from aids to
leukemia, cancer. I’ve seen it in an instant. I know God the Creator is totally miraculous,
right there, available.”

A: “What would you like to recommend to parents who become aware that they have a
child like you—a child who is open to the Spirit world and sees, perceives, or knows Spirit
as part of their life? What recommendations would you make to these parents as to how to
support their child or children?”
S.D.: "That these loving and compassionate spirits are God’s Messengers. They have come
to help us and guide us and to help us to make the best choices. Creator God loves us so
much, that Creator God gives us these Compassionate Spirits to watch over us and help
us. So let the parents know that! To encourage this by asking at breakfast what the dreams
were, a rundown of the dreams, including the parents dreams. Encourage the children.
Encourage their intuitions in everyday ways. Like when you pull into a gas station, ask
the kids, how does this feel? Or into a restaurant, how does this feel? How does it feel to
stop at this point in time. Just ask the kids. Keep asking the kids. They know a lot. When-
ever I have a question I go ask the kids, and they give me good answers. And I say, whoa,
where did that come from? So I say, encourage their intuitions and instincts.”

A: “What answer would you give to kids themselves when they come up to you and they
obviously know you know about spirits? You know they are trying to get some support
from you. How would you support them?”

S.D.: “I always say words of encouragement, like putting water on a flower -- water and
sunshine. I think with kids, a lot of them come to me to talk about their experiences. I just
sit and listen and dialogue with them. And have them find the answers for themselves.
‘Look at that dynamic, there. Did you notice this? What do you think that meant?” Have
them find their own answers. ‘ Did you notice that this, this and this were all synchro-
nized?’ The kids are always having experiences. ‘How did that feel inside your stomach?’
Be a cheerleader, guide, listen, listen to them. It’s like rain on a flower!”

A: "In the end it really is that simply, isn’t it?”

S.D.: "What’s your imaginary friend’s name. What does he look like? Does he want to sit
down, too? You know, that is one of God’s messengers for you. It is one of God’s special
helpers who is here to help you, just acknowledge that.’ If they want to bring their imagi-
nary friend in the car with us, that’s fine with me!”

A: "Honoring their reality.”

S.D.: "Yea. Everyone is looking for someone to come here and save us, our church, our re-
ligion, our politicians, even aliens from out of space. In reality we are the ones who are
here to save ourselves.”

A: “What my experience with other dimensions offers is the confirmation that other di-
mensions do exist that we can access. The more comfortable we are that other dimensions
are accessible helps us to move out of the limitations we have chosen to survive growing
up, or whatever has made us more limited than we need to be.”

S.D.: "We are multidimensional people. Who taught us that we are not? Who taught us
that this is the only reality? When I’m driving down the road, I know I’m driving in the
illusion, and I have to wait for the reality to come and guide me all along. Everything is
going to guide me step by step driving as long as I am awake and aware that there are
other dimensions. I’ve got to wait for the hawks, the crows to come along. Yes, I think we
are in a very crucial time in our history and I think there are a lot of special children
being born. My mind flipped back to the prayers for the seven generations. Those prayers
began a while back and guess what, the seventh generation is here now! They are younger
than us. These old souls are being incarnated into bodies at this time so they are going to
have’ more of a multidimensional way and awareness about them because that is their re-
ality. Their souls say they are here to make a difference at this time.”

A: "It is people like you and us in this room that have come earlier to prepare a receptivity
for them when they come. That seventh generation can come very quickly. If you have sev-
eral early deaths in one generation, that next generations of soul may come thirty years
before the rest. Some people have children at fifteen.”

S.D.: "I bet we are the seventh generation, with that hippy movement. It was a blowing
out of consciousness. They had to think for themselves at that time.”

A: "It may be that everybody is part of that seventh generation and not everyone is aware
of it yet. More and more people are waking up to who they really are. I think the parents
who are blown away by their kids and are not sure how to raise and support them, deeply
desire for their kids to hold on to who they are. They know they need help in supporting
their kids to hold on to their magical and spirit connections.”

A: "I want to thank you for participating in this process!”

S.D.: "Yea!”

J.L.’s Story

The fire crackled and sparks flew up to join the vast array of stars in the night
sky. The waves that had gently lapped the shores of the lake began to quicken.
The candles that had been carefully placed in small niches in the rocks blew out
one by one leaving only the fire to light up the eager faces around the blaze. It
was the second weekend of their shamanic apprenticeship. Each of them had be-
come a part of the group to deepen their connection to their spirit teachers and
allies. During that special night, as each shared an experience that had
strengthened their relationship with themselves, each other and their Spirit
teachers, the magic grew more intense. It seemed this night of sharing was richer
than other times. They were sharing deeply, from the very core of their being.

Each apprentice was eager to clarify their role in the changes they were feeling on
the Earth and to bring their skills for working with those changes up to par.
There was an atmosphere of anticipation in the group that had developed
through their experiences of being in a maturing community and receiving more
spiritual support. They were developing a deeper trust in themselves and in
spirit. There was also a sense of vulnerability in that there was much more to
experience and to learn. They understood that this was a part of being more fully
prepared for their own personal journeys and the transition of the planet.

The pensive mood was broken by one of the camp personnel bringing our group
a big bag of marshmallows. Apparently, those that had decided to sleep out
that night had mentioned this to the staff member and so he appeared with
his contribution! Most of the participants lingered by the fire to enjoy the
marshmallows and the relationships they were forming with each other. In the
middle of this, I noticed that one of the apprentices who had agreed to help me
set up the campfire evening slipped off into the night. It was not like her to have
not appointed someone else to assist in gathering the candles before the early
morning rain that was predicted. I let this thought go, thinking that she was
weary and just honoring her need to sleep in preparation for the training
program’s next day of activities.

Months later, she came for a healing session with us to report a major transition
in her life and to receive some guidance. She wanted to understand the
experience more completely. She shared that during the sharing on that campfire
night, she had felt that one star seemingly singled her out and it transferred
energy into her. This experience moved her so deeply that she could not speak of
it that night. She also shared since becoming part of the shamanic program’s
apprentice community, she was no longer feeling the suicidal feelings that had
gripped her every Autumn of her life since she was ten years old.

It was at the age of ten that this dear woman’s life was radically changed. It was
then that the father she dearly loved and felt a strong connection with, died. As is
often the case, her mother who was not only feeling her own grief but needing to
take care of two children, became emotionally unavailable. This left J.L. feeling
completely abandoned and unsupported. She developed severe headaches and
had spent much of her adult life following medical routes to find relief from the
debilitating pain and depression. In her professional life, she pursued a career in
the sciences as they were something concrete and trustworthy. As a teacher, she
was both loved and respected by her students and colleagues and yet through it
all, the terrible headaches continued. When she came to us for shamanic healing,
it included learning how to journey into the realms of spirit. Through her connec-
tions with her spiritual supports, she became clear that the source of these
headaches was not so much physical dysfunction as about learning how to
work with her unique energy system. With this focus, the headaches became
manageable and much less frequent. At last, she began to feel a greater sense of
wellbeing. At some point, her experience with the star faded into memory.

Later on, the frequency and intensity of headaches began increasing again. In her
frustration, she asked for clarification about it in a shamanic journey. She was
immediately met by a spirit she called a “star being.” She realized that this being
was connected to the star that sent her energy on that night around the campfire.
This being took her to place of origin before coming to this planet, her “home.”
This was incredibly surprising to her, as she had developed a profound love for
this planet. Her work was helping to educate young people about the precious
nature of the Earth and she was often profoundly sad about how human beings
violated her beloved planet. The star being informed her that her soul had made
the choice to bring a specific vibration to the earth plane. This vibration was nec-
essary to support the transition the Earth is moving through. The being told her
that it was time for her to learn how to work with her unique energy. She was
shown that she had made the choice to incarnate here because her vantage point
in her home dimension had revealed how her vibration could contribute to this
critical time.

During her visit with the star being, she was informed that the increased
headaches were a signal that her body was going through a cellular transforma-
tion to support her to fulfill this commitment! She was also advised that her star
community would assist her in any way they could. J.L. was to be a bridge
person and conduit so that they could offer more support to humans during this
major transition. Even though her scientifically trained mind was doing the
equivalent of rocking in a chair and shredding tissues, her core being knew this
information was accurate. Indeed, the information she received in her journeys
put a great number of things in place for her to understand her life more clearly.

Other examples

These are some concrete examples of specific individuals’ evolution happening in

concordance with our planetary evolution. There are many souls incarnating who
have never been human on this earth or have not incarnated for many lifetimes.
At this time, they are making the choice to be here in a physical body to bring a
specific talent or vibration to assist this time of transition. Many times their
personalities may have no memory of their commitment. This can make it
difficult to make sense of their unique way of perceiving and why they struggle
with feeling incompatible with their family of origin or out of sync with their
companions. In not remembering, they often feel a deep sense of not belonging
and are confused about why they are here. However, some of the children that
are now being born retain a profound inner awareness. They hold on to the
understanding that they have chosen to come here for some reason, even if that is
not yet clear.
An example of this occurred recently in my meeting with a nine year old who
had been brought by her concerned parents. Her teacher at school had expressed
concern to the parents because this delightful child was worried about a little girl
in her class that looked pale and sick. The teacher was puzzled as there wasn’t
any sick girl in her classroom. It turns out that the wise young child was seeing a
spirit. As she felt free to tell her story, she told about observing a man in her
house who looked sad. She told her parents that he had a hole in his head.
Surprisingly, the child was not disturbed by seeing these spirits or by the
knowledge that her parents and siblings did not share in her ability. She just
wanted to be able to live her own life and focus on her schoolwork. What she
could not understand was why these spirits did not know that God loves them
so they could simply go to Heaven. In our session together, we talked about why
some people who die do not seem to be able to see their way “into the Light”.

In an effort to support her, I did a journey to assist the distressed spirits she
perceived. I narrated the journey out loud so that she could follow the process.
She was able to participate in helping them get to a place of peace by caring about
them. As a part of our time together, I also brought her back her own power
animal. This protective spirit would be the one she could rely upon to help those
spirits she notices so she can keep her full attention on her own life and still feel
she was helping others which was also very important for her. During our time
together, she asked many questions and it left me feeling as if I was having a
conversation with one of our adult apprentices! When I saw her at a later time,
she reported that in being able to talk about her experiences, her teenage brother
opened up about his own ability to perceive spirits. She now realizes that she
shares a family gift!

One of our apprentices took our training program to prepare her for supporting
children like this nine year old. It is her dream to develop an apprenticeship
especially tailored for children. Her own daughter reminds her regularly that she
deserves and needs the same kind of training her mother received from us! Her
daughter is so determined in her own quest that she asked to attend one of our
basic journey workshops as a Christmas present. While she was there, she
participated in equal measure with the adults.

As it happened, in that class there were three family systems with young people
from twelve to twenty years old. One young woman in particular, had come to
us earlier in her struggles to move out of cocaine addiction. She had spent years
in rehabilitation programs, but she knew herself well enough to know she was
vulnerable for a major slip. During her years of drug use, she had become
receptive to a possession. A possessing spirit is the spirit of a dead person that
has not made a complete transition into “the Light.” Since they haven’t
completed their death journey, they retain all of their personality traits. The spirit
that had attached itself to this young woman was a prostitute and drug addict.
The spirit had taken up residency inside this young woman’s body at the height
of her addiction and when she most vulnerable. Since the spirit was most com-
fortable with addition, her energy encouraged the addictive process. Once we
released this possessing spirit into the Light, the changes in the young woman’s
body were quite remarkable. She began picking up more responsibility for her
life and happiness. Her changes were so profound that the woman’s mother, who
had exhausted herself in trying to save her beloved daughter, began her own
spiritual journey of healing in this workshop.

Another family came to us for additional support for their young teen-aged
daughter. The daughter was being kept awake nearly every night by spirits who
needed help. Since she was able to perceive them she wanted to help, but she was
also recovering from Lyme Disease and needed sleep to strengthen her immune
system. She was torn as her heart felt that she couldn’t say no to those needing
help and she held memories of a “time” and another “place” when she could
assist others. While her parents understood that she was extremely sensitive and
had special attunement with the ”other worlds,” they had no idea how to help
her to get the sleep she required. Her father was a practical man who desired to
protect his daughter but had no clue how to help this situation. Her mother was
spiritually aware, and had concern about her daughter and the nightly visitors.

My partner and I listened to the family’s many animated stories and could feel
the love and respect they held for one another. However, these strong
relationships were not enough to quell the anxiety they were experiencing due to
their nightly visitors. There were unexplained sounds in the night that awakened
them and there were uncomfortable energies each of them felt in their own ways.
As they continued sharing their separate experiences, they become aware of
situations they had not fully shared with each other. When my partner and I we
checked in with our spirit teachers, it became clear that there were several levels
of spirit activity occurring in and around their home.

This lovely young woman was aware that she also had guides around her, but
had not officially met them. That was a perfect opening for us to teach the entire
family to journey. Since a workshop wasn’t scheduled for a while, we taught
them privately. As a part of the process, each of them had the intention to meet
with a protecting spirit who could assist them individually and as a family.

The daughter’s power animal agreed to take on the role of guiding any stuck
spirit into the Light so she could receive the sleep she needed. Her other helping
spirits assured her that when she was physically well enough for her next level of
spiritual training, they would support her. She would be helped to remember
why she incarnated, to recall the skills she brought into this life and to be
supported to manifest her soul’s intent more fully. Her father’s spirit guide
agreed to assist him when necessary so he could feel more confident in his role as
his family’s protector. This connection helped him to open up to his own
spirituality. The mother’s guide agreed to support her to release fears instilled
by her earlier religious training so she could be more present for her daughter.
This was a great benefit as the daughter felt her mother’s fear, which then
elicited a desire to protect her. This emotional role reversal only served to
increase the daughter’s sense of being alone in her beloved family. For our part,
our spirit teachers created protection around the entire house so that any
unbeneficial energy could not penetrate the intended barrier. This action
combined with the family’s supportive spirits created a much more peaceful
home!

When we next met with this family, they reported that all were sleeping well,
the house was quiet at night, and they all better understood the unique gifts of
the young girl. Over the years, they have occasionally checked in with us about a
new situation. We either guided them to resolve the situation with more
information or supported them in a session to journey to their own spirit guides
for advice. Each of the situations helped them to gain greater clarity about raising
and being a spirit-sensitive person.

These stories and so many more I hear encourage me to pass on the seemingly
miraculous abilities I know are available to every one of us. Even as we are
learning, my multidimensional teachers tell me that they continue to learn from
us. They do this as they continue supporting our progress both individually and
collectively.
 6. Multidimensional Healing

Exploring how people heal continues to be an ongoing passion in my life. In my

experience, healing may occur across many dimension including the emotional,
mental, physical, spiritual, and subtle energy body levels. The personal spiritual
explorations I have chosen as a part of my own life journey have led me to be
curious about the mechanisms that generate healing.

The scope of this book is not to enter into a scholarly dissertation regarding the
implications of spiritual or non-local healing. The examples provided in these
pages are to establish that my rational mind continues to search for validation of
my personal experiences with my spirit teachers. I believe this might also be true
for the readers of this book, too. Validation helps us to trust our experiences even
more deeply.

During my years in theological seminary I wondered what healing was possible

through a person’s relationship with the numinous. Does having a spiritual
connection facilitate healing? Pouring over the Old and New Testaments, I saw
many examples of how people experienced and expressed their relationship with
the sacred energies that connect all things. These individuals found great solace
in their beliefs and I felt a deep connection to them. Indeed, my Old Testament
professor’s opening greeting to us as new theological students was, “you are here
to meet your ancestors.” I felt that those who had come before me had accessed
healing in their connection to the Divine. As a part of my explorations, I was
particularly excited by the relationship between prayer and healing. At that time
in the early nineteen sixties, I was surprised to discover that there was very little
academic documentation for this premise. Today, there have been hundreds,
perhaps thousands of studies that verify the effectiveness of prayer in healing.
Both prayers by the person who is ill and remote prayers on behalf of ill people
have been studied have produced concrete, reproducible results that support the
positive effect that prayer has on the mental, physical and spiritual health of a
person.

After several years as a minister, I was guided to a second career working in a

mental health center. That eventually led me to a graduate degree and a private
practice as a social worker. In those years, I explored the human psyche in depth.
I was particularly moved by the complex ways individuals develop in an effort to
heal. For some, wounds so horrific necessitated them creating totally different
personalities within one physical body. In this way, the pain and trauma could be
compartmentalized in such a way as to allow them to negotiate daily living. How
amazingly creative! As a therapist, I would witness and help facilitate a client’s
healing process. As we worked together, they would begin to regain a healthy
sense of themselves yet, I kept bumping up against a wall. Even though they
would work extremely diligently and creatively on their therapy, something was
still missing. For all their work, it seemed that they could still need more to feel
fully alive and able to participate in the richness of life. During this time, I
remember being deeply moved when a client asked me to explain “joy” to her.
Due to the extensiveness of her abuse history that began at the age of six-months-
old, she had no ability to relate to this feeling. That emotional circuit appeared to
be missing. Since I have a deep belief that everything is healable, I wanted to find
a way to support my clients to feel their own fullness.

In the process of learning to expand my own consciousness through the shamanic

journey process, it became clear to me that going “outside of time and space”
held a powerful potential for healing what hasn’t been able to be healed through
other methods. I wondered if a person’s originating traumas could be
addressed by journeying back in history. This would mean that it was possible to
go on behalf of a client, or support the client his or herself, to enter an expanded
state of consciousness to go back in their history and heal the traumas that were
still impacting them. What I knew from my own experiences with the journey
process was that it was not necessary to relive the traumatic experience. It could
be shown as a “movie” to clarify what needs healing. The spirit beings that heal
could then facilitate the appropriate actions to alleviate the trauma.

It turned out that this method is particularly beneficial for persons tormented by
memories that could not seem to be released from the deepest level of their being.
It is also helpful in discovering the source of unbeneficial patterns and releasing
their grip on the psyche. In exploring the sources of patterns and traumas with
my clients, I found that they sometimes entered into what felt to be a past life
experience. This was true even when they did not believe in this possibility.
Of course, since the shaman’s journey does allow us to expand our consciousness
beyond ordinary time/space, then all experiences that are traumatic and
unresolved may be addressed.

While other methods may give a person access to information about past
experiences, the action of stepping back in time while awake, provides the client
with a profound opportunity to actively participate in their own healing. I use the
expression “back in time,” knowing that actually all time exists simultaneously. It
is simply easier for our minds to understand the world that way. Introducing the
concept of concurrent life times is not yet understood by everyone and could add
additional stress for the client when the focus needs to be on healing the
traumatic experience.

Sometimes, a trauma traps an aspect of the soul in that experience. When the
trauma is healed, the energy that was held there is freed to return to the person’s
current body. When the trauma is healed it can also release a client’s gifts and
talents that are useful to enjoying a fulfilling life. Even in those circumstances
when traumas are not the issue, a person can have unacknowledged abilities
opened up through connection with the world of the spirits.

As a social worker, I have always included a spiritual approach to the life

situations a client would present, being mindful of their personal spiritual
perspectives and preferences. However, the additional ability to go outside of
time and space opens healing opportunities that are unlimited in their
possibilities. As I continue to expand my use of journeying, I find that its benefits
continue to open up.

In the first Teachers of Shamanism Two-year Program at Sunrise Springs in Santa

Fe, New Mexico, Sandra Ingerman invited us to sit back-to-back in small groups
while we journeyed. With our rattles to support us to maintain an expanded state
of consciousness, she asked us to go out side of time and visit our descendants.
We were asked to find out what kinds of healing they were practicing in a future
time when the cutting edge surgical techniques of today are considered primitive.
Out of the sixty or so participants who journeyed, everyone received amazingly
similar information. Our descendants revealed that most of the healing in the
future was facilitated through the use of sounds and colors. Amazingly, surgery
as it is practiced today had become irrelevant and the diseases we
struggle with now no longer existed. As sound and color are vibration, it was
clear was that we were being shown that the imbalances that may have caused ill-
ness or interfered in some other way with the health of an individual, were
healed through vibration.

So how exactly is vibration related to healing? In his ground-breaking book, Vi-

brational Medicine, Richard Gerber, MD writes that, “vibrational healing methods
represent new ways of dealing with illness. Practitioners of subtle-energy medicine
attempt to correct dysfunction in the human organism by manipulating invisible yet
integral levels of human structure and function. Healing at the level of human
subtle-energy anatomy is predicated upon the New Physics understanding that all
matter is, in fact, a manifestation of energy. As science and technology evolve to make
that which was formerly unseen visible, more scientists and physicians will be forced to
change their viewpoint about the extended nature of human beings...” He continues,
supporting his position when he states, “The ultimate approach to healing will be to
remove the abnormalities at the subtle-energy level which led to the manifestation of
illness in the first place. This will be the greatest difference in approach between the
traditional medicine of today and the spiritual/holistic medicine of the future.”30

Dr. Gerber’s perspective is that spiritual healing “attempts to work at the level of the
higher subtle bodies and chakras to effect a healing from the most primary level of disease
origins. The spiritual healer works as a power source of multiple-frequency outputs to
allow energy shifts at several levels simultaneously.... The nature of this higher
dimensional energy is that it transcends all limitations of space and time by virtue of the
fact that levels from the etheric and higher energies are in the domain of negative
space/time. As such, the energies working on these levels move in a dimension that is
outside of the usual references of ordinary (or positive) space/time to which the conscious
mind is limited in its perception. However, the frequencies at which spiritual healing
takes place often extend to the same levels at which the Higher Self exists and operates.”31

Larry Dossey, MD refers to the changes in medical understanding by describing

three eras of medicine. The first era began in the last half of the 19th century. He
calls this period the era of mechanical medicine. This era saw the rise of the drugs
and surgery to address disease. Era II or the mind-body medicine began in the
1950s and includes the impact of emotions and thought process on our bodies.
This employs visualization, positive thinking or attitude to change the health
state of the person. We are now entering into Era III , which he calls the era of
non-local medicine. This involves affecting the mind/body/spirit of another even
at a distance for the purpose of healing. Dossey’s and others’ studies on the effec-
tiveness of prayer, are examples of this kind of medicine. He calls this Eternity
Medicine because it suggests that since consciousness (what I call spirit or soul) is
outside of the limits of time and space, it exists without limits or finality. Era III’s
Eternity Medicine implies our inherent capacity for immortality, something that
is not implicit in the views of Era I or Era II. Dossey suggests that since that
which animates our form is not locked into space and time, that it is non-local, it
may be tapped into to open up unlimited possibilities for healing. He asserts that
his willingness to continue his own research on this Eternity Medicine is based on
a growing body of scientific studies that show that the mind can and does func-
tion outside the body, or non locally.32 Indeed, physicists suggest that our con-
sciousness is not a product of our body or mind, it is instead what actually
creates the body, mind and all that we understand as physically real.33 The non-
local aspect of us is what generates and regenerates the local.

Back in the 1980’s when my first identified spirit guide, Zelda and I were begin-
ning our long-term relationship, I asked her to explain more about healing. This
was her reply. “To be healed is the purpose of being on planet earth. There are a great
variety of ways to seek and experience healing. There is One Healer who heals all. That is
God. God wishes wholeness for all. You fight it because you do not understand what it is.
It is to be totally open to the Universal Energy which meets all needs and redirects any
negative forces which impede the healing process.”34

Zelda continued, “Healing opens us up to all the forces of the galaxies. There are
energies available that we ourselves are coming to know better. We, too, are learning all
the time. It is exciting, especially without the necessary limitations of the human
body-form. We are all created from the Whole. Only our thinking limits our experience
of the Whole!”35
So, how do we tap into the Universal Energy? How do we open up to “all the
forces of the galaxies” for our healing and the healing of others? When I ask these
questions of my spirit teachers, they continue to refer to this Universal Energy as
constituting many vibrations or frequencies. My spirit teachers define or describe
vibrations as waves of energy that oscillate at different frequencies or rhythms.

Dr. Eric Pearl in his book The Reconnection, Heal Others, Heal Yourself, defines
vibration as, “…simply a repetitive movement. A guitar string vibrates when plucked;
the number of times the string goes back and forth per second is the ‘frequency’ of the vi-
bration. To us this registers as a specific sound. Change the frequency and you change the
sound.”36 He goes on to write, “What are colors? Different frequencies of visible light as
interpreted by our brains. What are heat and cold? Different frequencies of molecular
movement, again interpreted by our brains.”37

My spirit teachers have shared with me many times that dimensions are simply
an attitude or shift in vibration away from our current experience. They affirm
that the ability to shift one’s molecules and change form has been ours from the
very beginning of our human journey. To shift consciousness as in a shamanic
journey, meditation, chanting, movement, involves the ability to shift our
vibration within our body and it is a beginning to altering matter. Vibrational
changes create a molecular, structural shift. Raising the vibrational level of the
body and so restructuring the physical body, is critical to total and complete
wellbeing. It also provides a safe way to upgrade our immune system!

These same spirit teachers have also stated clearly that the fundamental principle
of interdimensional shifting is to understand how to shift the vibrations within
our own body. Every state of being has its corresponding vibration. We can
intentionally shift these vibrations within the dimension of our own body at any
given moment of time to align our mind, body, emotions, etheric body and spirit.
This shifts the nature of our reality.

One night a client called us with obvious fear in his voice. “I think I am going
crazy. I just came back from a walk on a street I have walked many times before in my
neighborhood. All of a sudden I became aware that the streetlights were gaslights and a
horse drawn buggy was coming my way on a dirt road rather than the hot top that I
always walk on! For half an hour I observed life as I continued to walk. It was consistent
with that time period. Then all of a sudden again, I was back to my familiar present time.
What is happening to me?”

One of our apprentices tells us of a similar experience but with a different

interpretation based on her developing trust in her helping spirits. She was up
on the side of a mountain at her power spot that included a large rock she calls
her sacred rock. This place had always felt “tingly” to her. She started to head
back down through a hardwood forest that she had been visiting for two years.
She was comfortable with the area and knew her way back down. This time as
she entered the forest, she looked up and had absolutely no idea where she was.
This didn’t make any sense to her because she could still feel the mountain
behind her and could hear the traffic on the road. She knew she was traveling in
the right direction as the sun did not leave her right shoulder. She also knew she
was lost and had never been in this place before.

She kept walking forward, knowing that eventually she would reach the road,
but the more she walked the more she felt lost. She began to panic, so she turned
around thinking that if she walked back up the mountain she could get her
bearings. Then she realized that she could no longer see the mountain. It was like
it had vanished. It was then that her panic increased. It was confusing because
she could still hear the traffic on the road. Yet, the more she walked into the
forest, the more foreign it felt to her. Everything looked strange and even more
confusing was that a part of her understood it and a part of her did not
understand what was going on. She noticed that her dog seemed happy, but she
couldn’t shake the feeling of being lost. At that point she stopped, closed her eyes
and told her primary spirit teacher that she was scared and asked if her teacher
could help her. She opened her eyes to find her sacred rock less than fifty feet in
front of her. She thanked the helping spirits for their guidance and headed back
to the road.

Since that time whenever she travels past the sacred rock she asks for guidance
to her power spot and back home. She admitted that for quite some time she
wondered if that whole experience was just a little brush with early onset
dementia (she is a young mother) and because of this fear did not initially share
this event even though she knew she could journey for specific information. As
her apprentice program continued, she was assigned to do a journey to a place
that connects her to her ancestral land in other space/time. In this journey she was
finally able to believe that she had actually had first hand experience of a portal
to ancestral land. She also had confirmation that her spirit helpers would keep
her safe even if the understanding of the event came much later. This deepening
of the trust in her spirit helpers has supported her to make life changing choices
with growing confidence.

In our practice, many people share stories with us that they have not felt safe to
share with anyone else for fear that they would be considered crazy. Whether the
stories are reoccurring episode from early childhood or more recent and
sudden experiences, they seek reassurance and support to understand. They
need confirmation that they are not crazy but, rather, that reality can shift and
change to include “outside the box” experiences. Their fears may include feeling
that they might lose a loved one, become isolated, lose their job or jeopardize
their present lifestyle. When they are able to tell their stories they receive the
reassurance that they are not losing their mind, but, rather, that they are being
invited by their own soul to move forward. They begin to accept their expanded
reality as authentic, viable and pragmatic. They understand that these
experiences can be invitations to keep the soul agreement(s) they made before
moving into the form they currently inhabit. They begin to relax and seriously
consider opening the door to a new life.

I feel that it is time to offer increased support to those who are choosing to listen
to the call of their own soul. Many years ago my partner’s primary Sprit Teacher,
Grandma, solemnly told us to be very clear with all of our clients that it was
necessary to resolve anything that caused them to have ambivalent feelings about
being here and fully present in their bodies She reminded us that our physical
container requires the presence of our spirit to enliven and nurture it. If indeed
the physicists are right by stating that our consciousness/spirit actually creates
and recreates our reality, her words are even more crucial to take seriously.

In the integrated medical center in Southern Maine where my partner and I have
our shamanic healing practice, we observe that physical diseases often have their
roots in misperceptions about the self or about the nature of reality. Those that
have ambivalence about being in form can develop issues that defy conventional
medical interventions. When the underlying shifts in perception are addressed a
more complete healing can occur and other diseases can be prevented.

Being fully embodied can also include being able to shift into another dimension
and return. When people realize that they can tap into the wisdom, healing and
renewal that is available there and bring it back to the physical world, they feel
more at home here. Additional, by making such shifts they can restore
themselves, others and the planet. This is what practitioners of vibrational
medicine, energy medicine, shamanism, meditation, clergy, and other spiritual
practices may offer. When practitioners are guided by their respective spirit
teachers, they can bring new methods that augment their present skills. These
resources can be used to resolve the perceptual limitations most human have
accepted as the norm. This then allows our collective human species to move ever
closer to expressing our multidimensional selves.

The more I enter into relationships with my multidimensional neighbors and the
“places” in which they reside, the more I realize how beneficial and practical
these connections can be.

Early one morning, during my weekly shamanic journey, I set my intention to

meet with a now familiar multidimensional Teacher, Ontolonto. My intention was
to ask her what she would like to teach me about vibrational healing. From my
own healing room, I experienced myself going through a convoluted tunnel. Up
and up and up, I traveled to meet Ontolonto. I moved effortlessly through a shiny
sparkly blue energy disc and stood on it. Immediately I was with the Council of
Light Beings whom I had met on previous journeys. Ontolonto presented herself in
her usual golden glowing form. My primary teacher, the Christ Being was there,
too as was Grandma, my partner’s primary teacher. Having all of them appear
told me that this was to be a significant journey.

As Ontolonto stepped forward, I asked her, “What would you like to teach me about
vibrational healing? I wish to keep my agreement about coming to meet with you and oth-
ers willing to guide me each week.”

I begin to experience the Council of Light Beings seemingly moving closer. They
created a circle around me. From their places in the circle, each being moved for-
ward and into me. One seems to be the color of a beautiful green, feminine en-
ergy. She asks me to lie down and she lies on top of me. She immediately melds
into me. I can feel a very distinctive vibration in my physical body as our bodies
become one. Then a red colored being came over and did the same. Next a cobalt
blue came over. I can feel the different vibrations of each of them even though
they present themselves each as color in a human body form. A purple being
steps forward and asks me to stand up, which I do. I feel myself walking into
purple. Each of these merging experiences produces a really strong charge of en-
ergy. Then a white being presents itself to merge with me. I can barely feel the
energy of the white being. It’s a transparent quality of feeling. Then comes the
gold being. I am standing and walking into it. My whole body jerked with that
one. Then comes a silver being. The feeling is very smooth like mercury. It is clear
to me that each being represents a different vibration. When I merge with each
one of them, I am experiencing their specific vibration.

Merging with the silver being made me want to ask her a question. In a previous
experience I had been given the spirit name, Silver Light. I had not fully under-
stood its significance nor embraced it as my name. I asked the silver being why I
had been given it as a spirit name. In answer to that, the silver being moved out
of me for a moment. She positioned herself so that she appeared to be silhouet-
ted. All of those beings who had merged into me came out and moved through
the silhouette of the silver one. They created a shimmering blend of beautiful col-
ors like pearlescent paint, but in motion like the Northern Lights.

Ontolonto says, “As you know, dear one, your gift is to be an agent of merging, to be an
agent of blending, to be an agent of being able to perceive energy systems within humans
and also whenever you take the time, within other things as well. And so this silver is a
good color to be a conduit of an infinite variety of colors. You could have been called any
of these colors, but silver is an agent of shifting and changing.” With that, Ontolonto
who had been flying above me to supervise how all this energy was integrating
into my physical body, merged into me through my crown chakra.

The Christ Being’s presence at this unexpected ceremony validated for me that
this merging of energy was timely and appropriate for my evolving process. I
asked Him, “What is the purpose of this merging?” He replied, “They will perma-
nently be with you from this point. Your body will hold these energies within you from
this time forward. You may still see them when you call upon the Council of Light Beings
but they are permanently merged with your system now. This is important for you to
know. Write this down even if you do not have the time to write down the entire journey
so that you have this date and this knowing in place.”

My teacher anticipates my many questions. “This means that when you walk among
people, your vibrations will reach out in a discriminating manner. In other words, if there
are those who need it, it will seek out those like heat shields. If there is someone who is not
yet “awake” and does not choose to be awake, it is simply not compatible and the
vibrations will move around that person as if there is a force field around that person that
will not invite them in. Those who can invite it will do so. And whatever that energy
needs to do it will do. This will accelerate the healing of many people that you will never
see, and will give you the feeling that you are doing something when you have those times
that you feel you are not offering enough to your planet, which you certainly are! There
are many for whom this acceleration will be most beneficial. Now take a moment to allow
these energies to integrate into your physical body. They are going into your cells.”

Before elaborating any further on any benefits of this journey for others and for
myself it feels important to explore the concept of “merging” with other energies.
Many years ago, I was sitting in a dasharn meditation session in California with
Leslie Temple Thurston. Earlier in her presentation, she shared with us some of
her life journey of being called and trained to be an enlightened being. At this
point, she was now clearly merged with an energy augmenting her own. After
minutes of meditation, she began moving her hands around the room to those of
us attending the Dasharn. Sitting in front of us on a raised platform, her hands
would rest before some, move by others as we continued our meditation. I was
stunned as her hands moved over the meditators, to find them resting on myself.
Immediately before me appeared the clear image of Quan Yin, Mother of Com-
passion, One who hears the cries of the world. She spoke to me very clearly. “You
have agreed to be my disciple in this lifetime.” I found myself weeping among
strangers, knowing she was right and I had simply not understood. Years before,
I had accepted her initiation that was facilitated by a friend, and had somehow
placed it carefully out of my consciousness. Now it was time to explore what
being a disciple really entailed.

Today, I understand that when merging with any other essence, I maintain my
own individuality, my own essence and my own energy system. It is always done
with permission. In merging with another energy system, I expand my essence to
include the vibration of those invited to merge with me. In this way I have
immediate access to their gifts, talents, perceptions and characteristics to enhance
and augment my own. We become partners. The access to guidance is immediate
and received without ever having to forfeit my own free will. I am free to flow
with this guidance in a fluid manner while being aware that the “enhancement”
can shift my present perceptions to be more beneficial. I experience myself
effortlessly moving, speaking and toning in ways that feel congruent and
appropriate for the time and situation. I also experience that the essence(s) I
merge with provide protection from a client’s wounds or toxic energy. This
allows me to support them without taking on anything that is unbeneficial. In
my experience, these multidimensional “partners” are experts at transmuting
toxins and offering the most beneficial healing or information for the occasion!
What a gift!

Back in my own journey, the silvery being introduced me to another form of

merging as she sought to guide me to a further understanding of the meaning of
my spirit name, Silver Light. At this point in the journey, we are floating along.
The other light beings flow behind as we come to an overlook. I can’t quite see
what is below at first. I am told, below us are new souls, and this is the birthing
place of souls. In the back of my mind I was thinking that all souls were born at
the same time like a spiritual Big Bang. This silver being shook her head and said,
“No, this is not so. Birthing is a continuous process, and that new souls are being born
and need to be guided.” I realize that this being works with the new souls. I per-
ceived small spheres of light floating all over the place! They don’t seem to be
bumping into each other, more like fireflies at night in the summer. As they float,
they experience themselves for the first time.

One of them comes up to us. The energy of this new soul feels inquisitive. The sil-
ver light being asked me to hold my hands out and I did. I felt this very gently
energy. It was very tender like the energy of a newborn baby. My teacher asked
me, “What would you do with this new soul?” I replied, “I would ask this soul who it
would like to be and where it would like to go.”

The Silver being indicated for me to ask that question of the new soul. I asked,
“What would you like to be?” The minute I asked this question, the soul became a
small child-- a five-year-old boy. “This is who I would like to be, a five-year-old boy.”
I am being shown that in a hospital there is a five-year-old boy who is dying and
it is not yet his time to die. The new soul tells me “I would like to be taken to that
hospital, to that little boy and I will exchange the energy that I have with the energy that
seems to be leaking from his body.”
I looked to the teacher for direction. She said, “We would not have brought you here
if this were not appropriate for you to do.” I held my hands out and this soul became
Light again. I asked him to be guided to the hospital where the five-year-old boy
is ill. I’m taken directly to the room with the little boy who is hooked up to all
kinds of monitors. It was night but he was awake. Lying in the bed, he looked
very thin and it appeared that he had been sick for quite a while with something
like leukemia.

He looked at us as we came into the room and he smiled, and asked, “Are you here
to keep me company?” We responded in the affirmative. “We are here to visit and
talk with you for a while. How are you feeling?”

“I’m very tired but I can’t sleep. I don’t want to sleep because I’m not sure if this time
when I go to sleep will be the time I won’t wake up again. So I’m just lying here in the
dark, thinking about things.”

“Thinking about what?” I asked.

“What it will be like when I don’t wake up.” he replied.

“What do you think it will be like?” I asked.

“I’m not scared about that. I think I will wake up in a very beautiful place. I’m feeling
that here,” and he pointed to his heart. “But I know there are some things I’m sup-
posed to do here and it makes me sad to know I can’t do them. I have a mother who needs
to have some light in her life and if I take this light away that is in me, I don’t think she is
going to live very long, for she would be so sad. I am the one good thing in her life among
many things that are not good, and she thinks she is to blame for my illness because she
couldn’t feed me very well when I was little. She had to work and leave me alone a lot,
even when I wasn’t feeling very good. So she feels very sad and to blame. I know this sick-
ness I have has nothing to do with her. My body is not strong enough to live with all the
toxins and things around on this planet, but I do want to be here. I want to help her!”

I asked this little brave boy, “If you got a new strong body today, would you want to
stay and help her?”

He pulled himself up in bed because he had been lying flat. He looked at me

straight in the eyes and said, “Oh, I want to stay! I really want to stay here!”

I felt weepy in hearing him say that because I could really feel the passion
emanating from him. So I said, “I have a present for you, but I can only give it to you
if I tell you what it is and you think about it for awhile before you say you want it or don’t
want it.”
“OK,” he said.

I continue, “I’ve been to a place a long way from here where the stars are and beyond. I
have found there a soul, a light filled with strength that is vibrant and alive who would
like to come down and give you that strength. But if that life comes to live in your body
and give you strength, it would be like having a twin inside you, because your soul would
be there as it is now, and so also would this other soul be there. He is making this choice
to want to come to give you strength and being in a physical body, your physical body
with you. You would have to think about this for a while to be sure if this would work for
you or not.”

He said, “I don’t have to think about it. I already know my answer. I’ve always known
there was another to be with me, but I always thought I would have to go to be where the
other was. Now you are telling me that the other can come to me and be in my body and
make my body strong. Is that what you are saying? And this sickness would go away and
I could help my mother and others too?”

“Yes, that is what I am saying. You would have to be willing to take care of that other soul
and have that other soul take care of you. Do you understand?”

“Yes, I do. When can we do this?”

“Well, it would be good for you to sleep on this one more night.”

He said, “I don’t have to. I already know what I want and I am ready.” He lay back
down on the bed and closed his eyes and said, “I am ready right now!”

So I gathered the light of the other soul in my cupped hands, lay it on top of his
heart chakra and it melted into him just like the way the light beings laid on top
of me and melded into me. The little boy opened his eyes and said, “It tickles me
inside!” He breathed in a really deep breath and says, “I’m already starting to feel
better!”

I asked Silver Light if this transformation could happen so quickly or did it need
to happen more slowly for his body to adjust to it. She responded, “His body is
young enough to adjust quickly, but it is important to have a few days of adjusting so he
won’t scare people who have been thinking he won’t live very much longer. They won’t be
able to understand.”

“I know,” said the little boy. “This is my secret. All I can say is that I wanted to live so
badly that my body decided to let me live!”

“That’s perfect. Exactly what to say! Some day when you grow up you will probably find
others you can tell your story to and will probably find a way to help this or something
better for other little children. Do you understand?”

“Yes,” and with this he begins to get very sleepy. I do a namaste bow and we slip
out of the hospital and back to place of new souls.

I ask the silver light being, “This is so exciting! How can I use this in my life?” She re-
sponded, “This is one way disease can be healed. You are thinking that you must remove
the disease that is in a person, but this is not the only way to cure disease. It is possible if
you are guided, to come to this place, that you could bring back a new soul to cohabitate
with the soul of an existing body. This new soul would reinforce their energy system and
the vibration of this new soul would make it impossible for the disease to continue in that
person’s body. Do you understand?”

“Yes, I do.”

“In your journeys you will be guided whether someone's illness is a process of awakening
or something that must be healed so that they can remain and offer their gifts to your
world. You will not have confusion. We will guide you expertly. It is time for you to leave
this place now.”

We returned to the place where all the light beings were gathered. They were all
excited that I was taught this way of healing to add to the other ways I already
knew. They said this was in essence what I did for the six years old girl in a
healing session that same day, although it was presented to me in a different way.
This young sensitive girl had been abused and the sorrow of this betrayal had
begun manifesting as an illness that would have ended her life had it continued
to progress without intervention. My Teacher confirmed “the Light you brought
to her today was actually a new soul that will help her heal in a way nothing else
could do. It was not necessary to explain this process. There was a relative in the
room that it would have been too much of a stretch for her. She will, however,
rejoice that her granddaughter will get better and much guilt for not having
protected her will be released. Some day, in some way, the little girl will be told
of this event. We have the privilege of working outside of time!
 7. Meeting My Twin Soul

Once my Spirit teachers introduce a theme to me, they use every opportunity that
comes along in my personal life experience to elaborate upon it. At this point in
my process, I was being presented with both merging and twin souls so these
themes even came up in a doctor’s appointment!

My osteopathic physicians, a husband and wife team, completed our Spirit

Passages Two-Year Apprentice Training Program in Advanced Shamanism and
Shamanic Healing. Each of them incorporated what was appropriate from that
training in their individual medical practices. When my partner and I would
meet with them, they would treat us and we would give them treatments by
using our shamanic skills. This unique four-way healing provided profound
benefits for all of us! In one of these treatment sessions, our woman physician
friend brought back a soul essence for me who she said was called Mia.

The following journey was my first meeting with Mia. I wanted to intentionally
integrate her into my energy system and ask for clarification about our relation-
ship.

I went down into the Lower World where my power animal, She Ma, and healing
teacher, A Ya Ho Ah met to walk with me. We moved into the pyramid where I
met my new spirit teacher. We came to the fountain that provides a platform. It
moved us lower down to our final destination. The teacher came forward and I
asked her if she was the one to teach me in this journey. She replied, "Yes, indeed."
I asked to meet with Mia who was brought to me in a soul retrieval healing
process. I shared that I wanted to ask about our relationship and any other infor-
mation that was important for me.

As we spoke, I seemed to be holding Mia as a baby. When my doctor friend

originally returned this soul essence, she told me that Mia would bring me a new
perspective. As I look down at the baby, I feel very emotional. As I asked, "What
is the purpose of Mia being brought to me at this time?" I rocked her in my arms. The
teacher kneeled in front of me and looked into my eyes. I felt very strange
vibrations moving through my body as she continued gazing into my eyes.

I didn’t feel that the teacher was answering me so I asked again, “I need to under-
stand about the meaning of this soul retrieval I recently experienced.”

The teacher said, "There are two reasons she has been returned to you at this time. The
first is that your personality self in this lifetime has experienced a good deal of trauma.
Having reinforcement of your twin soul is reinforcement to your spirit. The second one is
that she doesn't hold any of the trauma of this lifetime, much like the higher soul self, but
holding the original essence you have in this lifetime. She will reinforce those aspects of
you. She will reinforce your ability to deal with any traumas of this lifetime. There is a
kind of purity of purpose that she can reinforce."

I asked the teacher, "Will I need to take care of her like a baby or will she grow up
quickly?"

As I said that I immediately received two mental images. One of the images was
of me holding her as a baby and the other was of her standing beside the teacher
looking at me. I felt very confused.

She touched the baby and said to me, "You don't have to be confused. Even as you
know that people can shape shift, even so can a body shift from child to adult. It is all en-
ergy. Spirit is energy. It simply communicates to you. There is an innocence about her
that is important for you to understand."

I ask her what that innocence might be. Her response is "It is from the very Source
of All That Is. It will be beneficial for you for her to grow up to be your age and your size
so you can connect more completely.”

With that, the infant disappeared again. The teacher asked me to come with her.
As I walk with her, I have the same feeling I had upon meeting my primary
power animal, She Ma, for the first time. I felt overwhelmed with profound emo-
tions. The teacher took my hand and we started walking. She Ma and A Ya Ho Ah
also came with us. We went to the place that takes me into other dimensions. It
appears as a large mirror that looks something like the Stargate from the movie
and television program. The teacher took my hand and pulled me through the
portal. I seemed to be in a dark space. The next thing I was aware of was that we
were in a huge bubble filled with light. My twin soul, Mia was with me. Her
energy was one of spontaneous joy.

"I will assist you in understanding the multidimensional self. I am one aspect of your
multidimensional self. Multidimensionality has not been extensively explored by physical
beings. I will help you understand." There was a light quality about her like white light.
"I will help you with many things: to remember things you have forgotten, to awaken
knowledge that was replaced by perceptions that are not beneficial." She laughed at that!

I asked her,"Where have you been?"

"I have been a guide to you but it was not time for me to come to be within you until now.
I have guided you in situations where you were desperate, lonely, and experiencing great
limitations. I reminded you that you do not have to accept limits. You can always find a
way through it. It was not time for me to be within you until now."

I asked, "At what time was the beginning of us as a twin soul?" We quickly shot
backwards through a tunnel. It was as if we were going back in time to the very
Source of All That Is. There, I saw two membranes much like you would see two
embryos in the womb. We held hands with each other. As we move ahead to take
form she stays in the world of spirit while my spirit takes form in a body.

"Why didn't you come into form with me?" I asked her. She replied, "One of us had to
stay to maintain our connection to the Source of All That Is. There was great danger of
forgetting our original connection to the Source when we entered the density of the earth
plane."

I asked, "Why did I choose to do that and not you?" She answered, "You simply
chose." More questions spill from me. "Have we been connected in other life times?" She
replied, "Always in some way although I have never incarnated on earth. I have always
been the one to maintain our connection to the Source of All That Is and that is why your
connection has been so absolute in all your life times. There has never been one when you
have felt separate in the way that many do."

More questions arose in my mind almost before she had the opportunity to
answer them. "How are we to be in this lifetime now that we are together? How do we
support one another? It is as important for me to give support to you as you do for me."

Mia replied, "I have no knowledge of what it is to be in a human body so I must learn all
these things from you. I will teach you to be far more comfortable with your multidimen-
sional self so that you can look forward to the gifts you have brought to this planet. You
must write a book about exploring how to live as multidimensional beings. You will have
time to do this. You will have unexpected time and you must make it a priority. I will as-
sist you with this, for I am far more adept with this information than you are. I will help
you so that it will be effortless. Do you understand?"

"Yes. Do you pronounce your name Mea or Mia?"

"Mia. My predominant reason for being with you at this time is to open up your multidi-
mensional capacity. I will heal you, guide you to be able to take any form."

“I am wondering if all that is involved is a perceptional shift?” I continued, "I am able

to understand intellectually, but am struggling to make it all feel real. The whole concept
of a twin soul is just something I have not thought about in relation to my own life. In a
way it helps me to understand the perception of not being complete, and aware that I am
different. I have felt strong and self-contained at many unexpected times. I must have
been experiencing your presence in different ways and not recognizing the reason because
I did not consciously know of you."

"Correct."
"How can I assist you to integrate into my earth plane life? I asked.

"I will simply observe a lot and if I have questions I will ask you to meet with me to
answer them. When you are working and ask for teachers to advise you, I will be one of
the voices offering you suggestions."

Then, I experienced a sense of expansion within and Mia moved within me. I felt
as if I had doubled in size. I turn around, feeling the teacher’s presence and she
said to me, "It is important for you to develop the multidimensional aspects of your own
awareness, and to write about it. There will be many more who need to understand their
experiences of their multidimensional selves and need guidelines. The reality of twin souls
will also become more common. Mia will help you with this. You will include this infor-
mation in your book. It will also be helpful to be more familiar with this so that you can
bring back a twin soul for someone else when it is necessary."

The teacher’s words reminded me of something I had already experienced! I had

already facilitated this kind of healing when I had witnessed a twin soul of a
client leaving in utero. The embryo that remained and grew into a woman had
felt an unexplained loss her entire life. It wasn’t until my teachers offered her a
clear explanation and returned her twin soul to her that she had felt a welcome
relief from that pain.

As I was remembering this, the teacher in my journey perceived my thoughts and

responded. "This is different, dear one. For that soul left in her present mother’s womb
while Mia never incarnated. This is not the same as your Higher Soul Self, which is your
own soul. As you saw, Mia remained to maintain your connection with the Spirit of
All That Is. This connection was sustained over eons of time and through all of your
incarnations. She did this so that you would not forget your connection. Since many
humans forget their connections, Mia’s has supported you to provide valuable
contributions to your earth plane and the other dimensions you have visited. You have
spent many lifetimes on earth facilitating the cycles of human development. That was
your choice from the beginning. Your twin soul spent time in other dimensions and that
is why you have such a keen interest. Now you can see how your connection with Mia
contributes to your understanding of other dimensions even though you have not been
there. When she takes you there you will you will feel as if you have been in these places
and you will be able easily to bring these gifts to your earth plane. Do you understand?"

"Yes. I am to write a book for practical purposes. It is to help people understand what is
happening in other dimensions. It does not have to be so mysterious. It is actually very
practical."

The dialogue continues as my Teacher takes the opportunity to reinforce my

writing a book. "It is this practical aspect that is the most important to introduce in
your book. Do you understand? This exploration of multidimensional living must be
written and it must begin now so that it will be published for people who need it. There
are many who are here in their multidimensional capacities and this must expand and
accelerate at a very rapid rate to be beneficial for this time. Do you understand?"

"Yes."

"Having Mia reside within you will help you write more easily and fluidly and with a
sense of lightness. She will influence you much like when you do a journey as you sit
down to write but you will not have to do a journey and then transcribe it that takes so
much time. You will simply ask her to introduce you to places where she has lived while
you were living here. You will access dimensions other than the earth plane. This is an
important completion to be made in this period of time. We will all assist you, all of us in
other dimensions who have been part of your life. Mia will assist you in a very different
way in that she will simply share with you where she has been and what she has been
doing. You will ask her questions and she will answer you as well as ask questions of you.
In this dialogue you will incorporate what is important to know from her experience to
this earth plane. It will be a dialogue. Perhaps you will even write it from the point of
view of your twin spirit introducing her to you to assist you in writing this book. This
does not make it a channeled book-- that would not be as useful, but simply be an
interesting way to write the book. You might even start with a description of the way you
met your twin soul in the treatment with your doctor and your subsequent journey to
met Mia. Then you will see that it will flow in a very interesting way that will hook the
imagination yet will have a realness about it, for the relationship of you two will develop
as you write the book. Do you understand?"

"Yes. It is finally feeling real to me."

"We thought it would. We knew that it would be the appropriate time to introduce Mia to
you. She came in the form of an infant much like you to let you know she has a purity and
has not shared complicated life experiences yet she will offer great wisdom to you. You are
equal, for you know a great deal about this earth plane dimension and she will offer her
experiences to you. You might even be asked to go into concurrent lives to share some
aspects with her. This will be quite intriguing. The intrigue is what will capture a
publisher. Do you understand?"

"I admit that I have a lot of reservations about writing a book because I wrote one before.
I don't mind the work part, but getting a book published is a complicated task. I think for
the first time I can see why it might be intriguing to people. It is very different from what
my partner has written." I continued, "I have another question to ask. Some time ago I
was given a journey about bringing back a new soul to reinforce a sick child. That soul,
too, who was described as a twin soul - an innocent soul that had never incarnated. I
received a clear agreement with the ill boy’s spirit to do this. I haven't been asked to do
that again since that journey. Is this because I needed to have this experience of my own
twin soul first to fully understand the significance?"

"Of course, dear one. It was given to you at a time when you were asking for new ways of
healing others and it was appropriate for that person. Now it is appropriate for you to
experience this for yourself. Simply ask Mia every day to offer any information she finds
beneficial for your clients and for yourself. It will come as it always does as an awareness
that you'll simply know. You will have an interesting adventure!" The instructions
continued. " Anything you think is significant you should jot down in a notebook so it
can be incorporated into your book."

I continued to speak with the teacher, "The first thing I want to note is that I feel this
energy within me. I couldn't sleep tonight. That was the first clue. I knew I needed to con-
nect with Mia to find out what this gift is all about. The energy I feel is younger than my
fifty-nine years, almost like a young woman in her twenties. I am aware that in other di-
mensions they don't have the ages as we do here, but I want to note that the energy feels
young, very enjoyable and hopeful, and inquisitive. These are the first things I want to
note. I certainly want to record this journey. Mia and I have already started our multidi-
mensional living relationship."

We are still inside this big bubble of light. We are moving out of it now back into
the main room. I'm asking if there is anything else that is important for me to un-
derstand about my relationship with Mia?

"This is quite enough for now!"

I thank the Teacher. We bow to one another. "Come back soon."

"I will."

We are all moving back up to the main room. The robed figures are all there.
They are all in white instead of black as always before. I nod to them and are
moving back out into the meadow. She Ma and Ah Ya Ho Ah are pleased with me.
Ah Ya Ho Ah says to me "We are greatly pleased with this new beginning in your life.
Mark this as a day to remember.” She Ma looks at me and says, "And now I have more
to protect!"
 8. Excursions With My Twin Soul

I journeyed again to meet with Mia. "Where would you like to 'travel' with me
today?" my twin soul inquired as I opened the space in my life to continue
deepening my relationship her.

"Please guide me to a place which will support me to understand the shift that is
happening on our planet," came the immediate response from deep within me.

I felt the now familiar vibration as my body began to shift to facilitate my

traveling to wherever she would choose to take me. I found myself wondering if
this is what it would feel like to be in the transporter on Star Trek! What I began
experiencing was a sensation of expanding in the area of my heart. An image
came to me of my own physical heart becoming like a huge bubble. I could
initially see this image and then was drawn to move inside it. There appeared to
be many compartments in this bubble of my heart. I wondered why I had not
been aware of these compartments before. As soon as the thought was expressed
in my mind, an answer was immediately provided.

“You have the perception that your heart is only a physical organ in your body with
specific tasks to accomplish like a machine. It is also a portal into dimensions without
number."

My teachers in the spirit worlds and human colleagues had both been sharing
information about portals or entrances into other dimensions. I had come to
understand that a portal is created by vibration, by energy waves at various
frequencies. I understood that portals are everywhere around us and that our
own thoughts open them up by creating shifts in our vibration. I understood that
when a portal was opened intentionally for any specific purpose, it was crucial to
intentionally close that portal so that beings in other dimensions would not move
through without formal invitation. I also understood that there is nothing
mysterious about shifting our vibrations. We shift them all the time. When we
sleep we are experiencing one vibration or vibrations. When we wake and move
into our everyday world we continually shift our vibrations by our thoughts and
movements. My spirit teachers gave me images and processes as portals to guide
people in our workshops and healing practice safely. (I share more about this in
following chapters.) But it had never occurred to me that my own heart was a
portal!

My twin soul, Mia, was most amused by my surprise. "Little one, little one. There is
so much to remember that you already know!"

"I'm not sure how I like being called a little one.” I bristled at this new energy in my
life! I sensed the unspoken response was, "Get used to it!" but a delightful warm
feeling like humor reassured me to move on.
I felt myself being drawn to a chamber or space in the direction of two o’clock.
This space expanded as I moved into its center. I had a little apprehension about
what I would discover there. I had experienced many wounding of my heart
created by others and was not anxious to visit those again. I was also confused
since when first meeting Mia she said that she would guide me to explore
the dimensions she had inhabited while I was living out my sojourn here on
the earth.

"There is no difference, little one," came the response to my thoughts. "You are a
dimension and within you are more dimensions than your third dimensional mind can
count. It is time for you to remember this. Think of your very own soul as a mansion
with many rooms, too many to count. As it has been recorded in your scriptures by the
historical person of Jesus, In my Father's house are many mansions. I go to prepare a
place for you that where I am be there you shall be also. Your Native American peoples
have spoken the truth when they express the statement, as above, so below. The mansions
are within you not in some far off place. By the simple shifting of your vibration or energy
frequency you can be in any chosen 'mansion' or place, for you are never separated from
the Source of All That Is. The notion of the 'mansions' being a far off place implies
separation which creates a longing for reunion.”

Mia continues, “The separation humans feel is only a perception. You cannot actually
be separate from Holy One or All That Is. As your perceptions shift, the frequency of your
being aligns again with the Source vibration. Your free will is to explore the infinite
varieties and combinations of frequencies in order to explore your own soul potential.
This is the same as exploring the potential of All That Is. Obviously, this exploration will
take more than one lifetime and is far more than what can be experienced on your beloved
earth! On earth, however, it is your heart energy center that provides the portal or
entrance into exploring the limitlessness of the Divine, or All That Is. The One you call
God loves to be explored!"

I found myself inwardly saying, 'Whoa! Let me catch up with you. What you share
feels right to my knowing self, but my mind is straining to comprehend."

"Let your brain rest for a while and simply allow your knowing self to engage in this
adventure. We will attend to the mind later!" was Mia's response.

As this dialogue continued, we moved further into the chamber within my heart.
Now there appeared a light just ahead and we moved toward it. It was very
bright and I shielded my eyes for a moment.

"Simply ask for your vibration to shift to be in harmony or frequency with the light and
you will find this more comfortable," Mia assured me. Forgetting all I already knew
about shifting vibrations, I whined, "How?"
"By simply speaking your request to you body. Have you forgotten that your body has its
own wisdom and simply waits for you to recognize this fact?" Mia was laughing at me
now. I remembered the many times when spirit had come through with new ex-
periences or to assist in healing work with others. Sometimes the energy was
more than my body was comfortable with at the time. I had learned that all I
needed to do was to ask for a reduction of the energy or vibration to be
comfortable for my body and the request was immediately granted. As in any
relationship, my teachers couldn’t fully understand my physical needs unless I
reported them! I also knew that my spirit teachers monitor my energy system
when they give me boosts to my current energetic system but it is my personal
responsibility to ask for assistance anytime I'm not comfortable with the changes.
Most of the time we negotiate so I can continue expanding my awareness of how
unlimited I can be. It is always my choice.

So, I made another choice to ask my body if it would be willing to accept the
vibration of this Light I was experiencing. Immediately I felt a peacefulness
within me. Over my life, it is this feeling of deep inner peace that has always
signaled to me that “all is well.” When I had that feeling in this journey into my
heart, I know that I had made a good decision.

A luminous form evolved from the light. It appeared to be like that of a human,
yet with no features. It was filled with exactly the same Light as was all around
us. It felt female to me. She bowed to us. I experienced her energy as serene. She
reached forth her right hand and invited me to merge with her. I immediately
felt myself expanding in all directions with no container to hold me in. I had
experienced this feeling of “expandedness” before in journeys or after long
hours in Buddhist meditation while on retreat.

"You can feel like this all the time, you know,“ this being said to me.

"How?" I ask

"By asking for the vibration within your body to resonate with this frequency as you are
now," came the telepathic response.

"But how do I identify which frequency to request my body to attune to?" I ask.

"Your body always remembers the frequencies that support your well-being, your
wholeness. Simply ask your body to resonate at the frequency that best supports your
wholeness, and it will be done. But first you must have some experience like this to
recognize what wholeness is. Your body knows, but the layers of enculturation you
experience that develop your personality and the protections you choose cover over this
knowing. It must be re-experienced to remember to ask for what is already yours.
Otherwise you will not believe what you experience and will discount it as unreal. It
happens all the time in the third dimensional reality that many choose to accept as the
only reality."

The being continued. "Mia has guided you here in the chamber of your own heart in
hopes that you will finally understand that you can choose to remove the limits you have
placed on yourself while in your own body. You can give permission to your body to
access all necessary and useful dimensions while simultaneously living your daily life to
the fullest. Do you understand?"

"My knowing self does understand. My mind cannot yet accept that a simple request of
the body to shift its vibration to a frequency to support my wholeness… " The being
interrupts, "Your complete and total wholeness,” she corrected me. She continued,
"It is possible to experience complete and total wholeness while being in the container
called a human body. While this has not been possible before it is now. Your human race
has evolved to the point where this is possible."

I find my mind flashing on the conflicts of the world, the violence and chaos we
see on the daily news and I find myself questioning the reality of this possibility.

This being seems to anticipate my questions before I ask them. “We are speaking
not of every individual yet at this time. We are speaking of the many who are ready,
preparing for every individual who has not yet chosen to be ready. All will chose at some
point in time, perhaps not your earth plane time, to desire to experience and express their
wholeness. This is not a concept of the chosen but a concept of the choosing. In each and
every dimension choosing is the common reality. What is meant to be chosen is quite
different in each dimension.”

I felt overloaded with information again yet, my knowing self 'got it' even as my
mind was struggling. It occurred to me to ask my body for a frequency or
vibration that would support my mind to allow what I was hearing. Immediately
I could feel the interfering block removing itself. It was as if a perception of
reality I had grown up with simply dissolved by my request for a vibration or
frequency to assist it to happen! Could it be that simple, I wondered?

"Yes, it could,” Mia responded to my thoughts. “You are in a chamber of your own
heart making a request of your own body to allow itself to share in an experience that
your heart’s wisdom is acknowledging as real. It is that simple. It can be that simple for
anyone who chooses to access their own heart's dimensions!"

Mia continued, "Perceptions are nothing more than vibrations. A change of vibration by
replacing one perception by another changes the vibration within your entire body.
Perhaps this is the modern version of shape shifting. I can see the energy system in your
body shift as you choose to change a perception whether it was from birth in this present
body or in another container in any other dimension. Do you understand?"

"Yes, I do understand. So what you are introducing me to is the reality that I can access
perceptions from any other dimension as well as this third dimension of the earth. I can
ask for a shift of vibration within my own body to support this process. I can request a
vibrational shift in by own body to integrate any part of my body that is confused until
the new perception is clear. All of this can happen within my own mind, body and spirit.
Is this correct?"

"'This is correct, dear one. You are a quick study." she responded. "And I will add that
as you continue to choose this process of shifting perceptions to experience your own
wholeness all the time, you shift the vibration of all on your planet. You are all in the
heart chamber of All That Is."

As I took a break to let this all settle in, I felt a bit strange in my head. I realized
that my brain’s left hemisphere would need some time to catch up with what my
multidimensional self already understood! I knew it was time to close the portal
of my heart until there was time for another adventure with Mia. I unmerged
from the being and thanked her for her support and guidance. Mia and I moved
silently back through the chambers of my heart until I was fully present at my
computer and aware of my stomach growling its longing for Thai food!

“Thank you, Mia, for your surprise adventure. I'll return when time permits."

"You are the one who chooses time,” came her consistent retort! "The choice is always
yours!"
 9. Vibrational Training With The Light Beings

There is often a long space of time before I carve out enough time to do any
follow-up work on my assignments with my spirit teachers. The consequence is
that they gently remind me that the intention I set for a specific journey has
already been answered in previous journeys. I find this both humbling and a
good example of how long it takes sometimes to internalize unfamiliar
information. The teachers’ patience with my process and their “cosmic
perspective” helps me to keep growing and learning. Their wisdom skillfully
challenges me to continue to remain open to new information and supports me
to use what I’ve learned in my shamanic practice and in daily life. The following
journey is an example of these themes.

"My intention is to go to meet with the Light Beings to ask for continued training in
vibrational healing." As I enter my journey I find I am headed down to the
Lower World. My power animal, She Ma and my teacher, A Ya Ho Ah meet me
there. We exchange greetings and then the tunnel that takes me to Ontolonto
materializes. Accompanied by my teacher and power animal, I whoosh up the
tunnel. The effect feels like riding a flume ride in reverse! The “ride” takes me
upwards and through a golden disk. We arrive in the place where Ontolonto
resides and she is there.

Following proper protocol, I ask, "Are you my Teacher for this journey?"

Ontolonto replies, “Yes, dear one. We are glad that you are here."

I share my intention for this journey, ”I’m here to continue learning about vibrational
healing including whatever else you would like to teach me tonight."

As I finish speaking my intention, the Christ Being arrives to take his place next to
Ontolonto . They stand together and appear to be waiting for me to say or do
something. I say, "I would love to learn, whenever it is time, how to participate in the
healing of cancers and other life threatening illnesses. I know illnesses often come as a
wake-up call to people while other times illnesses are caused from being in a toxic
environment or from genetic predispositions.”

The Christ Being responds, "Dear one, you are thinking that healing can happen
suddenly, like something can be removed, and that is certainly possible, but there are
some kinds of healing that require a more subtle kind of attention. This is for the
well-being of the person’s entire body/mind/spirit matrix. Of course, you know you will
be guided."

I respond affirmatively, "Yes, I know this."

"You also know there are many who do not choose to be whole or well, and that is their
path," the Christ Being responds.

"Yes, I do know this as well.” I continue, “I'd like to know how to offer greater support
for healing people who are clearly invested in healing and have developed a cancer or other
life threatening illness. If, in our diagnostic journey, we got the go ahead from you and it
is appropriate for the well-being of that person, how would the healing proceed?"

The Christ Being answers, "When you read your notes, dear one, you will see that you
have already been given several processes to facilitate your request. What concerns you is
that people do not come believing healing is possible, nor are you quite certain that if they
came and sought it that it would be accomplished."

His words get to the true heart of my inquiry. "This is correct.” I said, “Although if
you said it was completed I would believe it."

The Christ Being continues with compassion, "But we will give you another way by
which this can happen. If someone wanted to have complete and total healing, you could
bring that person into a dimension that could support it to happen. You already support
people to access their inner guidance in what you call your Shamanic Inner Body
HealingTM work. Their inner guidance can help them to discern what dimension would be
most beneficial. While in that dimension, they could have complete and total healing. It
could happen in an absolute snap of your fingers, for it is possible to shift the vibrations of
a person to the point that it is impossible for any illness to be present. You know this."

I respond, "Yes, I do know this. I guess I'm wondering why more people do not come to
have a healing at the very origins of their disease or limiting patterns.”

Christ Being continues, "Dear one, often they hesitate because they do not believe that it
is possible. That is very sad. Some other people do not want to work to be healed and that
is sad. Still others simply believe that they do not deserve it and that is also very sad. For
some however, they simply need to be shown and that you can do."

His message continued, “You saw in your work today with your client that you could
be flexible with your use of the Star.” “It was easy for her to feel that she was in another
dimension. The healing that needed to be done was accomplished because she could feel
herself in that dimension. Of course, the process will be different for each person."

My heart acknowledges what He has told me is true. I said, "Is there any way I
should encourage people to come to do the work?"

He quickly replies, “No, dear one. This is not yours to do. It is ours to do. We will send
people as they are ready. Unfortunately, there are many that are not ready. As we have
said before, use this time to expand and internalize the inter-dimensional work so it will
be readily accessible to you.“

At this point in the conversation, I can’t discern if it is the Christ Being or

Ontolonto that is speaking, for it seems to be both of them. It is as if each is saying
the same thing.

Then, the Christ Being speaks: "You are being faithful to all that is required of you. If
more was required of you we would let you know.”
 10. Presenting This Work To My Peers

The first opportunity to share some of my research on multidimensional living

came during a gathering of my shamanic peers. Twenty or so of those of us who
had completed The Foundation for Shamanic Studies Second East Coast Training
continued to meet annually as a working reunion group. We have met for twenty
years at the writing of this book and have created a new community for ourselves
that we named “Ursa.”

Each year we meet, we work together to advance our practices. During the ritual
we participate in to close our time together, our two peer facilitators ask us to do
a journey to our power animal or spirit teacher. In the journey, we are to request
what each one of us is to contribute to the next year’s gathering. In that way, we
are always being offered new and fresh material that continues deepening our
work as shamanic practitioners.

One year, in my closing journey I was asked to present my multidimensional

explorations as my contribution to the next year’s gathering. When the time came
to share what we received, I found myself both surprised and quite reluctant
about sharing. At that point, I did not feel prepared to offer the material I had
been gathering together. I knew that many of my peers were very concrete and
practical. I wondered how this material would be received. I knew the year ahead
would be one of careful preparation and many, many journeys! What follows
here is the content of one of those journeys of clarification and support.

In my journey, I'm moving up to meet with Ontolonto at the golden disc in the
Upper World through the curving tunnel. The Christ Being appears and said, "We
will teach this together. Ontolonto is already present.”

I ask my teachers, “What is most important to present to our Ursa gathering?”

I start walking with my two Teachers. I am in the middle as we walk. Ahead of us

is a blue screen. It feels much like the blue screen used as a backdrop in making
films. Indeed, we sit in a row like we are watching a movie. On the screen, I'm
seeing the Ursa participants in a circle and I'm seeing my copper pyramid 39
there. They are both saying that the experience of being within the pyramid is a
more concrete way for people to experience multidimensional shifting.

The image gives me more questions, "Can you tell me more about that? I'm not sure I
understand. I do understand it is powerful but I don't always understand exactly what I
experience when I'm in it."

My teachers respond, "This is what we mean, dear one. For many people the experience
of not fully understanding will be the same. During multidimensional work, it is the
rewiring of their physical body that is important, not an intellectual understanding. In a
journey state you expect understanding."

I nod in agreement, "Yes, for that is what I am asking for now! So, I have two
questions. I don't have the powerful crystals that other people I know have among their
sacred objects."

"You do not need them, dear one, for your vibration and your dear one's vibration is
sufficient,” my teachers reply. “It is the vibration of the crystals that is the healing, not
the crystals themselves. They magnify the vibrations. You have sufficient ones to take
with you that will work very nicely."

I am relieved by their reassurance.

They continue, "We will deal more with this later but we wish to show this to you now
to keep it in your mind. You can use the toning to help people to feel safe."

The teachers then gave me a formal list that needs to be in place to guide people
in a multidimensional experience:

1. "There is a molecular shifting that occurs within the structure of your body. This is
safe, for your body as it is quite prepared to make these shifts. It simply needs to be done
in a safe manner. The ability to shift one's physical form has been present from the
beginning of life. This happens to a certain degree each time you do a journey as shifting
conscious does alter your vibration and so your very physical foundation. That is why it
is important to come back and be really grounded. In this way, you are able to both
restructure your vibrational framework while supporting your ability to be in the world.
For instance, this restructuring can support your immune system to improve. Raising the
vibrational level will also enable you to shift into other dimensions more easily. It is the
preparation to actually shift into a different form if it were necessary to so.”

"For those who wish to understand the practical nature of this work, the immune system
is an excellent example. You already know that your human immune systems are under
siege. Work that can assist the immune system and so contribute to health will be better
received. In addition, the same work that positively affects the immune system also helps
to restructure the vibrational framework. The result is a more complete wellbeing. This
can be the focus of your work with the pyramid, to ask for the appropriate restructuring to
assist the immune system at this time. This is something specific enough and most people
have a desire for this to occur."

Won’t the idea of changing their bodies raise anxiety in the participants?” I ask.

“The answer is very clear, dear one.” They begin, “The level of their anxiety would of
course depend upon their trust with their spirit teacher. Their teacher would never
support a restructuring that was inappropriate or inaccurate. So it would be important to
ask each person to have their spirit teacher present with them in the pyramid. They
would than request a cellular restructuring that is appropriate and beneficial. And it will
occur. It is also possible through the image of the Twelve-Pointed Star to give people an
experience of how powerful the multidimensional shifting is.” [I explain more about
this Twelve Pointed Star process in Chapter sixteen.] “And we will give an exact
focus for you when it is time. The intention may shift between now and then. When they
have experienced this safely they may ask for their own image to use in their own work for
their own purposes."

In response to what I’ve heard, I interject, “I want to be very sure that I totally
understand what seems like new information to my rational brain. I feel the acceptance
in my body, but I know I have to completely integrate this focus before presenting it to my
peers! So is this vibrational restructuring the most important step in shifting into other
dimensions?” In reply, they simply offer the next steps!

2. “Healing of imperfections in the DNA strands in the body is the second most
important purpose and function of shifting dimensions. The Teacher continues. “There
are corrections that cannot occur in the physical container in your current dimension due
to many factors that we will not elaborate on at this time.”

3. "A third most important use for shifting into other dimensions is, of course, to access
unlimited forms of healing. This includes physical, emotional, mental, etheric, and
spiritual. You will write this down on the sheets you hand out from the work they have
already done and will remind them of what they already know. Then you will add to it the
work you have been doing."

4. "It is important in shifting dimensions to follow the protocol you have been given.
When entering another dimension it is a crucial protocol to ask permission to enter that
dimension with the intent to learn from those there and with a willingness to offer
something in return. This will be specific to the individual whether it is an agreement to
share the information with others back in your dimension or a gift that seems appropriate
at that time. Reciprocity is crucial for that makes it very explicit that this is not a
hierarchical process."

5. ”Individuals can be taught to shift dimensions as an augmentation of their current

expertise. Their spirit teachers can guide them to weave this new knowledge into the skills
they have already learned, so that the perceived limitations most humans have can be
stretched. In so doing, the comfort zone of what feels possible for each individual will also
change. As people’s perceptions expand, more transformation of your world becomes
possible.”

6. ”As the veils between the worlds become thinner, which is an accelerating process, a
person may suddenly and unexpectedly make a shift into another dimension. By having
safe experiences of this ahead of time, they will know how to benefit from it and how to
bring themselves safely back. You will find that this is a most important skill to have in
the coming years. There may be occasions in the time ahead where intentionally shifting
from one dimension to another will be advisable for safety. Each of your peers teachers
will be advised when it is safe to return to this dimension. Remember, dimensions are
simply ‘an attitude away', a shift in vibration. So learning how to shift one's vibration
gently and safely is crucial. There are many ways to do this The pyramid is one,
journeying is one, praying is one, meditation is one as are music or movement. There
are many ways. What is crucial to know is what the shift in vibration is creating for
yourself and those around you."

7. ”As you work with people, reinforce that they have already made many such shifts. For
instance, in what you call 'past lives,’ which we prefer to call concurrent lives, you may
experience many possibilities. Even while between cycles of incarnation your soul spends
time in many other places other than this earth. These are all other dimensions of
existence than where you are now. There is much information and experiences that is
gathered in those other dimensions that could be of great benefit for each human in this
period of time in history.”

8. ”To answer those who say it is enough of a struggle to stay in your dimension, one of
the most untapped ways of desiring to be fully embodied is to know that any time you
can shift into another dimension and return. This lessens the desire to be free of your
dimension, as the dimension that feels more like ‘home’ can be accessed daily. It can heal
the longing that it prevents the person from being fully present in their body in your
world. Do you understand?"

I reply immediately, "Yes, I do understand. Many of the people we work with have such
a longing for ‘home.’ Usually they either become chronically dissociated or expend
tremendous amounts of energy forcing themselves to be more present which makes them
feel miserable. When they know they can easily access 'home' they can then bring the gifts
of home here and be much happier.”

Smiling, the teacher continues to elaborate. "So the above are important things to
know about inter-dimensional shifting. Portals are the way through which the shift
happens. For instance, your Twelve-pointed star provides the personality/mind a tool to
allow the process to occur. However, the actual experience of shifting dimensions is
vibratory. It is the intention coupled with both the conscious and unconscious willingness
to shift vibrations that is the portal or entrance point to another dimension. Do you
understand?"

”Yes", I responded. “We do think of portals as something that exist in a certain

geographical location, but it feels like they do help us to understand how we experience
vibratory shifts so it becomes familiar and natural to us.”

My teachers continue. “Dear one, vibratory shifting and so inter-dimensional shifting,

is natural to everyone. When you wake up in the morning you shift from your sleep state
vibration to a vibration of being awake. As you become more active, you engage another
level of vibration. The shifting of vibration happens constantly. It is learning how to flow
with this and how to intentionally shift for the wellbeing of all that is the foundation of
this work. Do you understand?”

”Yes,” I reply. “What is the best way for me to present an experience of vibratory shifting
to my peers?”

”We believe that the pyramid would be the best way to present an experience of vibratory
shifting. As each person has their own experience they can journey to ask their teacher
what information is important for them to carry forward in their life. Do you under-
stand?”

”Yes.” I affirm. “I know when we play the Whistling Vessels 40 there is a vibratory shift
but I don't always know the full nature of that shift.”

My Teacher understands my need to be fully prepared to present to my peers and

so stays on topic! “Perhaps what would be beneficial would be to have the experience of
the vibratory shift and then journey to the cells in the body to be given information about
that shift. You can also ask how to program vibratory shifts in a way that is beneficial.
Understanding that shifting is basically taking responsibility for one's own energy
system as it evolves. Since each person's energy system impacts all others persons
around, this is a high level of personal responsibility. To be in the middle of chaos, one
person can ask for their vibration to be so calm and so centered that it steadies everyone
around them. One could ask for a vibratory acceleration that could help to heal another.
A vibratory shift could allow someone to move from one way of thinking to another. For
instance, if one is in the midst of a counterproductive thought loop, one can learn how to
shift one's vibration so that a particular thought will not occur again.”

”Are you talking about being able to interrupt obsessive kind of thinking?” I asked. This
idea intrigued me as it could be helpful in our work with clients.

“Yes, dear one. When you move the body into a different vibration, a different frequency
of thought, another whole other range of thinking comes into one's mind and takes the
place of what was counterproductive.”

“I understand this at a knowing level,” I respond. “I don't yet fully understand how I
would teach someone to consciously shift their vibration.”
“You could simply ask each one's spirit teacher to teach them. This would be far easier.
Suggest that they ask their spirit teacher to teach them how to shift their vibration. They
could choose the category they would wish to begin with, from a despair vibration of
energy to hope; from too expansive to be productive to be focusing; There are no ends to
how this can impact the human, do you understand?”

“Yes, I do. It feels a bit of stretch at this time. I'm sure in a few weeks it would become as
natural as breathing! At this moment it seems terribly exciting as a way for people to re-
ally be in charge of their own emotional self and how that impacts the physical.”

“That is correct, dear one. By learning how to refocus their emotional self they can learn
how to refocus their entire life.”

“So you are saying that a person can choose a state of being like worry and ask to shift
that vibration to something more beneficial?”

“Correct.” My teacher quickly responds.

I ask, “If a person’s body was vibrating at a low level of energy, they could ask for an
experience of how they could shift that vibration to incorporate a higher vibration?”

“That is correct. It is as simple as shifting the vibration they are experiencing. Humans
typically operate at vibratory levels that are often unconscious and programmed from
their enculturation. All of this can be shifted to a different frequency in which they will
experience a different knowing, a different feeling, a different response to their situation.
This happens all the time in journeying and in meditation. It is simply that you are
teaching people how to do it consciously. Do you understand?”

“Yes. This sounds exciting! So I will ask them to journey to a spirit teacher and choose an
experience happening in their lives that is not as comfortable as they would like. I will
explain that whatever they experience has certain vibrations. The experience may be
anger, lack of energy or any kind of human experience. That experience is a state of being
that has a vibration to it. Each person can ask to be shown what that vibration looks like
and then ask their teacher to give them an experience of a vibration that will change it.”

“You are correct.” My teacher seems pleased. “This is a very practical purpose of
shifting vibration, and shifting vibration is what is needed to understand how to shift
dimensions. Do you understand? You shift it within the dimension of your body and you
will have the exact skill that you need to shift any other vibration at any moment in
time.”

“Yes, I do understand. So the fundamental principle of dimensional shifting is knowing

how to shift vibrations within your own body?”
“This is correct. This is the piece that must be understood for people to shift into other
dimensions safely. When they sufficiently understand how to regulate their own
vibrations within themselves, they realize that they will always be safe.”

“Thank you. This is most helpful!”

“You are most welcome, dear one. This is most important for you to be teaching and you
are the one to teach it for you understand it at the 'knowing' level. This will help you to
find ways to teach it in ways that people will understand and integrate into their lives.”

As the teacher finishes speaking, we move back to my starting place. I thank my

teachers and they acknowledge that they are glad to teach me because I am a
faithful student!
 11. Interdimensional Shifting Notes

As the months rolled on, my training program about shifting dimensions

continued through regular, weekly visits to my spirit teachers in shamanic
journeys. To preserve the rich content of these hour-long journeys, I would
narrate the experiences I was having into an audio recorder. As the teachers
communicated with me, I would repeat what they told me aloud. In this way, I
was able to capture all the details of their teachings. After each of the journeys,
I would carefully transcribe my narrations. While transcribing a journey every
week is a laborious task, it is the best way for me to internalize the information
and experiences I received.

From our Ursa meeting in the Autumn, my journey and transcribing process
continued into the following Spring. At that time, my journeys continued to
evolve and I was given a succession of new Teachers specifically for teaching me
about vibrations as well as more about how to fulfill my assignment to share this
work with my peers. Over this time, my Teachers gave me a ritual, a handout,
and processes to provide personal experiences that would support my shamanic
community to understand the work and how significant this ability is for these
times on our planet. My first step would be finding a way to demystify the idea
that human beings could shift into another dimension!

The following information has some repetition. This is because, just as we

humans often express thoughts, concepts, concerns somewhat differently
depending upon those we are addressing, so do our spirit teachers. Typically,
they answer my concerns or resistances directly and with compassion. So when I
asked them why this work was important when most of us are having trouble
enough managing everyday living here and now, they answered my inquiry my
phrasing it in several ways. Over the months, here are some of the things my
spirit teachers said:

“In your larger soul self you already do exist in different dimensions simultaneously. It is
time for you to become conscious of how huge your souls are!”

“Interdimensional shifting is a way you can personally experience the breadth of the
human soul.”

“Until humans know that they are not the only ones who exist, that beings in other
dimensions love and want to support them, they will stay stuck in their small worlds --
and their minds, spirits, souls are not small!”

“Dimensions may be galaxies, beings, spaces not presently known to your earth. You,
yourself are a dimension!”

“When you merge with your power Animals/teachers you are in another dimension.
The vibrations of another dimension are within you!”

“Beings in all dimensions have the same energy as within you; the 'Unifying Source En-
ergy'. The essence of the life-forms of all beings in all dimensions is seeking unification
with All That Is."

“The earth is reclaiming her natural state of being. You humans are reclaiming your
natural state of being which is one with All That Is/God/Source with no notion of
separation. In time the notion/concept of separation will be totally eliminated from your
consciousness."

“Other dimensions are impacted by your actions and your thoughts. You do have a
responsibility to learn about other dimensions and these impacts to other dimensions as
well as to the earth.”

My Teacher, the Christ Being also told me, “I am one of the dimensions that is within
you. I am not a person. I am a dimension. Christ consciousness is a dimension. I exist in
all other dimensions as unconditional love.”

“You are always shifting your vibrations. Understanding and then intentionally
shifting your vibrations is how you can experience how huge your souls really are and
how unlimited is your ability to transform whatever limits. This is necessary for healing
yourselves and All That Is.”

“Dimensions are simply a shift in vibration. Any shift in vibration changes you. It
creates a shift within your own body.”

“As you intentionally learn to shift your vibrations you can, in fact, intentionally heal,
change and access the capacities that lie dormant in your DNA.”

“DNA was once thought to be fixed and unchangeable. Scientifically it is verified that it
is possible to alter your DNA by addressing your emotions.”41

“Practicing this shift over time creates the possibility of DNA change. This process is
called ‘recalibration’.”

“You can safely participate, with your spirit teacher’s assistance, in your own recalibra-
tion to wholeness! Through these changes, you can consistently live in the experience of
your larger soul self’s expanded energy system. This capacity is possible now!”

At this point in my journeys, I was introduced to Odana, who presented herself as

a spokesperson for the Council of All Beings. She introduced some new concepts
she wanted me to share.
To begin with, she shared more about herself and the council. “The Council of All
Beings functions as a whole, not as individuals. The Council vibrates at frequencies not of
your earth, but can be slowed down to be useful in your healing/teaching process, and for
your intentional rituals.”

Odana continued, “Practice in recalibrating your own energy system will prepare you to
shift into other dimensions with your physical body.”

The teacher continued, “To take your physical body into another dimension requires
you to rearrange your present vibrational frequency that you maintain to function on this
plane. Reassemble it in a way that is useful in another dimension. This is a recalibration
of your energy system.”

Odana continued, “The energy is gathered in the solar plexus in preparation for physical
shifting into another dimension. Your pyramid ritual 42 is an opportunity to experience a
recalibration of your energy system in a safe way while in this dimension. Include this
important information in your on-going work. We will be supporting you to maintain
accuracy.”

After this conversation, it was clear to me that I would be asking many more
questions about this topic to maintain the accuracy the teachers desired!”
 12. My Teacher’s Input About Interdimensional Shifting

What follows here is the information my Teachers offered to me for the handout I
gave my shamanic colleagues at Ursa for my presentation:

1. The fundamental principal of being able to shift dimensions is to understand

how to shift the vibrations within our own body. Each state of being we are in
has its own corresponding vibrations. In addition, our bodies are themselves,
dimensions of experience. We can intentionally shift vibrations within the
dimension of our own body. These changes in frequency can bring us into an
internal alignment of our physical body, mind, emotions, spirit and etheric body.
My Teachers define or describe vibrations as waves of energy that vibrate at
different frequencies or rhythms.

2. The ability to shift our physical nature has been ours from the very beginning
of Life. To shift consciousness as in a shamanic journey involves the ability to
shift our vibration within our body. My Teachers say that this creates an actual
physical change. This restructuring of the body, or raising the vibrational level of
the body is highly critical to total and complete wellbeing and provides a safe
method to upgrade our immune system.

3. Shifting dimensions provides a method of healing imperfections in the

structure of the DNA. Some of these corrections are ones that cannot occur in
our current dimension.

4. Shifting dimensions can provide access to unlimited forms of healing of the

physical, emotional, mental, spiritual and etheric bodies.

5. Shamanic practitioners can be guided by our spirit teachers to learn new

information that can augment our present skills. This can assist us to move
beyond our perceived limitations so that we reach a new baseline of comfort in
this work

6. What we understand as other dimensions are simply “a breath away”, that is

accomplished through a shift in vibration. As the veils between the dimensions
become thinner, it is possible for individuals to shift suddenly and unexpectedly
into another dimension without being conscious of it. It is crucial for those of us
who work with other people to be aware of our own shifts and how to bring
another person back.

7. There may be occasions in the coming years where being able to intentionally
shift from one dimension to another will be advisable for safety. This shift of
dimension can do two things. Firstly, the shift of dimension can prepare our body
for the changes our planet is going through and if that is not possible, we can
remain in another dimension until our teachers advise us that it is safe to return
to this dimension.

8. During a shift in dimension, it is possible to access experiences of concurrent

lifetimes, which could be of great benefit for every human at this time in history.
Our soul can guide this process with support from our teachers.

9. Shifting back and forth between dimensions is also a beneficial way to support
a person to be fully embodied. The action of going and then returning helps us to
trust being here more completely. It is an energy drain when we are not fully
present here. Typically, this is caused by a longing to be in a “place” that feels
more like “home.” The longing is relieved by bringing the gifts and experience
of the “home” dimension back into our daily life.

10. Portals are often necessary to accomplish this work. The ordinary mind
needs a way to be able to grasp an unfamiliar experience. A portal provides the
mind with a framework by which it can experience a new reality with more
comfort. This comfort then allows the mind to expand its view of what is real to
accommodate the new input. This transformation of the mind allows us to be
able to continue having more experiences and so on. Each shift allows a change in
vibration so that the potential for vibrational and so physical change becomes
unlimited. In reality the shift of vibration is what moves us through to another
dimension. The use of a “place” or object” through which we pass gives the mind
a starting and ending place. This allows it to experience the shift with much more
comfort.

When we wake in the morning we shift from a sleep state, which is one vibration,
to an awake state of vibration. In this case, our mind understands we began and
ended our “journey” to another dimension in our bed! In this way the bed may
be considered a portal. With time and practice, the mind allows more flexibility
of experience and so the shifting becomes more effortless.
 13. Portals And Their Purposes

In my exploration in this dimensional work, my spirit teachers gave me a Twelve

Point Star process as one method of experiencing the use of portals. (See Chapter
16 for this portal process.) The image is similar to an analog clock in that it is a
circular shape divided into the familiar twelve segments. This well-recognized
form provides an easy entrance for a person to enter other dimensions and to
return safely. This kind of tool is important as it supports the “explorer” to have a
sense of a “map.” This then helps the mind/personality to cooperate with the
process, since even the most intrepid explorer with trust in their spirit teachers
may also have a personality that could override their curiosity!

In many spiritual traditions, a portal is used as a tool to support the opening

up to another experience. A Buddhist mandala is one such example. These
function as maps of consciousness and also as a way to enter into the realm of the
deity. For shamans, the shamanic journey process is initiated in a starting place
that may lead to another spiritual realm. The shaman may spiritually “travel”
up, down or sideways from their starting place and in each case, moving beyond
ordinary reality experiences of time and space, arrive in another dimension.
People who practice shifting consciousness to seek information, healing, and
expansion of awareness, experience these other dimensions as REAL even though
they are not considered as concrete as our more ordinary easternized of life.

As in any spiritual practice, the more a person becomes acquainted with the
shamanic journey process, the greater possibilities their teachers in Non Ordinary
Reality provide. Each journeyer opens up unlimited potential for experience
based on his or her interests and physical conditioning including increased
experiences of a wide variety of portals. As a part of supporting my Ursa friends
to be more prepared for expanding their experience of shifting dimensions, I
invited them to participate in a shamanic journey to their own teachers and
power animals to ask what each recommended was important to know about
portals.

The following is some of this information they received in their journeys:

1. “Using the portals designated for the journeying process saves time in accessing power
animals and teachers and for some, at least, the best way of accessing their teachers.”

2. “As the changes in the vibratory level in this planet continue, portals offer a way to
move into non-ordinary reality with more ease and comfort.”

3. “Portals offer a way to accelerate the vibration of our physical being to be in more
harmony with the changes that are occurring on our planet. This is beneficial for as the
new world emerges we will already be in that vibration.”
4. “Portals are useful when confronted by feelings of impossibility. Being able to enter a
“landscape of the Possible” reminds our physical body of new potentials. This is not an
escape from the present situation, but an opportunity to call to memory our unlimited
possibilities.”

5. “Portals open us to be able to receive the help that is not always present in this reality,
but can be accessed in non-ordinary reality.”

6. “Portals are a shortcut to distant places.”

7. “Altering consciousness changes the possibilities through the doorway of our heart.”

8. “Portals open pathways to a shift in consciousness when the barriers seem most severe
and blocked.”

9. “They may appear by our choice or through spirit. If we choose to move through a
portal, physical changes occur each time we make the choice.”

10. “When we call for a portal they always exist.”

11. “Physical changes happen when you take a person with you.”

12. “A portal is like a lens.”

13. “Portals are windows of opportunity to go and come at different levels.”

14. “Portals are necessary to experience, examine your true nature and the true nature of
other forms of existence…and is a lot simpler than Stargate!”

15. “Once we experience something in another dimension it may be possible for it to

occur in this dimension, like an experience of music that continues to be heard in this
dimension.”

16. “An understanding of portals is essential in teaching others to journey or in healing

work. Others may move through a portal and need guidance to return and/or comprehend
their experience.”
.
17. “Portals provide the opportunity to move into dimensions to be expanded and/or
totally different without loss of sense of self.”

18. “It is possible to take a group through a portal with extreme caution regarding the
strength and/or weakness of each participant.”
19. “There is never a time when we are not in a portal for those who walk between the
worlds, i.e. the betwixt time, the place where two realities meet, the edge of the two is a
portal.”

20. “Portals are necessary as a way to be with and merge with spirit teachers.”
 14. Information On Safely Working With Portals

As they did with discovering uses of portals, my Ursa peers also received
information in their journeys about using portals safely to shift dimensions.
These are some of the pointers they received from their teachers prior to our
working together with the pyramid and twelve-point star.

1. “It is important not to be in fear.”

2. “It is important not to be angry with oneself.”

3. “Be single-minded when doing this work.”

4. “Release attachment to physical form or tools”

5. “Thoughts are ropes to keep you reminded of where you came from and so can help you
to return to ordinary reality.”

6. “Merge with your power animal and listen to the call of power animal like the way bats
echolocate.”

7. “Set a clear Intention to move oneself forward and also set the clear intention to
reconnect back to ordinary reality.”

8. “Keep breathing.”

9. “Listen to your heartbeat.”

10. “Don't make any assumptions.”

11. “Keep a sense of humor.”

12. “Always go with the protection of trusted guides, power animals and or spirit
teachers.”

13. “Always go with the intent to benefit All That Is.”

14. “Ask for a ‘portal guide,’ who is the one to always go with you through portals.”

15. “Ask for your power animals always to be with you. Sometimes a power animal may
choose to wait at the opening of the portal, some may accompany you. Be clear with them
about their role with your portal work.”

16. “Don't change your mind. It messes up vibrational changes that your body under-
goes.”
17. “Notice exit signs.”

18. “Ask your power animal to bring you back.”

19. “For some, blue light is associated with portal work.”

20. ”For some, music will assist the process.”

21. “Listen to facilitator instructions and group agreements when working in a group.”

22. “Use only a two-way portal as some portals are entry only with exit in different
location.”

23. “Focus and intent is everything!”

24. “Be aware that when you open a portal to go in another dimension you may also open
that portal for others to come here. Make sure the portal is closed when fully returned to
ordinary reality.”

25. “Clear alignment with purpose is necessary.”

26. “Participating in more portal training in spiritual form is useful training for being
able to shift in physical form safely.”
 15. On Creating Portals

I have synthesized the following guidelines from my journeys, workshops

presented by others, personal experiences, and peer contributions. Feel free to
add your own wisdom!

1. A person identified as the portal guide draws a circle that creates a vortex.
This needs to be a facilitator skilled in portal work, and/or spirit teacher with
whom the facilitator has established a trusting relationship as an advisor for this
work. This method is one used to support a dying person safe passage into the
Light.

2. The facilitator needs to know the route to go and how to return. This person
must also be able to explain the details clearly to the group. Merged with her or
his spirit teacher, the facilitator’s role is to watch the portal and know a way to
call participants back out if needed.

3. Use an ordinary reality place as a portal. These can be found anywhere.

4. Creating a portal out of ego is extremely dangerous

5. Any spiral that moves is a portal

6. Intentionality creates a portal. Upon requesting a portal be formed, some

people are able to detect the vortex by extending their hand toward it.

7. Ask for a specific ritual to create a portal for a specific purpose that includes
clear safety instructions for going and returning

8. Some form of bubble is a common method of safe transportation to other

dimensions

9. Ask for a portal that can be clearly identified in this dimension to confirm
complete return to ordinary reality.
 16. The Twelve-Point Star Process

To prepare me for utilizing a

concrete, accessible portal to other
dimensions for myself and those I
work with, my spirit teachers gave
me an assignment. In a journey,
they showed me an image of a star
with twelve points and asked me
create that image as an embroi-
dered, portable wall hanging. Ini-
tially, this presented a bit of a
challenge as I had never embroi-
dered anything before and do not
perceive myself as craft-gifted. I
have, however, proven to be will-
ing to loyally follow through with
spirit-guided assignments! Best of
all, my life partner is a profession-
ally trained artist. Once I explained
what I needed, she created a
template for me to follow. The
actual star image I created is
twelve inches across. The spokes
alternate between white and gold
embroidery and the very center of the star is a gold embroidered star as well.
Each point is trimmed with purple ribbon. This star is positioned on a back-
ground of turquoise Chinese silk with red silk ribbon placed in the style of a
Tibetan thangka. The effect produces a radiant starburst that draws the viewer
inward to its center. The completed wall hanging is twenty-five inches long,
fifteen inches wide and provides a concrete focus for shifting dimensions. It can
be used personally, with individual clients, or for group experiences. I have
discovered in my practice that even when this particular physical star image is
not accessible, it is possible to imagine a star with twelve points for the same
purpose. Perhaps this is another example to remind practitioners not to get
attached to form but hold a clear intention and be willing to trust a changing
process. Again, feel free to adapt this based on your own guidance and
experiences.

Here are some of the guidelines I have received for using a twelve-point star as a
portal to other dimensions:

1. Choose and clarify your intention for using a twelve-point star process.

2. Ask yourself for an image of a twelve-point star. Yours may look different from
the one described above, but it is crucial that yours has twelve points. This is
important as you may be asked to do this process with your eyes closed. Since we
are all familiar with the analog clock, it makes this easy to visualize.

3. Ask your power animal and/or most trusted spirit teacher to meet you in front
of the twelve-pointed star.

4. Ask your power animal and/or spirit teacher if any preparation is required for
you to enter into the center of this star.

5. When all preparations are completed, ask your power animal and/or spirit
teacher to enter with you into the center of the star.

6. Once in the center or the star, ask your power animal and/or spirit teacher
what dimension--as represented by a point of the star--would be beneficial for
you to visit.

7. While still in the center of the twelve-pointed star, ask your power animal
and/or spirit teacher if there is any further preparation necessary to prepare you
to enter into that designated star point.

8. Following the guidance of the facilitator, your own inner self, and the guidance
of your power animal and/or spirit teacher, proceed into the designated point of
the star, while stating your specific intention.

9. As you enter into the designated dimension, ask for a being to meet you who
will respond to your stated intention.

10. As the being approaches you tell him or her who you are and ask his or her
for permission to enter into this dimension.

11. If the answer is affirmative, state your intention for choosing to enter the
dimension including your willingness to offer something in return as an ex-
change of energy. Before you proceed, ask the being what he or she wishes you
to offer in exchange. At this point you may negotiate until you are comfortable
with the exchange. Ask how this being prefers to be addressed.

12. Enter into the dimension and experience what it offers

13.When it seems clear to you that the purpose of your intention is completed,
thank the being or beings that you have met.

14. Return to the center of the star and ask your power animal and/or spirit
teacher for any necessary recalibration your body requires to gently return to this
dimension. It is important to be fully grounded in your body as you return.

15. When this process is complete, step out of the star with your power animal
and /or teacher and thank them for their support and guidance.

16. Record your experience.

The first time I facilitated the Twelve-Point Star Process was with my peers at our
Ursa reunion. It was the Autumn just prior to the much anticipated, Y2K event
and the entrance into a new millennium. Dramatic changes had been predicted to
occur on the eve of the new year and the months that followed. As a result, the
fear level was very high in our culture and this was also evident in our group
of peers. My spirit teachers instructed me to facilitate the suggested preparatory
journeys for each participant to meet their most trusted power animal or spirit
teacher for this process. The instructions included each person setting their own
specific intention for being guided into another dimension through the point in
the star where they were most drawn to or guided to enter. As always, each of
their spirit teachers knew what experience was most needed for this time in their
personal process. The experiences were varied and rich in content. Meeting
entirely new kinds of beings gave opportunities for expanded awareness, for
healing of unbeneficial generational patterns, for healing of emotional wounds,
and for opening new possibilities for healing modalities, to name just a few.

This first interdimensional meeting through the star was also preparation for the
next experience that was for each person to enter into a five-foot-tall copper
pyramid that had been set up in our gathering room. The journey intention for
entering the pyramid was to meet with a multidimensional being who could
facilitate a DNA change that was beneficial for the participant in preparation for
the new millennium. As I had anticipated with my spirit advisors, some of my
peers were reluctant to consider something as radical as a DNA change. I was
grateful that I had been advised to encourage them to trust that their own spirit
teacher would not allow any such change that was other than beneficial for them.
I reminded them that we were entering a time in history of our planet that would
continue to accelerate and we as shamanic practitioners were expected and
required to lead others in this on-going transition. Apparently even with the
anxiety this generated, it facilitated positive results, for we were invited to offer
these same experiences the following year in Montreal, Canada. I have also used
the Twelve-Point Star Process with individual clients when I received guidance
that it was appropriate. As with my Ursa peers, the clients received a wide
variety of experiences that contributed to the progress of their individual healing
and growth processes.
 17. A Ritual For Joining Earth And Stars

My spirit teachers continued responding to my request for concrete support to

introduce this exciting material they were offering me. The following ritual helps
to reinforce our place as bridges between the heavens and Earth. In addition, it is
helpful for those who experience themselves as having origins in the stars.
Sometimes these people feel a deep longing for a “home” that isn’t here on Earth.
Being able to feel that a bridge exists between the cosmic dimensions and this
world helps them to feel more grounded and supported in their physical
experience. In a shamanic journey my spirit teachers gave me the following
ritual that can be used for many different purposes. I have used this both
individually and with groups.

1. Stand with your feet set wide apart and with your arms extended over your
head. Place your hands together with fingers touching--as if held together in
prayer-- and align your arms so that your hands are high above the crown of
your head.

2. Set the intention to descend into the crystalline core of Mother Earth.

3. When completely connected with the Earth’s crystalline core, invite Mother
Earth’s energy to move up through your feet, through your legs and up into your
heart center.

4. When you feel fully charged with this energy, move this energy up and into
your hands. Lower your arms to shoulder level and extend your energized hands
with the palms facing upwards to the left and right of your body. Turn so that the
fingertips of one hand face the East and the other hand-s fingertips are facing the
West. Ask for the energy of Mother Earth to move out to feed all living things.
Visualize the energy flowing up your body, through your arms and out from
your fingertips. Name all that you are aware of as you allow this transmission to
occur. Continue naming beings and places until that direction feels complete.

5. When complete in the East/West direction, slowly shift clockwise to the

South/North direction and repeat the same prayer of intention.

6. Then with your body facing East again, raise your arms up with palms turned
upwards to call for the stars. Two stars will send beams of energy into your
outstretched hands to connect with the Earth. Imagine that the stars’ energies are
being pulled into your hands and then flowing down through your body and
into Mother Earth. Remember, even though it may be daytime when you are
doing this exercise, the stars are still present. Our most blessed Sun is simply so
close to us that we cannot see her sisters!

7. When this feels complete, bring your hands onto your heart center to replenish
the energy in your body.

8. Finally, release any excess energy back into the Earth.

This exercise may be helpful for healing yourself, healing land, helping you to
become more grounded, supporting your physical body to be stronger, assisting
your brain to develop new neural pathways for your work with other dimensions
and also for general energetic and physical wellbeing. I often use this ritual at
work to renew my energy between clients.
 18. Called By A Rock

The more I explored other dimensions through portals, under the guidance of
my spirit teachers, the more surprising opportunities were presented to me in
ordinary reality. The following experience is one example.

It was a glorious Spring day and the woods were alive with the scents and
sounds of renewal. Lady slippers were peeking out between the leaf litter and a
barred owl called out in the distance. Looking down at the ground, the hoof
prints of a young moose that had walked across the lawn of the lodge only an
hour before were crisply visible. As we walked, we had to step around the drop-
pings of a bear who had been browsing the tender shoots. One of our students
from the Two Year Shamanic Apprentice Training Program that my partner and I
facilitate, had invited us to join her in a celebration ceremony. As part of the
morning soul retrieval training, each of us had experienced the return of one of
our own child soul essences. As there were an uneven number of participants, I
had been partnered for the exercise with one of our apprentices.

Before we entered the woods we were instructed to become the age of our re-
turned child essence. I could feel the excitement of my young child self who was
anticipating a mystery walk in the woods. Our guide was a science teacher who
had sponsored home school programs for many years. She lingered along the
way to show us edible tubers, endangered species and exquisite life forms we
might have missed in walking on our own.

With practiced skill, our leader led us beside a brook, swollen from the abundant
spring rains rushing down to a hidden lake. Up above us was a waterfall that had
tripled its normal size and was pouring the enlivened water in a glorious spray.
Our leader instructed each of us in the group to sit around her in a circle on soft,
rich green moss. She had carefully prepared the space, checking with all the Mid-
dle World sprits to ask their permission for us to gather there. There was a mood
of anticipation. First, she acknowledged all the life forms that were in the area,
thanking them for the gifts they offered to us. She introduced herself to each of us
and then began to read a children's book she had created especially for the
ceremony. We had been asked to bring a small gift to offer in gratitude. We were
all filled with the magic of the place and the moment. Time passed quickly and,
all too soon, it was time to return to the lodge for the afternoon session.

As I got up to leave, I balanced myself on a nearby rock. It was quartz, beautiful

and white as the sun shone on its many facets. The lower part was covered with
thick moss. I wondered how deep the rock lived in the earth and how long it had
lived there. I was surprised to hear it speak to me. I distinctly heard the rock say,
“Take me home with you.” It moved me deeply, but being mindful of the time
and the need to get back to my adult leadership role, I made a mental note to do a
journey to the rock to be clear that I had heard its spirit correctly. On my next
break, I did just that. In the
journey, the rock told me
that it was once part of a ley
line that had underlain that
area. It said further, that its
work was done there and it
wanted me to take it to my
home where it would be
open to a new purpose.

I don’t know why the rock

calling to me was such a
surprise. Years before I had
ever heard of shamanism
or had consciously met my
first spirit guide, I had
awakened one morning in
my beloved mountain home
with an inner voice clearly
saying, “Go and find a special
rock. You will know it when
you find it.” My best friend, who was always up for an adventure, came along. I
knew I was to go to the Sunday River, located close to the popular ski resort near
Bethel, Maine. I found an area that felt right and started looking. There were
many unique rocks surrounding the area, but none seemed to be “the one.” After
searching for a while, I felt guided to look into the river itself. It was August and
the river was quite low but still running swiftly. There in the middle of the river
was the rock that I felt called to bring home. It was over a foot in length and
heavy. There was a steep and slippery cliff to climb to get it up to the car. Of
course, I complained the entire way, “Why did this have to be the rock?” I asked it
but since I hadn’t yet learned to journey, I received no answer.

This rock lived in my meditation space for a full year even though I wasn’t yet
quite clear why it had been drawn into my life. One day I showed it to a friend.
With shock I realized that from the new angle I was observing it, I could see a
distinct outline of an owl and a familiar Buddhist symbol. There were five owl
images in all, each one nestled inside the other and clearly etched in the rock!
The full impact of these images didn’t occur until a while later when a snowy owl
flew directly in front of my windshield. This episode after the one with the rock
initiated a deep level of curiosity that challenged my then workaholic worldview.

As a result of this previous experience, I paid attention when this quartz rock in
the woods invited me to take it home. Of course, it turned out that it wasn’t quite
that simple and there were more lessons to learn. Several weeks later, when I
finally found the time to go search for the crystal rock again, my attempt was met
with defeat. The woods looked very different clothed in its summer foliage. The
brook and waterfall were now only a trickle. The landscape markers looked
completely different. In the almost ninety degree heat I searched. Even though I
was accompanied by a friend who is adept at communicating with nature, I could
not find the rock that had so clearly called to me in the spring.

The next Autumn when I was at the lodge again with another of our shamanic
apprentice groups, I found the rock quite easily. I had enlisted help of five
apprentices as the rock told me clearly that it did not want me to dig it out with a
shovel or be bounced through the woods in a wheelbarrow. The rock had said
that it would participate with us so that it could be easily removed from the place
it had lain for hundreds of years. We were instructed to gently pull away the
moss. There was no way to know how deep the rock was buried in the soil. The
rock also told us to begin toning so that it could become lighter and assist us to
remove it from its present home. With deep appreciation, we followed its
instructions exactly. Even though we were following the guidance we were
receiving we were still quite surprised when, as we tenderly lifted the rock we
found that it was very light! Two of us very easily, and reverently, lifted the rock
and placed it in the middle of a blanket offered for this sacred task. Toning
harmoniously along the way, the six of us cradled the rock and with three of us
on each side of the blanket gently walked over the uneven ground until we came
to my car where we placed it reverently inside. It was there that it wished to wait
until it was time for us to leave the lodge.

Once home, the rock asked to be placed in our healing room and gave further
instructions for an initiation ceremony that was to be carried out inside the
copper pyramid. In its new home, the rock became an integral part of our
Medicine for the Earth monthly gathering. It was still more than a year later
that its real purpose in my life became clear. It communicated that it was to
provide a portal for another level of my multidimensional training. Some of the
experiences are included in the following chapters of this book.
 19. Shifting Dimensions Using The Crystal Rock As A Portal

What follows below is the transcription of the first experience I had using the
rock as a portal:

“I'm calling forth a bubble of energy around me so that only beneficial energies can enter
into this space.” This is my first time working with the rock crystal without using
the drumming I typically use to expand consciousness. Using some soft music to
help drown out traffic sounds from the busy street outside my suburban home,
“I'm calling forth those Beings who come to offer protection for this process. I
welcome the Christ Being, Ah Ya Ho Ah, my power animal, Grandma, Quan Yin, Green
Tara, any of the Elders who wish to be here, the Council of Light Beings, Grandfather
Misha, The Crystal Master and Ge Oh To Ah.” I speak aloud my request for
assistance to trust my experience. At this point I merge with my bear and sit
facing the rock. I open my eyes and focus on the white quartz triangle that is the
most prominent feature on its surface. I ask Quan Yin if she is the one to guide me
into the portal and she indicates that she is the one. With my half closed in what I
refer to as “soft eyes,” I speak aloud my intention to move in through the portal
of the crystal.

Quan Yin materializes in front of me in the room. She says to me, ’What will work
best is simply to breathe, relax and get comfortable as close to the level of the crystal as
possible. Relax and breathe.” I realize that she is in the same position that she takes
in my journeys when she is guiding me through a portal. She has been preparing
me for this moment in ordinary reality. ”Just keep focusing, dear one,” she assures
me.

It is my intention to take Quan Yin’s hand and to move with her through the
portal in the crystal into another dimension and to follow her so that she can
guide me to learn what is beneficial. I first notice that the crystal matrix is porous
with many defined facets. As I continue to observe, the rock’s surface continues
to change. It now appears like a huge mountain with hand and foot holds that
would allow me to climb. I continue to ask for guidance as I have a lot of trouble
trusting these middle world experiences with my eyes even half open.

Quan Yin perceives my discomfort and assures me to “hold the soft-eyed pose.”
Lowering my lids so that my eyes are barely open seems to cause my vision to
strain, but I can begin to feel a shift in my body. What happens briefly is that the
rock became a diamond shape, but I could not hold on to it. Now it becomes very
much like the circle opening Quan Yin has been taking me through in my
journeys.

She says, ”Once you are through it is OK to close your eyes but not until.” As I follow
her instructions, what I am aware of is that the textures of the rock appear
different than with my eyes wide open. As I notice this, I perceive that the white
crystals on the rock surface are becoming much more luminous and more
accentuated. I'm aware again of a round opening, as if the whole rock has a
round opening in it about six inches across.

Quan Yin says, “This training will help you find safe portals anywhere. With our
guidance, you will know how to be safe, when you need to move into them and bring back
information. We will also support you to teach other people to do this safely when you are
proficient.” Her reassurance helped me to focus more deeply.

At this point, I see the circle is becoming more defined. It is very hard to keep my
eyes open. It's as if the whole circle is becoming luminous. I thank the crystal for
being persistent in calling me to it and asking to come to my home. I address it,
“I ask for your permission to enter you when it is time.” The whole circle is now white
luminous crystal as if I am actually seeing through the moss that is still on its
face. Slowly I begin to see an animal face with soft inviting eyes. Now the circle
around that face is becoming more defined. As I observe this, I feel changes
within myself. I ask for the vibration that is appropriate for me entering into the
crystal. I sense that the vibration may be one that is very close to the vibration of
our earth. Quan Yin confirms that this is correct.

I now see another face. It is an old, wise crone looking toward the south. I have
trouble keeping my eyes open as I am being mesmerized. The feelings were like
the time I had been hypnotized. Quan Yin lets me know it is OK to close my eyes
now and she takes my hand. My spirit moves with her into the glowing circle of
the crystal rock. I'm aware of being in a wide, open space. At first, I don't see
anything else. She asks me to look down to my feet. I see that I have sandals on
them! I realize that I am dressed in a long robe and that I am pulling a hood over
my head. As I look to my side, Quan Yin is dressed in the same fashion. We
walk down a road together. I feel as if more of myself is being pulled into this
dimension. I'm looking around. I feel as if my arms and hands are a little browner
than I am used to seeing. My skin feels good. I don't know where I am walking
to, but I am aware that there are beings there that are dressed as we are who are
walking toward us. Quan Yin and I continue walking until we are about four
yards from them. She bows deeply to them and says, “Thank you for meeting us.
This is the one of whom I spoke. She will be coming into your dimension frequently to
learn from you and also to share with you what she knows from her dimension.”

As we stand together, I find it difficult to discern the features of the other beings.
While their robes are white with hoods like ours, their faces are only shining
essences. As I develop more comfort in this dimension, I can see that one of them
is a woman with startling blue eyes. She reminds me of the time that I met A Ya
Ho Ah with her aquamarine eyes. This being nods and greets me with a warm
smile. The person next to her is a man who is a little taller than she is with skin
that is dark and wrinkled as if he has had a life of sun exposure. He nods his
head slightly in greeting and I do the same. To his left is a shorter person with
light-hearted energy. I'm not sure if this is a younger person or just a short per-
son. This person laughs and says, “I am simply short like you.” She is shorter than I
am with a joyful countenance. It feels like there are more beings in this place but
not with us at this time. The beings indicate that Quan Yin and I are to follow
them. As we walk, I have the sense that the road has been provided just to give
me the feeling of something to walk on. I feel the beings have done this to help to
accommodate the needs of my mind. The texture of the road is firm but different
than what I am used to in my own dimension. I find it hard to describe.

I'm aware that we are entering through a curved gate into a village-like area. The
buildings are gleaming white, textured like adobe and very clean. We seem to be
going straight ahead to a domed building which feels a lot like ones I visit while
on soul retrieval journeys. We climb a series of ten broad, majestic steps. At the
top, we move through a kind of force field. As we move through it I experience
tingling sensations. We are in a big cavernous room. I notice that I am aware of
my body in this new dimension and that I can feel my feet on the floor.

I'm drawn to a presence in front of me that energetically feels like a leader. The
very tall being rises from a chair and walks down four or five steps to greet me.
This being has what can best be described as a reddish turban on his head al-
though it isn’t like anything I’ve ever seen. Over his white flowing robe lies a
pendant with a crystal in the center that constantly changes color.

He does reverent namaste bow and says, ”Welcome to our dimension. We are excited
about your choice to come to be with us and learn from us. We understand that you have
an interest in learning about healing and we have things we can teach you that will help
your world at this time, for it is in great distress as are your the physical bodies. It is pos-
sible to reduce the stresses on both and that is what our work is to be. It is their (‘earth
plane peoples’) job to reduce the stressors externally, but we can do a great deal to reduce
the stressors internally, which can reinforce the immune system. This is so that many of
the diseases that presently exist in your world will have no impact.” I listen intently and
respond with thanks. I say to him that this is something I have longed for as long
as I can remember. I want to learn how to heal in any ways possible and even
those that seem currently impossible.

He indicates for me to follow him. “This visit will not be long, for it is changing the
vibration of your body. It is changed by looking into the crystal portal, and it is changed
by walking through. It has been changed as you have walked along the path, and it has
changed again as you walked through the force field. You felt these incremental changes,
did you not?” I respond that I did notice these changes as they happened.
The being continued.“Our work together will be in short increments of time so you can
record what you perceive and receive.” He motions to those beings who brought us here,
“These beings are the greeters. They greet those who come in from other dimensions and
support them to acclimate to this one. Today will be about your own acclimation.”

He leads me to a pool that has aquamarine liquid in it. The being asks me to walk
into the pool, clothes and all. A Ya Ho Ah stands just above waiting for me and I
walk in. It feels very refreshing. The feeling is not so much a purification, but it is
that somehow the liquid in this pool is resonating within my own body in a way
that is very difficult to explain, but I just feel the truth of it. They are nodding and
are very pleased that I can perceive these things. I move along and at some point
I feel I need to put my whole head in. I squat down a bit and allow the liquid to
come up to my neck. I put my head back and dip my hair allowing my head to
feel the pool’s vibration. The liquid in the pool is more like a gel. It reminds me of
the blue gel used for aching muscles.

As the process continues, I begin to become aware that my physical body back in
the middle world is feeling cold. At the same time, as I move around the pool I
notice that the temperature of this liquid is neutral, neither hot nor cold. This
process feels as if it is revitalizing my whole being. I feel complete and begin to
move back out of the pool. The being tells, me, “You don't have to hurry. This is to
be your experience for this time, to feel what happens in your body as you move or even
stand still in this liquid.” I return to the process and focus on what is happening to
my body.

I am aware of a sensation that feels like all the cells in my body are jumping up
and down with delight. They seem to recognize this sensation. The beings
indicate that I am correct in my observation. It feels like I am re-connecting with
an energy source from which I came. I recognize that in this process, it is possible
to return periodically to this original vibration for rejuvenation. This can help to
sustain my physical body until I eventually return in a permanent way. This
rejuvenation process will help to ease the stressors in my physical body. It is very
peaceful and I feel as if I take a deep, sighing breath in both realities.

I begin to wonder if this bath can rejuvenate specific injuries as I feel my wrists
have received some damage during my recent physical activities. I ask this aloud
as I immerse them in this liquid. Immediately, I feel rejuvenating energy entering
into my fingers of both hands and then into my wrists. My left wrist seems to
hurt more with the liquid, so I am told to rest my left arm on my knee in middle
world body so there is no pressure. I agree and I'm holding my hands in front of
me on my knees. As the liquid moves down my fingers into my wrist the discom-
fort disappears. It is as if the cells are soaking in the vibration of the liquid. The
being nods that I am perceiving correctly.
Now, I feel the vibration of this liquid flowing up my arms through elbows,
shoulders and then simultaneously down the front and my back of my body. It is
as if I am being filled with the liquid. I am not actually being filled with the
liquid, but its vibration moves completely through me. At this point, I'm aware of
my left wrist hurting again. They immediately create a band of this liquid and
place it around my wrist. It reminds me of the baby teething rings filled with
liquid that can be frozen to soothe the baby’s gums! The discomfort completely
disappears from both of my wrists and they feel fine.

The beings finally ask me to come out of this liquid. I step out and notice that I'm
totally dry. ”It is best for the body to have small increments of this vibration until it has
built a tolerance. It will adapt in a very short time.” With this phase complete, we
walk away from the pool area back to where we entered this place.

I’m aware that I want to ask a question to these beings. I have noticed that
because the music in my room is turned up too loud I have been aware of it even
while having this experience in the pool. I want to know if that means that I'm
not actually in this dimension by the pool of liquid, or does it mean that I really
can be in both dimensions simultaneously?

The beings respond, “Of course you can simultaneously be in both dimensions at the
same time, dear one, even as you are when you are experiencing your more traditional
journeying. Your body is totally capable of being in both places at one time, one sitting
there with your music, and one being here with us with this difference vibration. Your
body is capable of shifting and accommodating. It will register something that is
discordant with you and not beneficial. Your body will tell you that even as it called your
attention to your music being too loud for your comfort even though that music helped
you not to be intruded upon by the sounds of your world.” I also want to ask the
beings when will be the right time to teach someone to come here. I am thinking
specifically of my partner whom I trust to follow instructions.

They respond to my thoughts, “You can teach her this right now, for she will do this
very easily. Anyone who is willing and brings their teacher with them, for their teacher
will only allow them to come where it is beneficial for them. Through this same portal,
there are many directions you can go in, there are many who will greet you, and there are
many ways you can be escorted into other dimensions from this same place. There are
many other vibrations that can greet you and transport you into totally different places. It
is a partnership between the intention set, your teacher, in this case Quan Yin, by your
own agreement to come, and by those of us eager and willing to interact with you.” I take
in what he has said.

He continues, “You must present through your book that these other dimensions, far from
being threatening or a source of fear, simply exist simultaneously with your dimension.
We each have our own purposes, our own focuses, our own responsibilities for the whole
of All That Is even as do you. There are times when we are very aware of your dimensions
and at other times we are exclusively focused upon our own. Much like you have done this
day, we can enter your world but only with your permission. We are aware that it is time
for us to share our gifts with each other.” That comment stimulates me to ask what I
can offer this dimension in exchange for this powerful experience. It feels impor-
tant to reciprocate for their welcome and the healing that I received here.

The being responds, “For us, dear one, to have someone like yourself who does not come
in fear but in anticipation searching for your cosmic community is a gift. For one day, it
will be a cosmic community. It will not simply be your own drumming circles, or your
own apprentices, or those places you travel that you teach. You will share far beyond what
you can imagine when you are ready and when it is time. Your world is beginning to be
in a receptive place for this information and you are one who will offer it to your planet,
do you understand? It is good for us to know that we are being received in other places. It
is good for us share the wisdom that is ours to contribute to the Whole. Do you under-
stand?” the being asks.

”Yes, I do,” I respond. “Even as I have a great longing to share who I am for the
well-being of the Whole, so do you also, and even as do you, so also do I.” The being
continues, “This is correct. Instead of thinking the phrase, as above so below, it is more
as beside so beside!” He is chuckling at this humor. It seems as if this dimension is
around our planet dimensionally. Parallel is not the right word. “Look at it this
way, your physical body has many layers. They are your physical layer, your etheric, your
emotional, your mental, your spiritual and your cosmic levels. At the cosmic level of your
being is your personal portal to these other dimensions. You have always had this cosmic
level. It is around you, not simply vertically as is often depicted in your chakra diagrams.
It is all around you. The cosmic level of your body has always been in tune with other
dimensions. It is simply that the task of your times on the planet was to develop your
physical bodies and to experience things in your physical bodies. You already know this.
It is now time to add your cosmic connections so that the full possibility of your human
bodies can be experienced. It cannot be experienced in its fullness without contact with
other dimensions in a relational way. Do you understand?” I nod in agreement.

The being begins to speak again, “And now, dear one, it is time to return so that you
can write this on your machines.” I begin to feel myself moving backwards. I do a
namaste bow. We all walk down the path. At a certain point the "greeters" stop
and I bow to thank them. Quan Yin tells me to open my eyes very slowly and
focus on the crystal matrix. I can still see the circle, the portal with my body back
in the healing room. As I open my eyes, I am aware that the rock will never look
the same to me again! I thank the crystal portal, the crystal master for introducing
us and Quan Yin who bows and disappears.
 20. Another Experience With The Crystal Portal

As my work progressed, I had another visit with my spirit teachers to gain more
insight about the crystal-laden rock I had used as a portal.

As I began my journey, I called forth a bubble of protection to come into this

room so that only beneficial energies could enter into the space. At that point I
entered the shamanic state of consciousness and called to my spirit teachers to
continue my lessons in shifting dimensions. With all of my teachers with me, I
asked permission from the crystal rock to again use it as a portal. Then declared,
“I am open to whatever you wish to teach me today and I thank you again for being here
with me.” I feel myself shift deeper into the altered state and feel Quan Yin step
forward. I ask her, “Are you my Teacher for this work today?”

"Yes, dear one,” she replied. “We, your teachers, are here and you are protected. We ask
you again, to keep your eyes at soft eyes, focusing on the crystal rock. Take some deep
breaths. Adjust your body to be comfortable as you sit facing the stone. Keep your eyes
level with the stone. Be mindful of your breathing. I am with you on your left side and all
who you have called are here with you, too. When you are ready, I'll take your hand and
we will walk through the portal.”

While I kept my nearly-closed eyes focused on the rock, the surface began to
shift. The solid surface began to soften and each facet of its crystalline surface
gained depth. On its surface a feature that resembled a pyramid became clearer.
Just above the point in that pyramid was a place that looked like a cave that felt
easy to slip into but I understood that it wasn’t where I was to go. I kept
breathing and watching with a grateful heart knowing I would be guided. My
intention for the experience was to move through the portal to whatever
dimension would be appropriate. Speaking out loud to Quan Yin I said, “I'll go
wherever is best for my training.”

As I kept focusing, it became harder and harder to keep a single focus with my
eyes. The part of the rock I identified as a pyramid swam around the moving
surface of the stone. At times the rock seemed to wink in and out of a gray mist
and I felt that I could see something beyond or through the stone. My eyes
strained to keep focused. I felt as though I was being asked to change my own
shape or vibration. It was as if I needed to recalibrate my energy to be able to
move into the portal. I knew that all of matter is mostly empty space and so felt
that there was “room enough” to pass right through what my mind knew as
solid. As I thought this, I felt both a sense of anticipation and a little queasy in my
stomach. This grew in intensity as I waited for Quan Yin to say it was time to
move through the portal. At that point, the white triangle was barely visible and
everything became a soft gray.

In the midst of the grayness, I saw the circle I saw during my last experience. It
made itself clearer with a band of light around it. The circle expanded slowly and
as it did, the rest of the rock receded. The circle of Light became the center of my
vision and on it was a face! As I shifted deeper into the vibration that will allow
me to use this portal my eyes could no longer remain open. Quan Yin took my
hand and we stepped through the portal.

Even as we were stepping through I also knew and felt a part of me was still sit-
ting in front of the rock. As I again focused on Quan Yin, she took my hand and
we walked forward. Initially the space I entered into seemed to be filled with a
dark grayish fog or mist. Trusting my connection to my teacher, I continued to
walk through the grayness. Even though there were no reference points visible, I
felt as though we were in a transition zone between dimensions. It wasn’t very
long before I began to see light. Eventually, Quan Yin and I moved into a place
that was well lit. The light seemed to simply exist without any source. The space
was open like being outdoors and we walked straight forward down an incline
that felt very much like a road.

Moving along the road we approached a city-like place with buildings that were
very low with flat roofs. As Quan Yin and I went down another hill I became
aware that some of the buildings were built into the ground. It doesn't seem as if
they are tall enough for a person to walk inside. There is a building to the right
that we are drawn toward. Quan Yin stopped for a moment and encouraged me
observe everything around me. We continued walking forward. I felt the queasi-
ness in my stomach became stronger. Quan Yin reassured me by saying, “This
sensation is due to the shift in your vibration. It will pass. Just continue to breathe.” On
her suggestion, I allowed my physical body that was still back in my house to set-
tle back on my haunches. I took deeper slower breaths and soon the unpleasant
sensations began to wane although I still felt a little disoriented.

We walked up another slope and became aware that things in this place seemed
to be short. While there are trees here they were small like garden ornamental va-
rieties. In front of me I saw a pond with a smooth surface that had a walkway
around it. Quan Yin asked me to sit in that place for a while so that I could get ac-
climated to the new vibration. I wanted to ask where we were, but decided to
wait a while and ask about it later. She anticipated my curiosity and spoke, “You
are in a dimension that is very close to the dimension of your earth. It is close and in-
volves only a shift of your vibration to move into this space. There are many dimensions
around and a simple shift of vibration can allow you to perceive them.”

“Why isn’t this a part of our everyday life?” I asked her.

“When you are children you move in and out of these dimensions quite easily. You do this
in your play before you are totally aware of what is reality and what isn't. As a child you
are able to perceive anything as real. Once you start believing what is real is only what
you touch and feel, your mind no longer incorporates these other dimensions into real-
ity.” She replied.

As she spoke, I became aware of the sidewalk plow going by the house and felt
the sensation of my cold feet that had me wishing I had put my socks on! These
“disruptions” were minor and hardly interfered with my awareness of being on
the bench with Quan Yin My stomach was settling down a little though not
totally and at this point I heard a voice from another direction. The voice said,
“We are waiting. Your body is nearly acclimated. There is a different atmosphere here.
And yet it is not harmful to your physical container as we would not take you to a place
that would be harmful. We are simply showing you today how easy it is to shift from one
dimension to another with no great fuss. It simply requires appropriate support and a
shift in your vibration.”

A tall being entered the scene from the right dressed in a white garment. The
being seemed to have a veil over its face so I could not determine who it was.
Again, Quan Yin read my thoughts and replied that when this being chose to
reveal itself, it would. She also let me know that it is easier for the human mind to
see only shapes that it can identify when first shifting into another dimension.
The noise outside my house became distracting and so, even as I listened to Quan
Yin, I was able to turn the music up a bit. As I did this, I got a muscle cramp and
before I was able to change my position to relieve it, Quan Yin touched my side
and the discomfort quickly subsided. The being stood in front of me, with its
hands palms up facing straight toward me as if in greeting. I responded by
putting my hands onto the palms of the beings hands. As I did this, I immediately
became aware of energy being transferred into my hands.

I say to Quan Yin that I'm confused because I was simultaneously feeling here in
this place while I also felt my physical body back in our healing room. “Of course,
dear one, you are able to be in more than one place at a time! You may remember that in
your shamanic training you had the experience of bi-locating. In that exercise you were in
two different places as people were even able to see you in the room and outside at the
same time. It is totally possible for a part of you to be sitting in your healing room and a
part of you standing here with this being.”

As if to prove her point, I pulled my shawl around my chilled body even as I

listened to her continue to speak to me. “In shifting dimensions dear one, most
individuals will feel chilled. As you share this work with others you will teach them to be
well clothed.” I can feel a smile in her words as she responded to me drawing my
shawl around me. She then continued her lesson as the being withdrew its hands
from mine. “You perceive a veil over this being’s face so that you will focus on its
essence. This one of your skills. Please describe to me the essence of the being in front of
you.”

I responded to her aloud, “The strongest feeling I get that is it is more feminine en-
ergy, although it shifts, so it is probably pretty balanced in masculine/feminine but in a
more feminine container. I perceive compassion and some amusement as well. I perceive a
sense of welcome and anticipation that this being is equally as interested in meeting with
me.”

Quan Yin stood up. The being indicated that were to move in front of it and Quan
Yin seemed to know where she was going. As we proceeded, I was on Quan Yin’s
left and the being was behind us. As we walked I became aware that the being
placed a bubble around us. Quan Yin said, “This will help your body to adjust a little
more easily since you are still a bit queasy.” As the bubble enfolded us, I felt my
stomach settle down. “It helps for the body to have some assistance,” she stated with
compassion.

While in the bubble, we moved around the pond that was so calm it looked
like ice. As we walked along, I had the feeling that the pond could instantly
disappear. It was as though the pond was only present to provide me with
something familiar. This familiarity helped me make the transition to this
dimension. I was aware that in my energy body there was a lot of activity in
back of my crown chakra. It was as if there was movement within and around
the top of my head. As this continued, it felt quite challenging to talk. While I
felt these sensations in my energy, we continued along into the city while we
walking inside the now transparent bubble. As we moved in I became aware
that these dwellings were more like adobe houses with flat roofs. Some buildings
had two stories, some only one. All of us in the bubble continued forward in the
center of the road. No one else appeared as we moved along.

Eventually, we came to a rectangle-shaped building with an arched doorway.

This is the building that we entered. The entrance appeared like an oak door but
as we came to it we simply moved through it with the same ease we moved
through the mist. It was effortless!

Inside, the space seemed much larger space than it appeared on the outside.
The space was two storied tall and had a fountain in the middle of it. The entire
space was filled with the soothing sound of water. The being asked me to reach
my hand out and touch the water. I did and noticed that it felt very silky. Quan
Yin dipped both of her hands in the water and took a drink. She indicated for me
to do the same. The water is unusual. While it is not quite like the texture of
mercury, it holds itself together. As I drink it down, it moves down my throat
and my body in an almost solid stream. It is very calming as if it was laced with a
calming herb such as valerian! The being said, “there is no substance in it other than
what is natural to this place, dear one. It is a place of refreshment and many will come
here at different times to receive the nutrients that are contained in this fountain. This
substance is restorative. It does not have the contaminants your earth plane water con-
tains.”

I still didn't see the facial features of this being, although I perceived them just
under the surface of the veil. Leaving the fountain, we moved to the right of the
space, walking along on what looked like cobblestones, but didn’t feel solid.
The “stones” had a little bit of springiness to them as if they moved with our
body as opposed to resisting our steps. I got the feeling that everything in the
dimension was made of an energy but not what we think of as solid, fixed or
permanent. I found myself reflecting that If we were not enculturated to perceive
energy of earth-plane objects, places, life forms as solid, we could perceive them
as fluid as these cobblestones. As I had this idea, Quan Yin smiled and nodded in
appreciation of my observation.

Around the space, I saw things flying as if they were larger royal blue birds but I
couldn’t initially discern their shapes. I also saw flashes of other colors. The being
told me that these flying colors only take form when they choose and they can
take a new form and shape each time.

I was buzzing with questions. “It feels as if this experience of going the rock portal is
about learning more about energy.” I ask, “Is this correct?”

“This is correct,” the being continued, “Your energy container can be in many places at
the same time though the matter of your body tends to be in one place. The spirit part of
you can take many shapes and forms and be in many places at the same time just like
those flying colors. You already understand this concept through what you have called
your cycles of reincarnation however as you also know time is concurrent and fluid as
well. All of your lifetimes are all happening simultaneously, but what you are experienc-
ing more completely is that you can also simultaneously experience your conscious mind
and your spirit being in many different dimensions at the same time,” the being re-
sponded to me.

I was still experiencing some discomfort in my belly as we began to move around

the room. Quan Yin guided me to a doorway. At the time, I was aware that the be-
ings in this dimension were giving me time assimilate all the perceptions I was
experiencing. I asked her if the crystal rock would be a way for me to learn how
to go through portals and to trust that my physical container would be safe while
being guided by her or another of her trusted companions.

“Yes, dear one. There are some dimensions, even in your earth plane, that your whole
physical form will go through as well. We prefer to teach you by you having this kind of
experience. We want you to recognize that you can be in more than one place at a time,
that you can be safe in your physical world body while the spirit part of you safely walks
with us.”

I began to become aware of a sensation of heat in my body. I heard, “That is your

body becoming fully acclimated to this dimension. When this happens the period in which
you felt cold is completed.”

We moved toward the door again. I wondered if this door was only energy since
everything here seems to be experienced in that form. As if in response, we
moved right through the door and into a place that felt like a domed glass tropi-
cal display in a Victorian botanical garden. There was green foliage spilling
everywhere. I asked if I could touch the plants and the being told me, “Of course.”
My fingers moved through the vines as they, too were energy that took the shape
of vines. I experienced everything in this place as forms of energy. It was strange
to put my fingers on a green leaf much like an ivy in my home and find them
pass right through without changing the leaf’s shape. It didn't seem to harm the
vine in any way and it was fun to watch. The being said to me, “No, of course you
are not harming it because your own energy is in harmony. If you were out of harmony
and you were to touch the leaf you would see it react. The leaf would retract itself very
quickly from you. It is important for you to acknowledge that you are in harmony with
yourself and therefore this plant form has nothing other than a positive response to your
energy.”

“So if I were to become fearful, which I'm not, then it would retract for it would not
appreciate that vibration. Is that correct?”

“Yes, that is correct.”

I looked down toward the ground. The stones in this place looked somewhat like
our earthly flagstones, but again like the cobblestones these appeared spongy.
Along the path there appeared to be low beds of flowers, fruits, and vegetables.
Like it was with the vines, when I touched them my hand passed through them
confirming that they were an energy form and not a solid. I said to the being, “In
the dimension where I am from we have objects and life forms like these but we perceive
them as solid.” He said, ”Not quite. Only the density your earth plane atmosphere and
environment creates the perception that they are solid. So when you touch it, it may feel
solid to you however, its true essence is just the same kind of energy as you have inter-
acted with here. Do you understand?”

“Yes.” I replied. “So what you are saying is that the vibrational density of any
dimension is what makes the difference about whether objects and beings appear solid
or simply as energy?”
“This is correct, dear one.”

“ If this is true then if my body was less dense, I could take my physical body through the
crystal rock portal. Is this correct?"

The being once again responded, “That is correct, dear one.”

“Since the earth dimension is denser, how can I learn to enter into other dimensions in
my physical form?” I asked.

The response was very clear. “It is unnecessary to do it in your physical form.
Your physical form is quite safe where it is and the part of you that is here can take in
everything that you need simultaneously transfer it to your physical body even while it
remains in the denser energy. It would be far more challenging for your physical body to
reach a vibration where it could come through the rock in the physical form.”

“Yes, but is it possible?” I asked.“That is what I want to know.”

“It is possible with the training that we are giving you now, so be patient and simply
receive what we are offering to you. Do you understand?”

“I will and there is always a part of me that wants to know the practical application of
these explorations. How is this beneficial for my physical world that needs so much help
right now?”

“It is beneficial, dear one in that you are recalling in your mind and in the cells of your
body information that you already know. You are remembering that you can be in many
dimensions simultaneously with no harm to your physical container. Each time you make
a shift, your body will need to acclimate to the shift in vibration. During longer periods in
another dimension, you will need more time to acclimate to the dimension and also time
to acclimate again to your home dimension upon your return. Your spirit can be any-
where, but your physical container sitting back on your cushion needs to be revitalized by
your spirit. It is better to do this incrementally until your body is strong enough to have
your spirit gone for longer periods of time. Do you understand?”

“Yes, I do.”

“As to the practical applications. You are drawn to different dimensions and are learning
things in them. You are also being guided very carefully to the information that is useful
for your earth plane. There are many more dimensions that would not be useful to your
system at this time. What we are teaching you is useful and totally appropriate to your
earth plane. Indeed, if people perceived all of your plants as energy that if they touched
were responding as an energy form, they would be far more careful with everything that
they touch. You know there are books written about this.”

As the being speaks to me, I am remembering the book about the secret life of
plants, which shared how plants respond to human touch, human vibration.

The being continued, “And if you were to perceive each other as energy forms that were
not solid, but forms that could change into other shapes when useful and beneficial, you
would realize how much more flexible you are in your physical container and in your
physical dimension. With this knowledge, you would care for your bodies far more
diligently than you do now. You would be sure that anything that you placed in your
body would contribute to your being able to beneficially shift your vibration. This is the
point of what we are teaching you today, that your body is flexible and can shift without
creating any damage to your physical nature. Do you understand?”

“Yes, I do.” Now I'm experiencing being cold again. They are asking me for a
moment, to stop and experience my body as light, both the body that is here with
them in this dimension and the aspect of me that is still sitting back in the
healing room. I'm visualizing my body as completely filled with light. The being
continues advising me. “Now add the component that the light is like that of the
sun and that it is warm. Your body can recall having experienced this and so can bring
that feeling back now. It can feel light and warmed by your sun.”

So, even as I remain in this new dimension, I ask my body to remember by saying
aloud, “I call forth the memory in my own body the warmth of the sun that lives inside of
my cells.” This is similar to the process I do everyday in my daily prayers, activating my
light body--my radiance—and recharging by remembering my experiences not only with
the sun, but with the radiance I have shared when merging with the beings of Light in my
earlier journeys.”

While still aware of being in the domed place, I see myself begin to glow as if I
am all light. As my body fills, I feel myself in my light-filled body. I ask for the
memory cells in my body to awaken remembering the warmth of the sun. I ask
for this to warm my physical body. At first, I feel a tingling sensation come over
me. I can definitely feel an energy shift. I experience that my fingertips feel
warmer. I feel the warmth spread into my arms, elbows, around my shoulders
and neck. The warmth begins as an energy shift in my light body self in that di-
mension but, I'm not yet feeling it in my physical body back in my room.

I stay with the process while Quan Yin stays with me on my right and the being is
on my left. I ask the being if am doing this correctly.

“Yes,” the being responds.

As I stay with the process, I begin to feel the warmth in my physical body and I'm
not as cold! I feel an overall sense of my vibration shifting inside my physical
body in this earth dimension. I feel what I can only describe as a kind of cellular
or molecular reorganizing has occurred. It's as if things are redistributing them-
selves inside my body. The queasy feeling in my stomach is gone. I perceive that
my entire body is light. What I'm feeling is a sense of expanding. It feels like the
meditation my partner’s Spirit Teacher, Grandma, gave us to share with others. As
I experience that expansion, a deep sense of peace fills me. I'm no longer as cold.

“That is good. You can practice this later.”

When I have to turn my drumming tape over, I am surprised as I know that it is a

ninety-minute tape and I felt I had only been here for ten minutes! I realize that
time is a very different experience in the being’s dimension. We are walking back
now. The being and Quan Yin let me know it is important to transcribe these dif-
ferent shifts as they occur.

“What we wish you to understand is that all things are energy, which you know in your
mind. But you must experience repeatedly in your physical self so that every time you
touch something you are aware that you are touching energy. When you are touching a
person you are touching energy. You have already had the experience of placing your
hands on someone's head and feeling that your hands have gone through their head.
You have done this to be able to ‘touch’ an inner place that needed to be touched. You
must trust this even more in the healing work that you do. Whether you are physically
touching a person or not, the energy of your system and that of the spirit teachers
working through you, reach into the person even when you are not touching them. That
is what helps them.”

“Doing your Shamanic Inner Body HealingTM as you call it, is not a light thing that you
do, for the energy from your own body is shifting them, supporting their energy system
to access the information appropriate for them at this time. And when you teach this to
others you must teach this principle as well. If it is needed, we can also do healing with
our energies moving through yours as you do with the teachers that you already know
and trust. My job is to teach more about what you already do to support you to
understand more fully the importance of the work that you are doing. You will be even
more intentional than you are now. This is possible for you to do at the same moment
that you are listening, for it is not a function of anything other than being aware that this
is happening and participating fully in this knowledge.”

“As you are working, you will see the person's body as energy. As you move your hand
over that person's body you will begin to perceive even more how the energy moving
through you is penetrating into their own body. We use that word 'penetrating' because
it moves through the surface of their skin, moves through the layers of their energy
system. And there are different layers of their energy system that need more support than
others. We can guide your energy and the energy moving through you to whatever level
is required. Sometimes it is the etheric level, sometimes it is the denser, physical level, and
sometimes it is the actual organs of the body. We will guide you. So we will ask you to
perceive intentionally each person's body as energy. Be aware of how your energy
interfaces with theirs. Do you understand?”

“Yes, I do.”

“Merge with Quan Yin as you already do and she will guide this process. Ask afterwards
in a journey for details of what has occurred in that session and we can teach you in this
way also. Now we will take you back, for you have been in this place long enough.”

We move back toward the energy door into the large space room. It feels as if
there are rich wall tapestries hanging on the walls. As I move closer to the portal,
I realize that I am having another cold spell. The being perceives this and tells
me: “You are cold again because your spirit body needs to be back in your physical
container now.”

We are moving back out of the building, back down to the road, to the pond
where there is still a bench. I bow respectfully and thank the being for being a
teacher for me. Quan Yin says she will walk back with me to the rock matrix. We
walk out together. I feel myself settling back into my chair. I ask Quan Yin if there
is any recalibration necessary to help me be fully present back on earth. “No, dear
one, we have been working on that before you came back through the matrix of the rock
crystal. You are fully ready to be back into your world and to put this onto your computer
so you can make both hard copies when you can and add this to the book you are writing.
It is important that you write this book. As you transcribe this, anything we need to add
or clarify, we will do so.”

I thank Quan Yin at this time for her guidance with me and thank all my other
teachers as well as I become fully present in my room.
 21. Crystal Rock Journey: Evelyn’s Request For Healing

Evelyn is my partner in life. She is a very skilled and practical woman, a

creative workshop and shamanic training facilitator, professionally trained artist,
prolific writer and supports me in all aspects of my life. She has given me
supportive advice about sentence structure that is easier to read, as well as
technical training in the complexities of the computer. She faithfully supported
my presentations on our multidimensional selves at Ursa and in Canada. She has
offered technical expertise at all levels. We work together as a healing team both
at the integrated medical center we helped create as well and as co-partners in
Spirit Passages through which we offer a wide variety of shamanic programs.

At this point in my process with multidimensional healing I asked her if she

would be willing to be my first “client” to participate in an interdimensional
healing experience using the crystal rock as the portal. This would add useful
information about what needs to be included for people for whom this method of
healing might be appropriate. She agreed and the following is the transcript of
her experience. She is seated comfortably beside the crystal rock with soft music
for relaxing and focusing.

Evelyn: “It is my intention to ask Grandma (her Primary Spirit Teacher) and Quan Yin
to assist me in going through the portal of the crystal rock to ask for help in the healing of
the cyst in my chin.”

Allie: “Can you describe what you are experiencing?”

E: “Nothing is happening. All I am seeing is a smearing image. I can't see anything

spiritually, with my eyes open.”

A: “As you focus on the crystal rock are their any features that stand out to you, that you
feel drawn to?”

E: “I just see all the light specks on the rock as brighter than the background.”

A: “Do see or perceive Grandma or Quan Yin the room with you?”

E: “Not well with my eyes open, no. Whenever I do the soft-eyed thing it gives me a
headache. My eyes are trying to see through the smear!"

A: “Then close your eyes and get the image of the rock in your mind's eye.”

A: “So once you get the image, ask Quan Yin to take you through the portal of the rock to
wherever she wishes to take you to ask for healing of the cyst in your chin.”

E: “Quan Yin is on this side and Grandma on this side. So Grandma, Quan Yin I'm here
to ask you to take me into the portal for the healing of the cysts in my body, especially the
cyst in my chin.’ I don't see this rock anymore. I'm somewhere else. It's gray rock face
that doesn't look anything like this stone.”

A: “Ask them to take you or guide you to wherever the beings are that can help with the
healing of the cyst in your chin and anywhere else in your body.”

E: “Please take me to the beings in another dimension that can assist with the healing of
the cysts in my chin and anywhere else in my body. I'm ready and willing to enter into
another dimension. I'd like to. I just can't see with my eyes open. I hope this doesn't keep
my body from going through.”

A: “It doesn't when you do the Twelve-Pointed Star interdimensional process, so it won't
with this one.”

E: “My body doesn't physically go through in that process.”

A: “Ask Grandma and Quan Yin what works for your particular body to go into another
dimension."

E : “I can easily go into the portal in my spirit form.”

A: “That's all it is at this point.”

E: “But maybe if you don't see it you can't go in with your body.”

A: “Ask Grandma if it's true. This is your process and it is also teaching me how to help
other people to go through.”

E: “Grandma, I'm worried that if I can't see the portal I won't be able to go through when
it's time for Allie and I to go through together. I just can't see it with my eyes open.”

E: “She said, ‘Then you'll be taken through with your eyes closed!”

“Listen, Grandma, If we ALL can't go it's not a good process. I need the other teachers to
know that, too. If we can't all make the vibratory shift it's not good enough. We all have
to be able to do it no matter who we are or what level of conscious understanding we hold.
We all have to be able to go through and you have to raise the vibration high enough so
that everyone gets to go through. No one gets to be left behind this time. It's really impor-
tant to me that this isn't a process that some experts can do and others can't. That's
what's left people behind before. Everybody is supposed to be able to go this time. That's
why we're here!”
“It's only when the vibration is raised enough for them to go through that they recognize
what they need. People can't easily do it when they're here. Some can but most can't. So
the vibration change has to be enough for everybody to be able to go through, so they can
hear and see and know it. Otherwise it's the same crap we've been doing for thousands of
years, and that's not good enough! If only some Lama in Tibet can go in it's not good
enough.”

“So the gray wall opens up like in the Indiana Jones thing when the rock slides away or
like Christ's tomb. They both welcome me in. They each have an arm. It is my intention to
move into this dimension to ask the beings here to heal the proclivity of my body to create
cysts, especially the cyst in my chin. I'm in a dark rock cave, coming up to a place that
looks like the Star Gate thing. It covers the whole of the cave like a deep membrane, like
I'm going to enter into some physical state that is different from the physical state in this
cave.”

“May I enter this gate for the purpose of healing my physical body of the proclivity of cre-
ating unbeneficial deposits that could cause clogged arteries, arthritis and most especially
the cyst in my chin? I'm doing like Star Gate where they touch their palms and then I go
through and it's cool in there, kinda like I went into a gel, but of course I can breathe.
There is the sensation of gel on my skin but there is nothing around my face that feels un-
comfortable. More like something cooling. Like when you put Benadryl on your skin, it
feels cool. Sort of have a coating of it all over me but it's not visible. There's a sense of
being embraced everywhere by it. It doesn't interfere with my senses.”

“I'm moving through a space now that is clear and watery looking. There is a sense of a
being but it doesn't really have a form, more like a lighter version of the material I went
through. I initiate the conversation. ‘I’m here from my own dimension of the earth to ask
for a healing for my physical body that you see in whatever form you see it in. It has a
tendency to create unbeneficial deposits. I'm especially struggling right now with a cyst
in my chin. If you could heal the body's tendency to make unbeneficial deposits that
would be most appreciated. I’d just like to have unbeneficial residue move through me and
out and not get stuck anywhere.’”

“So I'm now turned horizontal, not laying on anything, but comfortably lying on
something that isn't there. This sort of vertical, glowing glob-like being is coming over to
me. Starting at my head moving through my body, somehow as if running a comb
through hair, I'm getting the sensation of being washed, straightened out like hair being
combed. I've had this kind of sensation before, in the Twelve-Pointed Star process I think.
Now he's doing it again. It's kind of like a scanner light going across, only inside as well.
I'm asking the being to do the same thing through my DNA -- to go through and find
things that are broken or incorrect and correct them for the benefit of the health of my
physical body. There is a sense of the being having a tolerant smile, which lets me know
that they are doing that already!”
“Now I'm turned back to vertical. I feel kinda like when you use both hands to scan the
body in a healing ceremony. It’s what it feels like, although it’s putting hands where there
are none. That’s the closest sensation I can explain. He is checking me out, going around
the other side. He’s doing some kind of tinkering at the base of my skull in the back, kinda
like an extraction. I felt pressure on my back as if someone was touching me, like they had
their hand in the center of my upper back behind my heart. Now moving through out the
front. It felt like my heart tugged a little bit like it was stuck a little bit and then went back
where it belonged. Now I’m feeling the same sensation in all of my chakras, like they are
using some kind of cosmic pipe cleaner, moving from one side to the other, from my back
to my front. My sacral area feels a little cloggy. I don’t hear it but I sense that some kind
of tone is being used or some vibration that I’m calling a tone. The one from the base of
my spine is going down to the floor. I don’t know if it’s supposed to go that way or not.
The one from the top of my head is going out the top of my head. The one from the souls of
my feet are going down. My palms are going into my body. My arms are down at my
side. I’ve got something straightened out in all directions, basically. I’ve got stuff sticking
out my side, top to bottom, from front to back. I think this is the way I am supposed to
come out. So I thank the Being. I pass through the membrane again and the tubes of light
things that are my chakras become invisible again. Quan Yin and Grandma are there to
greet me. I’m getting the sense that practicing this is how they will learn how high the
vibration needs to be so that all humans can have this experience. That is why I am
supposed to do this with you, Allie.”

A: “Makes total sense.”

E: “Based upon their life experiences, there are people who vibrate at many different
vibrations. The only way the beings who want to assist us will know what will work for
everybody is to work with many different people and with those of us that have had many
different incarnations. Those of us who have had many lifetimes here, carry the memory of
those other vibrational signatures. It does have to work for everybody to be truly valuable.
Thank you, Quan Yin. Thank you, Grandma as always. OK, I’m back!”
 22. New Healing Method

Portals can also be created through the use of sound. Twenty years ago, my
partner and I were introduced to a set of Peruvian Whistling Vessels. They were
replicas of clay instruments used a millennium ago by the Chimu culture in
Peru. We have had the great honor and privilege of being caretakers of these
transformative tools
for many years. Not
simply musical in-
struments, they are
actually powerful
shamanic imple-
ments that can be
used to assist
individuals to move
beyond this reality.
When played in a
group, the unique
vibrations produced
encourage an
expanded state of
consciousness. The
sound of one vessel
is quite shrill,
however when played together with others they produce complex harmonics and
vibrations. These sounds can open a portal for healing energies in and around the
players. The sounds are also healing for the Earth. In my experience, these
unusual instruments can also open portals to other dimensions.

We currently caretake a set of eight. There are four made of light-colored clay and
four made of red clay. While the images on them make them appear as though
there are four pairs, each one of the vessels emanates a slightly different tone. The
“collision” of the sound waves from these different tones produce a series of
secondary vibrations that sound like rain, wind, chattering animals, chanting
voices and jungle sounds.

To play them we first create a ceremonial space. After some explantation, we

begin the ceremony with the gathered participants energetically clearing
themselves. We place lightly perfumed water in their palms (checking first to see
if the participants include scent sensitive people!) The participants clap their
hands together, inhale the scent and then stroke the scent down their bodies to
the Earth. This acts as a sanctification of their body and as a preparation to hold
the vessels. The helping spirits are then welcomed through intention, rattles and
perfumed water. During this honoring ceremony, the vessels are awakened and
readied to play.
In physical appearance these instruments are seven inches tall, about five inches
wide and about eight inched deep. They have two globular shapes at the base,
which are connected with a curved bridge. The rear shape is decorated with
geometric shapes and culminates at the top with a tubular mouthpiece while the
front part of the vessel has a figure molded into its surface.

To play the vessels, the individuals who are gathered bring a vessel to their
hearts to connect with it before they apply their breath to create sounds. The
sounds, coupled with the spirit beings that enliven the vessels work to heal and
expand the consciousness of the people in the ceremony. During the years that
we have created space for this transformative experience the spirit beings who
accompany these pottery creations have been described in many different ways
by dixerunt people. What is common to all the description is the loving and
powerful way these spirits work.

Don Wright, whose company is named Entheosound, works from a “master

batch of clay” to create each set. He has graciously offered us a list of some of
the materials that have been blended into the clay.

Waters from:
The Atlantic Ocean
The Pacific Ocean
The Ganges, Mississippi, and Nile Rivers
The Great Lakes
A spring on Mount Shasta
The Waters, Lourdes, France
The Chalice Well in England
The Sacred Pools in Maui
The Ollaytaytambo Valley’s Sacred Inka Well
The aqueducts of Tambo Machay/Cuzco, Peru

Feathers:
Golden Eagle
Red Tail Hawk
Falcon
Blue Heron
Great Horned Owl
Raven

Animals:
Gray Wolf and Timber Wolf fur
White -Tail deer bone
Turtle shell
 White Buffalo hair
Sacred Earth:
Pipestone dust from sacred quarry site
Sand from a Wheel of Life Mandala
Elements from Tibetan prayer flags
Earth blessed in which a tree was planted at the United Nations
Earth from a 7000 year-old ceremonial cave
Earth from El Santuario Church at Chimayo, New Mexico
Earth from a sacred location in Jerusalem
Ashes from sacred fires of many Indigenous People
Sand from the Great Pyramid and Sphynx
Earth from Chichen Itza, Huehue Community, Tepoztian and Palenque
Earth from Machu Picchu and Island of the Sun (Titicaca)
Bolivian earth from Tichuanaco
Crushed Anasazi pottery shards
Earth from Chaco Canyon, Easter Island and Eliqui Valley in Chile

Energies from:
A crystal from John of God in Brazil
Tibetan singing crystals
Crystals:
spectrolite, malachite, lazurite, lepedolite, ceptarian, amethyst,
dunga from Himalayas, clear quartz singing crystals, sodalight, hematite,
bloodstone, turquoise, azuite, fluorite, rutilated quartz, ruby, peridot,
tiger eye, moldavite, obsidian.
Several different species of Shells and Coral
Sacred Blue Corn
White Pine, Cedar, Sage, Red willow, Tobacco and Copal
Frankincense, Myrrh, Gold.

To this master clay, Evelyn and I added energies for the set we care take.
These include:
Water from the North Atlantic Ocean
Polar Bear Hair
Crushed Bone from a bear skull
Black Bear hair and claw
Crushed stone from Europe that was once part of Doggerland
Crushed stone from Churchill, Manitoba in Canada
Volcanic ash from Iceland
...and other ingredients of a personal nature

Over the years through our organization, Spirit Passages, we have offered
many opportunities for others to participate in the presence of what I call the
Vessel Beings. These are the benevolent spirits that come through when the vessels
are ceremoniously played. After one such Peruvian Whistling Vessel ceremony, I
chose a time to do my own shamanic journey. I set the intention to meet with the
new teacher introduced to me through the Whistling Vessels to ask what she
would like to teach me. The following is an account of my journey experience.

“I seem to be immediately inside the pyramid that I have been escorted to before where
there is the familiar fountain. There are hooded beings in this place with their hands con-
cealed by their sleeves. The fountain has stopped flowing upon my arrival and one of the
beings assists me to step onto the platform of the fountain that descends. The feeling of
this space is as if I were inside a gigantic geode. Sparkling crystals are everywhere.”

I state my intention, “I am here to meet the Teacher who has begun teaching me new
healing work. I would very much like to meet with you to continue your Teaching me new
healing methods.” She comes forth into the space and does a namaste bow. She has
a veil like a bride that she lifts off her face when she comes forward. I see an
image of a beautiful younger woman but the minute I say that she changes into a
very old wise woman. She is a shape shifter. She says, “Because you know energy
you can feel if it is me or not no matter how I define my body.” She immediately turns
into a kind of rainbow drop crystal as tall as she is, then quickly shifts back to let
me know she is a shape shifter. I tell her, “I am here to continue the training you
began with me. I apologize that I have not been here for a while. I am here to learn what
you feel I am ready in my process to learn.”

She gives a scrutinizing look to see how open I am. I feel like I am ready to learn
whatever she is ready to teach me. “Indeed, you are dear one.” I can feel strange
energy in my heart. It's more like a vibration than anything uncomfortable. She
nods indicating that is correct, and says to me that the vibration will quicken
without me worrying about having any more discomfort in my heart. She says
this area of my body needs to expand without worrying about the discomfort I
sometimes feel from my mitral valve prolapse kicking in.

“You no longer have to worry about that issue dear one. Simply inform dentists, medical
personnel that this is no longer an issue for you. I sense your confusion as I communicate
this to you.”

“I do feel a conflict, since my present dentist would only treat me if I have taken antibi-
otics prior to the appointment. So I reply. ‘Only about how I will communicate that infor-
mation to the dentist.”

“You simply say that in the process of strengthening your body, you have journeyed into
your body and have discovered that the particular condition no longer exists within you.44
And that is all you need to say. If it is not enough for them, offer to sign a paper stating
your taking responsibility for this matter. It would not be useful at this time to be filled
with all those antibiotics.” (The first time I spoke of this to my dentist, he firmly
stated that if he was going to work with me I would have to take the antibiotics!
Subsequently, the medical field has confirmed that the protocol is no longer
necessary and he agrees. I love that I received this information outside of ordi-
nary time and was subsequently confirmed by ordinary reality!)

So now she takes my hand and we start walking down a corridor. At a one o'clock
direction we enter a smaller, lighter dome-shaped room. I ask again if she is my
teacher and she responds, “Yes. I am glad that you are here. There is much for you to
learn in a very short time.”

“What is it you would like to teach me today? I ask her. It is the first day of our new year.
I know it is an important time to be alive and I want to know everything I am supposed to
know.”

The first thing she does is put one hand on my heart chakra and one on my back
behind my heart chakra. I am aware of having a hot flash and of warm tingling
feelings. My hands are also tingling. I have a sensation of my heart all puffed up
outside my body. She says, “It is. Hold it in your hands.” I'm holding the
traditional version of a heart in my hands, not the actual shape of my physical
heart. She says, “that is because it is what you are used to. Put your hands on it.” I can
feel the strong beat. As I hold it, it starts to change colors. It is very dark red,
almost purple, then very blue, then yellow/golden. Then it swishes back inside
my chest. She says, “anytime you wish or need to heal any organ of your body, you
simply ask for the spirit form of it to come into your hands and you see it. Let us say you
want your liver to heal. You simply ask for the spirit form of your liver to come into your
hands, between your hands. You simply ask for the healing that is appropriate for that
organ at moment of time. When the healing is complete, it will return back into the
corresponding healing of that organ in the physical container of that body. Do you
understand?”

“Yes, I do. It is wild!”

“Healing can be as simple as that, dear one. So if you have someone who is requiring
healing, you check first with me and your own primary teacher and you will know if this
is the appropriate kind of healing to do, do you understand?”

“Yes, I do. We have a friend, J. M. who has been diagnosed at least tentatively with
tuberculosis, so if this diagnosis were correct, how would I heal that kind of disease?”

“That is a disease that is systemic, dear one,’ she responds, ‘and the best kind of healing
for that would be the vibratory healing. Let us call her spirit here now.”
“Can I do that without her permission?”
“She has given her permission when she asked you for help. So we call her spirit and I can
see her whole body there, suspended in the air. I connect with my healing Teacher and the
Christ vibration. This new Teacher instructs me to do what I always do, to run my hands
over her body to see where the distress is located. I feel as if there are a lot of bubbles in
different places in her body.”

The instructions continue: “Ok, then take out the spirit of each of the major organs in
her body, starting with her heart.”

“I ask permission from her body to release the spirit form/essence of her heart that easily
moves out of her body. It is the essence of the actual physical organ not the traditional one
we see in our culture. I ask for the appropriate vibration to heal this organ of J'.M.’s body.
I can feel the vibration between my hands as this occurs. It changes colors as it did with
my own healing. When it is ready it simply moves back in her body that then transfers the
essence healing into the physical body.”

My Teacher says to wash my hands in a swishing motion across each other, or to

use sage smudge or sage spray between each organ essence. The next organ that
appears to wish to be brought forth is her liver. I'm holding my hands out and
asking for the spirit essence of her liver to come forth into my hands. I ask for the
appropriate vibration to come forth for the healing of her liver. When that's
ready, it nestles itself into her body and the spirit essence communicates the exact
healing into her physical body. I wipe my hands. I feel her large intestines
essence is lifting itself out of my body. I hold my hands out so it positions itself as
if lying in my hands. I ask for the appropriate vibration for healing J.M.’s large
intestine. The spirit essence of her large intestines is very black like oil. The
vibration is changing the essence of it. When that is complete, and it isn't yet, the
spirit essence of her large intestine will return back into her body and transfer the
exact healing of the spirit essence to the physical container of her body. Now I see
it a golden color. I wash my hands again. (I can use a cloth soaked in sage oil to
do this, too.)

“You can do this also when you are facilitating your group healings. You can ask if any
organ of the person's body requires healing and you do this same healing. This is very
powerful for the person but would not disturb them in any way. You will be guided to the
exact organ in that person's body that requires this kind/quality of healing. It is a very
intense form of healing.”

I'm holding my hands out again and asking for the spirit essence of the small
intestines. It is lying across my hands. I ask for the appropriate vibration for the
healing of the spirit essence of the small intestines of J. M. When that is complete
that spirit essence moves back into her physical container and transfers that
healing into her physical body.
I'm asking if there are any other parts of her body that requires this form of
healing. I am told her spleen. I hold out my left hand out and the spirit essence of
her spleen seems to be resting in it. I ask for the spirit essence of her spleen to
receive healing through the appropriate vibration at this time. I see it also
changes colors until it becomes golden and returns to her body. Now I'm seeing a
part of J.M.’s brain light up on the left side slightly left of her crown chakra. I'm
told simply to hold my hand over that part of her head and to ask for the appro-
priate vibration to heal that part of her brain that is impacted by this present
disease. I'm holding my hand over this area until I see that it becomes the natural
color it is supposed to become. I wash my hands again.

I then I ask if any more parts of her body require this kind of vibrational healing.
At this time my teacher instructs me to do what I usually do in my healing work,
which is to move my hands over the body to smooth the energy system down.
I am instructed to ask for a vibration that will heal any of that form of disease in
her body as I slowly move my hands over her body. I start behind her right
shoulder and smooth the energy down her arm and through her fingertips and
over the right front quadrant of her body down to her feet. Then I move around
in back of her and include her head area again. I move to the left shoulder and
draw down from her shoulder, down her arm and through her fingertips. Then I
smooth the energy down her left from quadrant. I ask her to turn over and
smooth the energy down through her entire whole back asking for the vibration
to transmute any discordant vibrations in her body. As I do this, it becomes clear
how to say it, to transmute any discordant vibrations within her body that is the
basis of creating disease.

And when I feel that process is complete, her spirit stands up in front of me. I can
also still see her lying down. I am to ask for a spirit essence of her entire container
to stand in front of me. As I do that I can check to see of any areas show up as
dark areas, for basically this is her light body self, so any dark areas are easy to
see. I can see a shadowy spot on her left shoulder. I move both hands to that spot
and ask for the appropriate vibration to heal that spirit essence of that location in
her body. It heals very quickly. When I have checked out her whole body, I
simply ask for her spirit essence to return to her container. Then I wipe my hands
and again smooth her energy system down. I am to do this in all of my healing
work from this time forward. It feels really right for me, for I know that as I am
doing this I am removing intrusions from those locations where I am guided.

My new Teacher agrees, “Do that first as you always do. Then ask to check any organ
of the body that requires healing and ask to do this same process. It will take a little longer
to do that work and it is totally worth taking this extra time. As you move the energy and
smooth it down each time and wipe your hands your people will give you different feed-
back about what is like for them. Practice on someone who will give you this feedback
first.”

“I think I'm seeing S. on Monday night. I could practice with her.”

“This will be good for this will be a change of pace and that would be advisable.” This
response surprises me, for it communicates that this teacher is aware of her
healing process as it has been so far!

J.M. now stands in front of me, smiles and vanishes. I thank the teacher for giving
me this gift of a way of healing. It feels very precious and natural to me. I am
very glad to use this form of healing. “So you are saying to use this in all my healing
work form this time forward, both individual and group, is this correct?”

“Yes, this is correct. Sometimes a physical part of the body may not be the issue, however
you may also have appear before you an essence of a person. It you see a child part, you
ask the child part what healing it would like, and if it shrugs as if it does not know then
you say ‘would you receive the healing I offer to you?’ Usually they say 'yes'. If they have
a trust issue simply ask them if they would like a power animal of their own or someone
they trust to be with them, in order to accomplish this. You can ask them where they hurt,
and they will generally indicate their stomach. So you can very easily ask for the spirit
essence of their stomach to come into your hands for the appropriate vibrational healing,
and when you place it back into their body, the child will feel better. You do not tell the
child or anyone what you are doing. You can do it in your head or with your intentions.
They do not need to know what you do.”

I'm placing the spirit essence of this child's stomach back in her body and I see
her smile. "Of course you must ALWAYS be sure you put the spirit essence back into the
body container of the person you are working with.”

“Of course, I did know that! I'm glad to have this on tape in this manner to share with
Evelyn in detail”

“‘If there is one essence that does not wish to go back then you will ask why and do the
typical thing that you would do if you were doing a soul retrieval.’ This new teacher is
very thorough and I am grateful for this.”

I'm thanking her now. I'm making sure the child is back inside the person who is
here for this work who is now glowing more. I wonder if I will see this in the way
when I am working in person. My new instructor replies, “You will have
drumming and with your eyes closed you will see as you are now. You can simply offer to
people that a healing occurred in whatever part of their body you did this work and that
 23. Jaguar Initiation

In the process of editing and re-editing this book, I was surprised to discover that
I had experienced portals that I had not recognized as such at the time. My
personal experiences of them opened my way to new perceptions. I guess I
shouldn’t have really been so surprised since there have been countless other
unexpected wonders my spirit teachers have introduced to me throughout our
many years of relationship.

One of the most surprising spirit invitations for my partner, Evelyn and I came in
the middle of our FSS Three-Year Training Program with Michael Harner and
Sandra Ingerman. During this time Michael had relocated the Foundation to the
West Coast. While practicing some of our assignments at home, both Evelyn and
I were given instructions by our spirit teachers to develop our own Shamanic
Training Program to create a shamanic community on the East Coast. After
many, many journeys, meditations, and conversations we followed through with
this assignment. At our next meeting of the program, we shared specific details
of our intentions with Michael and Sandy with serious concern about their
reactions. Michael acknowledged our plans in a way that felt like a blessing (and
relief) to us. He advised us to watch our pacing around what our participants
were able to assimilate at any one time.

One of the primary agendas of the program is supporting each participant to

continue developing deeper and deeper connections with their own spirit
teachers, guides, power animals, the spirits of nature, and the elements. We
follow this guidance from our spirit teachers with impeccability. It is from these
ever strengthening relationships that students’ lives evolve. This spiritual
evolution supports their wellbeing and those whose lives they touch, including
this beautiful earth and cosmos beyond as everything and being is connected.
Fulfilling this commitment includes offering our apprentices opportunities to
integrate other shamanic and spiritual experiences that they carry into our own
Two-Year Program. This agenda also opened another door for me, helping to
expand my personal experience that portals are everywhere!

One of our apprentices had taken several trips to Peru and studied with Andean
shamans there. When we realized that he, too, had participated in an Ayni
Despacho ceremony, we invited him to lead this ceremony with the Two-Year
community in which he was enrolled. We understood that this opportunity
would give him another chance to explore how he could integrate this ritual into
his life and shamanic practice. My partner and I had been introduced to this
powerful ceremony years before when we had invited a young Peruvian shaman,
Fredy “Puma” Quispe Singona, to present a weekend workshop for our local
shamanic community. We were looking for Indigenous shamans with integrity
and Puma was well-known by one of our apprentices who travels regularly to the
Peruvian Andes.
In Peru, there are over two hundred types of despacho ceremonies. Puma had
introduced us to one called Ayni Despacho, which is a ceremony of gratitude or
“sacred reciprocity.” It was a
very moving experience, so
when our apprentice agreed
to facilitate a this kind of
despacho ceremony for his
peers and to reinforce his
own integration, we were
delighted. During this
ceremony, a beautiful
bundle is created on a base
of flowers that have been
arranged on a sheet of
paper. Over the flowers,
representations of all the
aspects of Life that we are
grateful for are carefully
arranged. (The complete list
of ingredients is far too long
to mention here, but may be found in my partner’s book, Spirit Walking: A Course
in Shamanic Power.)

As part of the ceremony, each person is given three leaves into which they imbue
their prayers. Called a k’intu, these are typically made of coca leaves but we use
bay leaves, since they are legal in the United States. The leaves are held close to
the mouth and fanned out as one might hold a hand of cards. Prayers are spoken
directly into the leaves so that the breath touches them. At a specific point in the
ceremony, these k’intus are offered to the shaman/facilitator who arranges them
on the despacho. Once all the prayers have been spoken and the despacho is
complete, it is folded into a bundle. At this point, the bundle is moved over the
body of each participant by the shaman after which it is released into a fire or
buried in the Earth.

What I did not fully understand at the time of that ceremony was that the very
action of creating the despacho also created a portal. It was a portal for our prayers
to enter the world of spirit and also a portal for beneficial spirits to come through
to us. These spirits, evoked in an atmosphere of gratitude, can support our
personal spiritual processes. As I handed my three-leaf k’intu filled with my
prayers to our apprentice facilitator, something totally unexpected happened to
me. A very large and very real spirit jaguar leaped out at me through the portal of
the despacho. When this happened, I suddenly and unexpectedly staggered
backwards barely keeping my balance. Others around me were aware of my
involuntary movement and once I recovered from my initial surprise, I shared
what I had experienced.

At the first opportunity, I entered into a shamanic journey to explore the

significance of this encounter with the jaguar. A few months later, again through
the portal of the whistling vessels, I met a spirit teacher called Jaguar Man. The
following journey describes one of my meetings with him that has powerful
applications for our world today.

The Journey:

My intention is to ask what my

teachers wish to teach me today.
The first one to appear is Jaguar
Man who I had met when I was
journeying about what my rela-
tionship was to be with the
jaguar. I ask Jaguar Man if he is
the one to teach me today. In
reply, he motions for me to fol-
low him. He seems to have ap-
peared in this middle world. We
move quickly into another di-
mension. Very quickly we go to
the fire where I first met him and
the jaguar.

He is sitting by the fire and he

asks me to sit across the fire from
him. I am reminded that in many
Central and South American
countries, fire is a kind of portal
used for divination. Jaguar Man
shakes his head, indicating that
this is not what this encounter is
about. The fire shoots way up on the air very quickly and shoots back down so
low that we can see across to one another. There doesn't appear to be any smoke
in this fire.

Allie: “Are you my Teacher for this journey?”

Jaguar Man: “Yes.”

A: “What would you like to teach me? I'm here and willing to learn.”
He looks at me sharply as if checking to see if this is so. I do have a bit of
trepidation because he is a new teacher for me and I don't have the familiar
connection with him as I do with my regular teachers. Sometimes when I'm given
a new teacher at a time when I feel I haven't yet completed a teaching from
another of my teachers, my mind feels some sense of disruption.

Jaguar Man just laughs and laughs and laughs. “That linear thinking is not impor-
tant in this world of Spirit, nor is it important in your world when you are learning new
things. Follow me.”

Someone appears by the fire to tend it while he is gone. I am moving around the
left of the fire, following him down a path into the jungle. It is like all the images I
have seen of the rain forest. All around us is dense, moist foliage. The path is
wide with the sense that it becomes narrower as we walk. Eventually, we come to
what looks like ruins. When I say that he looks around sharply at me. Again, the
illusion is that this is a ruins of some ancient place, but the sense of what he is
telling me is that the spirits here are not dependent upon a building in the way
we might think. He is holding his hand up for me to stop. He is doing some ges-
tures with his hands that I can't see, but I sense he is invoking spirits and asking
them for permission to enter into this place. Apparently it is not something I am
meant to learn, as he says, “You will never come here without me.” Actually, I'm kind
of glad about that!

Suddenly, this place shape shifts back to the way it was before it fell into ruins.
Its walls appear to be made from a kind of adobe or mud brick. We move through
an archway and I am drawn to a fountain in the middle of what appears to be a
courtyard. The fountain is flowing with clear water. There is a ring of stones
around it. I am at the left of Jaguar Man and we step up to the edge of the
fountain. Jaguar Man immediately changes shifts into a jaguar! He does this to
let me know that he can transform very quickly if there is a need for protection
and then shape shifts back into his human form. We are waiting and soon
enough, a circle of spirit people appear. It is very confusing, because some of
them are carrying spears and are dark skinned. They appear to be more African
than South American. Jaguar Man asks me to look around the circle, and I see that
they are wearing other forms of dress, their skins are different colors and that
there are both men and women in the group. They seem to be a blend of
spirits from different places and time periods.

The spirits all look like warriors. There is one that looks like a Masai man with a
big shield and a tall spear. There are some very short women, about four-foot-tall
who are substantially built. There are also some very tall slender women. One
looks like an African woman wearing bright colors and holding a spear wearing
bright colors. I'm trying to turn around to see who might be in back of me, but it
seems to be a semi circle and we become part of the circle. To my right is the
Jaguar Man. All the spirits are looking at me and I don't know why. Jaguar Man
indicates I am to go into the middle of the circle and bend my knees. I kneel
down and sit on my feet. A warrior directly in front of me steps forward and taps
his spear on my right shoulder, my left shoulder, back to my right shoulder and
finally on the top of my head before he steps back to the rim of the circle. I can
actually feel a transfer of power into my body as he does this. Everyone is very
serious at this point. On my right a woman steps forward. She has with her a
jaguar skin that she places around my shoulders. She drapes something else over
my head from my left ear across to my right ear, but then takes it with her as she
steps back. Again I'm feeling some kind of shifting of my energy system. I am
now hearing, “You are now initiated into the Jaguar People.”

I want to know what that means, but I'm not sure what the protocol is here so I
stay bowed. I lift my hands up to indicate I would like to understand what that
means. The circle comes closer and sits down. I'm told to sit cross-legged. The
different participants here start telling me what it means to be initiated into the
Jaguar People. They don't call it tribe or clan. It is just the Jaguar Man. They are all
pointing to the heart and saying the heart is important to be a Jaguar Person. I'm
trying to listen. They speak in different languages, but I am able to understand.
There is a lot of gesturing. They are telling different stories of how the jaguar has
helped to save them and be their protector. The jaguar was a protector of this
village for a very long time until the jaguars had to move deeper into the rain
forest. It was at that point that the destruction of this village occurred. It was
because the jaguar was no longer there to protect its people. The same thing is
happening all over the world where species of animals are becoming extinct. The
spirits indicate the animals have gone into the spirit world so they are not lost but
simply gone from this place. In some ways this is very sad and in other ways it is
clear that it is actually part of a larger plan.

I wondered why they chose me to be a part of the Jaguar People So I asked. “Why
did you choose me to be here with you?” They get very quiet for a while and then the
shortest woman in the circle comes up to sit in front of me. She has a beautiful
brown face, wrinkles around her eyes. It is very difficult to give any age to her. I
feel weepy when I meet her.

She tells me that O-Guntha is her name. She points to my heart and she says,
“Because your heart is a jaguar heart. In another lifetime you have been among these
people when the village was strong and you learned the sacred ways of the jaguar priests
and priestesses. We each had different roles at that time, but you knew both of them
because of your way of perceiving through the heart without having to hear words. So you
understand both the male and the female rituals of the Jaguar People. It is important for
you to remember them at this time on your planet in your white skin. Not necessarily all
the details. You already have the great reverence for the Earth. You love Her, her animals
and peoples of the earth. It is important to remember the rituals of the Jaguar People, for
they were simple and they were from the heart.”

“How will I remember these?” I ask her.

“We will come and teach you at different times. Jaguar Man or jaguar will bring you to
this place. In the light of the moon, we will teach you some of the rituals that the Jaguar
People lived and honored the Spirits by.”

“I am deeply honored that you welcome me here.”

“Oh, you will find it challenging at times, for the lessons are not easy.”

“Why did I feel weepy when you came and sat in front of me? It is as if I recognized you
in my spirit.”

“We were priestesses together.” She shows me very briefly a journey within a journey,
two of us walking down a path in the moonlight. We had jaguar fur around us. We were
chanting, calling the jaguars to us. We went to a clearing where I could see the jaguar
eyes in amongst the trees. There is a stone offering place. She quickly informed me
that,“We don't sacrifice people here.” We are carrying boards with fruit and
different important foods for the Jaguar People. We laid them on the oblong stone
altar, continuing to chant invoking the protection of the jaguar for our village.
I'm aware that on each side of us is a human jaguar man, naked from the waist up
with a jaguar pelt from his waist down to his feet, standing as guardian while we
do our praying. Again we see the eyes of the jaguars peering out from the trees as
we call them, but they don't come out. It is clear that they are there and we are
calling them. We leave the offerings and walk back down the paths. The offerings
are on boards that are shallow, hollowed out. I find myself thinking I don't know
anything about the Jaguar People. I'll have to begin looking through our reference
books.

O-Guntha, hearing my thoughts says to me, “That will be unnecessary. We can teach
you what is relevant for your times.”

I'm sitting again in the center of the circle. I'm still unclear about why I've been
called to meet the Jaguar People. “Is there anyone here who can step forward? This is a
whole new piece in my journeying and unexpected. I need to understand why it is
important that I meet with you and that I recall the rituals of the Jaguar People.”
O-Guntha is still there. So I address her. “Can you please tell me what it is important
for me to be called here and to remember the Jaguar People?” She looks at me with an
expression that is similar Evelyn’s Teacher, Grandma, has when she points out
that I already know an answer to a question. Even though her expression sug-
gests that I know why I have been brought here, I don't feel as though I know. It's
very real to me, but I feel puzzled.

All of a sudden we are back to ruins even though everyone is still sitting here.
O-Guntha says, “There is much in your world that is changing, disappearing and being
dissolved. Some of it will never return to your planet again. Some of it was a passing
phase, fantasy. But what must not leave your planet is people who trust in their heart.
You do work with people who are trying to learn and relearn how to live from their heart.
We will help you in this work and that is why we come to you. It can be discouraging to
work with people who have the potential of coming from the heart and who get lost in the
ways of your present lifestyle on your planet that is very distracting. We know this. We
could have avoided this ruins of our village and our culture if we had been stronger in the
heart, and spoken out more clearly, and made clearer stands against what we could see
was coming in the destruction of our village, our people and our ways. You have a voice,
a presence now to continue to invite people to listen to their hearts, to listen to their
teachers in the spirit world wherever they meet them, and to put their practices and
rituals and ways of being that are timeless into their everyday lives. That will save your
planet! As someone in your drumming circle said the other day, it is hard to integrate
spirit into everyday life. That is what people need. You offer your workshops, trainings,
ceremonies and different ways to support people to integrate spirit into everyday life.
This integration is what you must focus on, do you understand?”

“Yes, I definitely do understand. What can I do differently than what I am doing now to
help people to do this integration? I feel like every chance people give me I say something
about that.”

“You do. You are very faithful in sharing that. We are here to help you with this. You do
not need to know everything right now. If you have a question about how to help someone
do this come meet with us as well as your other teachers and we will have things we can
offer to you at that time that we have learned and we are willing to teach you.”

I thank her. “I am glad you are part of my life and are helping me to remember. It helps
me to understand why the earth is such an important part of my life.” She says, “It has
always been so.”

“Is there anything else you wish to teach me now?“

“No, but jaguar and Jaguar Man will bring you here again.” The people are leaving
the ruins. She asks me to rise. Again I am feeling very emotional about my
meeting with her. She looks deeply into my eyes. “I am part of you now and I will be
with you to help you.” I think I am supposed to shape shift with her much like l do
with Quan Yin with our foreheads touching and our palms toward hers. As we
touch hands we move through one another. Again I feel a huge energy surge. As
we step back, I ask if she has ways of healing I can learn from you?

“Of course“ she responds.

I tell her that my own personal passion in this lifetime is to find ways of healing
people who have different illnesses. She responds, “You have your other Teachers who
work through you with the healing. When it is appropriate I will work through you when
you work with people and I will help you in this manner. The system you have in your
present way of doing things works well for you so I will simply work through that means.
It is again my vibration coming through that is the healing. It is not so much the herbs
and the things we have here, for you are discovering and exploring those in your own
country. My vibration is what will assist.”

I thank her. Now she gets up and departs with the rest who are leaving. I become
aware of Jaguar Man. And he nods and I feel like he understands that I know that
it is an honor to be brought here. He repeats again, “You will only come here with
me.”

We walk back through the gateway to the fire. I still feel bewildered about why
he is in my life now. He shape shifts into jaguar. Jaguar comes around and starts
licking me all over. He is very powerful, and there is also a sense of familiarity
about him that it's not scary. He sits beside me very big like a cat sits slowly turn-
ing around and stays in his world as I come back into my own world.

I immediately continue this journey and state my intention that I would like to
meet with one of my primary teachers, the Christ Being, to ask for some clarity
about this experience. I can feel the realness in my body. The Christ Being stands
before me and I state my intention again. “I'm still interested in why this has been
given to me by spirit right now.”

“To keep you growing, expanding, and knowing that your connection with spirit is
limitless. Primarily it is to connect you with a part of yourself that is important in your
expanded consciousness work. There are parts of yourself that have been on the planet
before that can be summoned or awakened for your benefit now and for the writing of
your book. This is important. This is part of the possibilities of expanded consciousness to
meet parts of you that have existed in other dimensions of time. The gifts, abilities and
knowledge can be beneficial to your planet at this time. This particular part of you brings
a knowing which you knew then that the protecting spirits were leaving, that the forms of
protection left your village vulnerable. This information is similar to your times now
where many people are forgetting to stay connected with spirit, forgetting to thank spirit,
forgetting that spirit is not only outside but within. That is why that part of civilization
died off, could not sustain itself. It was not about giving power only to the jaguars, it was
about honoring in the rituals, ceremonies and in daily life that honored connections with
the jaguar spirits and all other forms of life. As that diminished, it created the possibility
for that civilization to be lost, as well. Do you understand? There is a direct correlation
between forgetting to honor spirit within and around and the loss of civilizations, peoples
and sustainable ways of being. To live in sacredness with the earth, with all that is on it
and with other dimensions is imperative for a thriving people, do your understand?”

“Yes, I certainly do understand. I now am clear that I understood that then, or learned
that then.”

“You understood that then. And you tried as well as many others to help people in that
time to remember their rituals, to honor the spirits within as well as the spirits around.
That is crucial to your lifetime now, whether in workshops, books, conversations,
ceremonies, and other creative ways. This must be communicated to your world again,
and again, and again as each person is willing to hear it, for it is as you have said many
times there is much to distract on your planet. There are many things that distract in day
to day living from honoring your connection to spirit, by whatever name is used, and
maintaining, nourishing that connection. This is what you must communicate again to
your people whoever will read your books and hear your words.”

“I understand more fully now and I thank you honoring that I can hear it best when I feel
it in my own body and giving me this opportunity for experiencing it first hand. Thank
you.”

He disappears and I am back in the room.

 24. Next Steps In Exploring Our Multidimensional Selves

As rich and exciting as my new relationships with multidimensional neighbors

has become, it is always my intention to keep checking the information I receive
with my own spirit teachers. Since I have been in relationship with them for
many years, I trust their input implicitly. In the Spirit world, all the teachers and
guides know that they are connected and can access one another. They have no
concept of separateness, unlike most of us in this third dimension. They know
that no one and no thing can exist outside of All That Is, or Source. Within that
framework, they can also have different areas of expertise and interest. In
checking out the information I’ve received from beings in other dimensions, I
have not found discrepancies, only confirmation of truths about the nature of
reality. In confirming what I receive and so deepening my trust, the interchanges
with beings in other dimensions continue to open up my life. What follows here
is a clarification meeting with one of my primary spirit teachers.

The Christ Being appears before me and beckons for me to follow him, which I do.
He leads me to a garden with a knee-high wall all around. We look out to a vista
of mountain ranges with mist hanging between the peaks. There is a curved
bench where we can sit facing each other. He agrees that he is my teacher for my
questions.

Allie: “First, I want to ask if there is anything I can do to help with the situation of the
Shuttle Columbia exploding upon reentry? I had such a strong reaction about seven
talented lives being taken out when we need all helping people on this planet at this time.
My first thought was that the tragedy does serve to deflect the momentum building up
around war on the planet. Not that this explosion was created for this purpose but is this
outcome a possibility?”

Christ Being: “We could say many things about this. Some that you could repeat to oth-
ers, some you could not repeat to others. Do you understand?”

A: “Yes.”

C: ”Firstly, the determination of your government to build up to a major war at this time
is unfortunate. There is much work being done on all levels on your plane and in other
dimensions to redirect this energy. As your prayers say, war is obsolete. There is no more
tolerance on the earth for things to be resolved in that way, for it is unnecessary. However
there are still those in that mindset that ‘might makes right’ I believe your expression
says.”

A: “Is there anything I can do to be helpful in this?”

C: ”We can tell you this, at night your spirit goes to be with the children. You are helping
them with their grief. There is a strong sense of family among all of those who have been
trained for this work. It is the children who are important for no matter what age they are
there are deep wounds in their psyche. This unexpected and swift shift from expecting to
be part of a large celebration to being part of a mourning cycle has been difficult. To assist
them, your spirit is going out to the children to teach them many things that your soul
knows. It is not necessary for you to know what it is that you teach them. You are simply
sharing what you know and you are facilitating in this manner. So be assured you are
helping.”

A: “Thank you.”

C: “You have been told before that your spirit travels at night to many places. You have
even seen some of the places you have visited in your spirit form. So you know this to be
so.”

A: “Yes, I do know. I have other clarifying questions. What is important to be

communicated at this time when there is both a constriction on this planet and the
possibility of moving forward further than ever before as a species? I want to be doing
everything that is mine to do to support us to reach this new way of being we have the
capacity to become. What is it that you want me to communicate about us humans as
multidimensional beings?”

The Christ Being and I move into an area where there are many beings in a circle.
As I enter the space, I introduce myself and address them. “One of the questions
raised by my partner and myself is, do the beings that we meet in different dimensions,
have the form as I /we perceive them or do they take a form in order for us to relate to
them?”

My teacher introduces me to one being gathered in this circle who appears to be

very old and very wise. “Ask this one your question.”

So I ask this wise being, “In the different dimensions do other beings without form only
take form when one of us comes to visit to support our third dimensional brain allow us to
connect? Or are they in different forms in different places?”

This being looks at me with a smiling visage. “You are asking many curious ques-
tions, young one. The answer is both. There are some dimensions where you and others
are guided to where their forms are very different from what you are used to.” At his
answer, I find myself thinking again of Norbu, mentioned earlier in this book.
He went through the portal of a rock to meet with the beings who gave him The
Song of the Vajra. Those beings who met him had some form of wings and could
fly up to the cave where others were waiting. They seemed to be confused or
disbelieving when Norbu told them that he had to climb the cliff!
The being continues, acknowledging my thoughts. “Then there are beings who
choose to be formless for they have no need to take form. They may choose to take form
when you meet with them in order for you to feast your eyes in a way your brain can
assimilate. And there are those who are formless orbs of energy that change and shift.
They are a particular vibration and can communicate but have no need to take form.
There are those of you who have no problem discerning that this energy is good or not
good for you. So there is no fear. When you trust you can experience a great many more
varieties of deviations from what your left brain can assimilate or categorize because you
are taking it in with your being. That is one of the gifts you have and that is why you are
intrigued. You would like to develop this gift, would you not?”

Allie: “Yes, I would. I also am very practical. I feel there is judgment placed upon me to
stay in this world so everything gets handled. Pay attention to this earth plane that is all
you need to attend to, I am often told. But I have long held the belief that understanding
how multidimensional we are enhances all life on this earth plane.”

Wise One: ”You are right, dear one. What is difficult is that there are still few of you who
have this capacity and too few who do not choose to develop this capacity. If those of
you have the capacity to trust in these other dimensions and in your ability of your en-
ergy systems to shift into the vibrations that support you to be healthy in these other
dimensions, then you would move your human race forward immeasurably. But as you
and others of like mind have found, that there are a great number of distractions on your
earth and also a great deal to do while you are in a physical body that requires your
efforts, including paying your bills.”

A: “This is so. Sometimes it is a source of frustration to have such a longing to have the
time and space to develop this work. Most of our time goes into earning the money to pay
our bills. We are actually asking for blessings around financial abundance to come to us to
free up our time so we can do the work we feel called to do. We are doing this on a daily
basis.”

WO: “This is wise that you do this. For with the permission given, there are many ways
that we can manifest with you. Not for you but with you.”

A: “I understand that difference. Please advise if there are pieces that are our responsibil-
ity, which we are not yet aware.”

WO: “We will do so.”

A: “People on television or in books describing “alien” visitors or other dimensional

beings, describe them having certain features and shapes. Do these beings physically have
the bodies as people have described back in their place of living or do they present
themselves this way to acclimate to our dense plane?”
WO: “Again, the answer is both, dear one. There are some who have no need to take form
and do require protection when they come into your dimension. They take on a form that
works for them. It has been well described in the books you read as a sort of skin, not like
clothing, but protective skin that allows them to be comfortable. This is much like (he
chuckles) the cumbersome space suits that you see with those who are moving out of their
space shuttles in space to support an atmosphere that their bodies are used to. It is simply
that the technology is different in different places.”

A: “My partner’s perspective is that the reason people describe these beings in similar
ways is that over time we have put together a composite consciousness and we tap into
that in order to describe these beings. I feel that from my own limited research that the
beings ---” I am interrupted at this point.

WO: “It is both, dear one. There are beings who take the form they know will be
recognized, for if they presented something too fearful there would be too much trauma
to the humans that could not be erased. It is also true that there are many beings when
they come to your planet that do look like how they are described by many humans for
that is how they are.”

A: “I now remember the another important question I wanted to ask in this journey. We
are working with a client who asked us questions about her experiences with owls. Before
she came to see us she had a dream of owls and has merged with owl in the shamanic
tradition of merging with a power animal. I have heard of the concept of screen memory
where an animal or bird, especially an owl, appears to a person to protect that person from
knowledge that has been given outside of time. For some reason it may not be the right
time for some individuals to be aware of that knowledge consciously. It may be that our
rational minds cannot comprehend this experience or it would be distressing to the
personality. I want to be clear about the distinction between that wisdom, which I’ve
read in many different venues, from our shamanic tradition where a person merges
intentionally with their power animal for protection from energies not beneficial to the
person. They also offer practical assistance in daily life in the shamanic tradition. Is there
a difference between these two?”

At this point, the small group of five beings move closer in a circle around me. I
find I am not comfortable with them so close, so I ask them to back up a little
way. I would like to turn and face each one of them. So they do. I am told they
came because they are curious about my question, not because they are trying to
alter my thought process in any way.

A: “Thank you for honoring my request.” I am asked to turn the opposite way from
the one with whom I was speaking. This being’s energy appears younger and fe-
male. She is one who does have skin that I can best describe as like the wet suit
that divers put on to prepare to go into the water. It is as if there is a bathing cap
around her head so there is no hair, but her face is quite lovely, translucence. I
feel a sense of warmth in my heart as she looks at me, accessing whether I am
coming from a place of integrity, and I am.

Female Being: “Your question, dear one, as all of yours are this day are quite complex,
and we will perhaps give information to you in pieces, not all at once. What has been
called ‘screen memory’ is to support many of you who must go to work each day. Some
would find it difficult and even distressing to be conscious of all that your soul is engaged
in from moment to moment. You (Allie) have been shown what your soul is doing at
nighttime when you are physically sleeping. It is not a very big stretch for you to
understand that even in the daytime your soul is engaged in multiple endeavors. What
you are exploring is whether it would be advisable to be more conscious of the adventures
(this being chuckles) that you are embarking upon as you live your ordinary life. Is this
correct?”

A: “Yes. I am not convinced it is necessary to experience all that our soul is living simul-
taneously, but I am convinced that if we were more aware that our soul was living in
other experiences that perhaps we would not be as struck in our pettiness, fear, vengeance,
hurting others that seem counterproductive for ourselves and definitely for our planet.”

FB: “You are correct dear one. This is a challenging subject, for as it has been spoken,
there are still few people on your planet that are willing to explore this possibility. It
would be very similar to flipping on your television screen and seeing different channels
at the same time to observe how you are doing here and how are you doing there. It would
be no more difficult than that.”

A: “This is quite an image. I guess what I need to understand -- I somehow feel weepy
about this and I don’t know why!”

FB: “We can explain, dear one. There is such a yearning within you for your human
people to live up to their capabilities. And you see over and over again that they settle for
far less. You know that in your own soul that each choice that anyone makes impacts the
Whole. This is not just an intellectual construct. It is what is so. The choices you make,
your partner makes, and all those that are an extension of your life, are choices that make
a difference in the outcome of this planet and therefore All That Is. This is no longer an
intellectual construct but something that you know at the core of your being. You
experience a great range of emotions any time that you tune into this. This range of
emotions is sometimes, with or without knowing how they were triggered. For instance,
when you watch Columbia disintegrate before being able to bring new scientific
information to your planet, you were aware that huge ramifications went out into all the
universes. You know this because you feel it. (I am sobbing) And you know that you
cannot understand in your present third dimensional brain to what degree this is
beneficial and to what degree this is destructive. What you do know, at a deeper level of
your being than ever before is that everything in all creation is impacted by this event,
even as it is impacted by the fact that you are asking us these questions. We are not totally
free here to understand all that those impacts are, for they are now being assessed in other
places even beyond your government and your people.”

A: “I understand that. Thank you for clarifying why I had such a strong reaction. I have
seen other disasters before and not had quite such a visceral reaction. I felt it wasn’t just
the grief for the families. I felt it like the spider web that impacted the whole net.”

FB: “Indeed, it did, dear one, as all that occurs impacts every part of your planet and
impacts all those in all other dimensions as well. Even those you see on television in tribes
that are isolated and have had very little contact with the larger world, even their choices
and their actions impact All That Is. This is a large wisdom to take into your being. You
were instructed in your last journey that each day your task is to relate to the energy that
is in everything in your life. Relate to everything with intentionality as you are doing
quite splendidly. That is one thing you can do in your present cycle of reincarnation.”

A: “I was aware on my walk yesterday, that everything was being perceived by me

differently. There was a deeper feeling of connectedness with the way the water runs
under the ice and with the ducks gathered at the small open water in the river where
our neighbor feeds them cracked corn. Everything felt different to me. This started
accelerating when I began to weep looking out upon the mountains when we first arrived
here and then again while walking on my friend’s land in New Mexico. There is
definitely some shift happening in my being.”

FB: “Dear one, what is happening within your being is that each day you have been
transfiguring into your Primary Teacher who is part of All That Is, so you therefore are
experiencing All That Is in a more magnified fashion. The magnitude of your ability is
growing to absorb this awareness, to absorb the different vibrations that you encounter.
You are expanding in your abilities and part of your longing is to assist others to expand
in their abilities. Is this not so?”

A: “Yes, that is what is so. I feel like we need to develop and live from the abilities we have
as humans. For everyone of us that chooses to do this more hope is generated.”

FB: “That is correct, dear one, but you must also remember, that you can only do your
part in this and you cannot carry it all, for that is too much!”

A: “I feel like I’m not carrying the weight of it all, and I feel like I’m past the point
where I worry if I’m doing my part. I keep giving permission and I think that is all that is
needed. I believe that my next step is to clarify all my thoughts about all these confusing
questions and experiences. Then, I can put in writing to support others who are
interested. Is this correct?”
FB: “This is correct, dear one. It is as simple as this. This is not an anthropology
document. This is your own personal story of grappling with how to our live from your
many selves that are part of your being in a way that holds integrity with your everyday
life.”

A: “Help me with how I can express this. I would like to write today and I would like to
state my intent of purpose clearly.”

FB: “Your intent, dear one, is to support yourself and others to explore the capabilities
that are inherent in your human nature. In the past, many of these abilities have not been
possible to access for ordinary people. Now is the time. There are others who have touched
into it and they are called your saints and they are called your heroes but now is the time
for more people to experience and live from these rich aspects of themselves. Let us say
that, human beings have been in training, through many cycles of reincarnation both here
and in other dimensions, for this time in the history of your world.”

A: “Finding the right language is going to be challenging. My understanding of cycles

of reincarnation in the past was linear or sequential and my understanding now is that
parts of our souls are living simultaneously in different situations, circumstances,
countries, or dimensions, and that we are in a period of time when we can access these
when useful and necessary.”

FB: “And that, perhaps, dear one, is the best way to describe your task. There are many
parts to it and you do not have to be linear. That is where your brain runs into trouble
and your dear partner can do this quite easily. So simply write what you are experiencing
and what we are sharing with you. She will help you put it into a form that will be
readable by others, for that is your intent, is it not?”

A: “Yes, it is. So if you call it a personal shamanic exploration of the diversity-- how
about -- EXPLORING OUR MULTIDIMENSIONAL SELVES, A SHAMANIC
PERSPECTIVE -- I like that!”

FB: “For this is what it is, an exploration and there are others who will resonate for they
have had pieces of this experience and will connect with some parts, and others will
connect with other parts. You are a bridge person. Your job is to present as much variety
as possible. We believe you can include with their permission other peoples’ stories, as
well. Perhaps they would prefer you not use their real names. Perhaps even your friend,
Suzanne would be willing to share her experiences, so it is not just your story, but you
are the one who puts the stories together. You can interview them and tape it. Others will
also come to you. Your perspective is a different perspective. You are approaching this
from a shamanic perspective and that is different from those who approach this from a
UFO perspective. This will also make it easier for your partner for she will be able to
support it and with other stories from those you interview this will be quite a well
received book. And because your other books will also be in print, there will be a following
and this will not be put into a dark archive, do you understand!”

A: “Yes, I do. Thank you. I feel like I have clarity for the first time. I want to ask again
specially about our recent client. In her session, our Shamanic Inner Body Work45 seemed
difficult and I did not want to feel we were introducing her to something her body was not
supposed to access. I trusted that her body would not take her to someplace unbeneficial,
but I don’t want someone to be in fear. I want to be clear that if we are working with
someone who has experienced unexplained events I don’t want to be in a position of
bringing more unnecessary discomfort in their lives.”

FB: “When you follow the work you do in the body, dear one, you will not be harming
anyone. If indeed there is a seal upon their memory and it is not beneficial for them to
break that seal, it will not be broken by their conscious mind. There is a great deal you can
do to help them to feel safe in their body. If their body is willing to speak with them, they
are building a new trust in their body. Even if it is saying don’t go here, yes, go there, this
is what is important.”

A: “I still feel confused. I need to be clear about this. What I don’t understand is if it is
beneficial to engage in the body work with someone like this?”

FB: “What we have said and will say again, is that even if there is a seal, it will not be
broken if it is unbeneficial to do so. Your healing process is also teaching your clients that
their body can be trusted. What you are experiencing is that you will not break a seal if it
has been made with the cooperation with her body. Other times it is beneficial to be broken
as in your work with C. B. She was able to understand that she was sent from a people in
another dimension to help them understand human beings. That freed her up to be able to
joyfully move ahead with her life, marry and have children as she wished to do. She was
free of feeling that some bad thing was happening to her. This is so for others who have
chosen to come to be in a human body and to share both limitations and gifts of the
human body with those places they have come from. Then those beings in those other
places have a better understanding of humans. This is a good thing! They can therefore be
more beneficial in helping your planet.”

“So you do not have to worry that you will do something that is upsetting or detrimental
for someone. You could tell that in the struggle with D.B., you were asking her to stay in
her body, to listen to her body and she was struggling with the desire to dissociate from
her body. That is why you were feeling so uncomfortable. She was somewhat angry to be
asked to stay in her body in order to report to you what she was experiencing. That was a
good thing. That creates discernment on her part about when she is in and when she is
not in her body. This is necessary part of her discipline to know at all times when she is
present and when she is not. There are many people you work with must know this same
discernment. As you say to them, when you are fully embodied you have more clues about
your physical safety, and about enjoying being a physical being!”

A: “Thank you.”

FB: “Now it is time for you to return and ‘switch your gears,’ as you say.”

The Christ Being draws a close to this session of questions. “This is good work that
you are doing. When you get discouraged, come to us and we will encourage you.”
 25. Meeting My Multidimensional Advisory Council

I am always amazed at how patient our spirit helpers are with us, whether it is
around our procrastination, reluctance, laziness, distraction, business, or other
ways of delaying what our soul agreed to engage in during this lifetime. In one of
my own “reluctant” phases while writing this book, I journeyed to the group
who offered to be advisors for the project. I realized that I had not accessed them
until when my resistance was “up” again. The Advisory Council had been very
clear that this was not to be a channeled book, but that they would be available
for consultation on multidimensional matters. My usual three greeters met me
and escorted me into the dimensional frequency that would support this meeting.
They guided me to a low, domed building. As I entered and walked down
several steps, I felt as if I were in a kiva.

All of the five council members I had originally met were seated there and
greeted me. I was honest and shared that I was stuck in where to go next with the
book project. Without laughing at me, but clearly with a sense of humor, they
advised me to start by writing about them! I realized that until now I had not
taken them up on their generous offer. They told me that the focus needs to be on
my training to take my physical body into other dimensions. Others have written
about out of body experiences, deep trance states, journeying and past life
experiences. My focus was to be on the process of taking my physical body into
other dimensions.

I said my concern about writing the details of the process was based on worry
that someone reading the book might follow some of the process when not fully
prepared and somehow be harmed. I recounted the incident that had occurred in
an advanced shamanic group. I had carefully prepared the participants in safe
steps to move into inter-dimensional travel journeys. Even with this preparation,
one group member had a hard time coming back through a portal. The
instructions were to explore the concept of portal without actually going
through one at that time. She had gone through a portal out of curiosity and not
been able to return without our help. One of the “advisors” in my newly formed
Advisory Council stated that this person did not want to be on this planet, so that
ambivalence activated her choice to move beyond the carefully explained direc-
tions. I agreed and rest my case that this presents a risk factor in becoming too
explicit about the actual process of inter-dimensional shifting.

The council was clear that I could not allow that type of experience to interfere
with supporting those for whom dimensional travel is an entirely appropriate
resource. It is simply time on the planet for this to be made more available. I will
share my process as a work in progress, knowing that many of you as readers
have gone way beyond my experiences.

One colleague I briefly mentioned this work to, whose profession is as an energy
healer and is excited about exploring potential for healing in an altered state,
looked quite horrified as I spoke of going physically into other dimensions. “Why
would you want to do that?” she asked. My reply was simple. “To learn how to take
people with me for healing that cannot seem to happen in this dimension,” I responded.
I also believe technology and expertise are available that can be translated for use
in our dimension to support us during this planetary transition. The key to me is
focusing on developing relationships with our neighbors in other dimensions so
that reciprocal partnerships and trust can be well established.

With this recommitment in mind, I journeyed to begin clarifying the actual

process of transporting my physical body into a selected dimension. Quan Yin
and the greeters brought me to a gathering of beings sitting around an oval table.
They all stood when we entered and after a warm greeting invited us to sit with
them. The spokesperson looked at me encouragingly and stated, “I understand
you are interested in pursuing your studies in inter-dimensional travel! We understand
your wish to be able to bring someone here physically and to return to your dimension
with whatever physical healing has been successfully negotiated. Is that correct?”

Allie: “Yes.”

The Council Member: “You have discovered this time when you came here that you
were more comfortable in making that initial transition. You already know that the
vibration of your planet is such that it does make it easier than it has been in the past.”

A: “Yes,” I responded. “What I don’t know is, if it is physically possible to come into
another dimension. I know shamans in the past and other spiritually trained persons have
been able to bi-locate between the earth plane and another dimension. I know that highly
evolved Tibetan lamas have been witnessed as becoming a rainbow energy body, moving
out of this dimension in that state. What I need confirmed is, is it physically possible to go
into another dimension by invitation for healing, information and return in a way that is
not harmful for the physically body?”

His response was not what I had expected.

CM: “Your history is full of those who have done this. For some, the experiences have
been like a UFO adventure. That is one way your culture can recognize such as shift.
Beings from other dimensions obviously do not live on your planet when they come in
different conveyances to lift someone up and return them. What is different is that you are
asking how to do this in a way that is in conscious partnership with those you come to
visit. Is that correct?”

A: “Yes, I am interested in developing a conscious partnership. I have learned so much

and changed so much from visiting in an expanded consciousness method. I am told by
my own spirit teachers that learning how to go into other dimensions with my physical
body is part of my soul purpose this lifetime, but I don’t know how to do it. Is there an
intentional method that allows this to be possible?” The gathered group all nodded
emphatically.

CM: “Of course it is possible. Most of what makes it possible you already know for you
have heard it from your own Spirit Teacher whom you call the Christ Being. You can
move your physical body through a wall. It is your own learned perceptions that hold you
back. You know the principles that you are mostly space and therefore you can rearrange
your space like you have seen on television’s Star Trek transporter (all laugh at this media
reference.) “It is simply rearranging of space between your cells that makes it possible to
shift your vibration into another dimension. You have done this already to come to visit
us here in your spirit body.”

A: “I understand from my previous training to come here in spirit, that I ask for a recali-
bration of my body’s molecular structure so that I can move more comfortably into a des-
ignated space or dimension. I also understand that readiness is an important factor and
setting a clear intention. What dimension is best for beginners?”

With this question, each one in the group looks at the other. One being, second to
my left, stands and says, “Come with me.” Quan Yin comes as well and we walk
down a set of steps into a smaller round dome space. In the center of this space is
a circle. I am told that it helps to visualize in my mind the destination I want to
reach to so I can be clear where I am coming to.

C.M.: “You state your intention to go to meet with --and my name is Glorianna.”

A: “So I would say ‘It is my intention to go to the dimension where Glorianna resides to
meet with her. I ask for the calibration that would be beneficial for my body to negotiate
that travel.’ So it can be that easy?”

G: “It can be that easy. You found it not difficult to come here this time, did you?”

A: "I was surprised. In times past it was more of a process of actually feeling bodily
changes, sometimes not always pleasant. I am now feeling more subtle changes.”

G: ”So when you come, you notice the changes just as when you eat different foods you
notice how they impact you. You will be noticing what you are feeling and report it to me
or whoever is standing in my place. There are often different beings here, but if you state
your intention that you are coming to meet Glorianna, then when I am not here, whoever
is will say they are standing in for me. And they will use my name. We do not see that
you have fear it is just that you need to know the process even as you have asked. Is this
not so?”
A: “Yes, this is so. I just need to know how to do it.”

G: ”So this is your process to practice. You ask Quan Yin to accompany you or whomever
she asks to go in her place. Generally it will be Quan Yin. Ask the greeters to meet you to
take you to be with Glorianna since I have volunteered to begin this training program
with you. They will do this. You may not initially even know if you are here physically or
in your spirit self. You may or may not feel that much change, or perhaps you might.
You will visualize this place and more importantly, visualize meeting Glorianna in her
dimension.”

A: "I don’t have a clear visual of you. I just get a knowing of you. It would help me if I
could get a clearer image of you as well as feeling of your presence.”

Glorianna responds to my request by presenting herself more clearly as I had

hoped. She has a headpiece with lots deep turquoise cloth that comes down
around her shoulder and long sleeves flowing down her arms. The long gown
goes down to her ankles in fluid motion. The feeling is like water!

G: ”This is good! It is useful to have a specific request in mind when you come.”

A: “What I would have in mind is how can I safely bring someone with me who has an
illness or trauma to heal?”

G: ”You already know that there are some whose souls have called them to complete their
life cycle sooner than they would have preferred in their personality.”

A: ”Yes, I do know that and I know that I must have permission from any person
requiring a healing. I can accept that. I can also accept that some people do not choose to
follow their healing journey. I am interested to add this to the resources for the people we
work with for whom it would be timely, appropriate, and are willing.”

G: ”The next step is to practice and to note what you experience. It might take a few times
of doing this process before you can totally make this transition, But you are ready!”
 26. The Practice

My first experience of following through with the guidance from Glorianna

was to note how grounded I am in this reality! I knew that I had followed the
instructions carefully. My partner, Evelyn, was drumming to help me focus.
What I actually noticed was that I could feel my legs as solidly placed in the earth
as when I hold space in our shamanic workshops or healing sessions. Some part
of me was not invested in going anywhere outside my dimension with my
physical body. So back to the journey again!

After sharing my frustrations, or whining to be more truthful, with Glorianna and

Quan Yin listening without judgment or comment, I finally noticed three beings
standing there. Glorianna said that perhaps the next step would be to participate
in more interactions with other dimensional beings than I had experienced to
date. We followed the three to an area with a low flat oval table set into the space
much like the Japanese dining table image. The tabletop was dark black and
shiny and I had the impression it could be used as a viewing screen.

The beings seemed to already know that I am interested in learning how to

bring people into other dimensions for healing and/or information when it is
appropriate. I felt a welcoming energy by these beings. With all this support
around me, I had to admit that the suggestion made sense to me to invite more
inter-dimensional exploration prior to physically manifesting in another
dimension.

I do feel prepared to meet others who do not resemble my human species, but
some part of me must still require more information and or reassurance! I recall
again, the story of Rinpoche Norbu, one of Tsultrim Allione’s Buddhist teachers.
When he was invited to the cave where he was given the Song of the Vajra, the
beings who invited him had some physical makeup that they could fly up the
mountain to the location of the cave. He had to remind them that he had to climb
up the side of the mountain. To be able to accept their invitation, the beings
needed to honor Norbu’s human abilities and limitations. Since he could not fly,
he needed to climb the rock face into the cave—even though he had entered the
dimension through a portal the beings manifested.

Because the foundation of inter-dimensional exploring is through relationship, it

stands to reason that it requires all parties to be clear, at any given moment, what
will work for them or not.

It also occurred to me that since I have not ever experienced being “abducted” as
thousands of other people have reported, I have a different perspective. Sharing
my reflections and my relationship with those beings who are committed to sup-
porting the transition of our planet can support others. If what cosmologists say
is true, we exist in parallel universes or some suggest parallel membranes that
may interact with other membranes of existence. Through our interconnections,
what we do within and to our planet including our solar system, does impact
the others. From my journey experiences, it is clear that the beings in other
dimensions have wisdom, technology, and willingness to be in relationship with
us in constructive ways, primarily because they do understand the fundamental
interconnectedness of all existence.

This is clearly expressed in the work of Lisette Larkins who followed through
with the invitation to be in relationship with beings other than from this earth.
Listening to them one day she heard, “The free flowing of ideas from us to you is the
first step in utilizing all that we know, and is how your species can benefit from our rela-
tionship and the furthering of our intern relationship; because we don’t have any precon-
ceived ideas as to the nature of how you might best utilize the information we provide. We
come to you with an open hearts, not with a vested interest in how you must benefit from
knowing us. Recognize that it is important to not be insistent that you respond in any
particular way, and this alone keeps our relationship clean.”46

An unexpected step in my practice was an invitation to connect with my

descendants to discover what their perceptions and experiences are with other
dimensions and their inhabitants. Quan Yin and She Ma take me into the future.
A group of my descendants are sitting at a round table in the sun outside a shop
that sells refreshments. They seem eager to share with me their experiences on
this subject. A tall, dark-haired woman named Jolie welcomed me to their table.
“We are glad you have come to speak with us,” she said warmly. “Perhaps we can be of
support to you on your journey to expand your present ideas of your potential as a
human as well as who you relate to in other places of existence.” I am excited and I
respond, “I hope so. It feels as if I am out of place with this interest in my time zone.
What do you think is important for me to communicate to those in my era about other
dimensional beings?”

Jolie continues engaging with me. “You cannot exist without awareness of and rela-
tionship with the others not living on your planet. You have seen in your recorded history
that civilizations have risen and fallen, reaching great heights of achievement on all
levels,yet are destroyed by the very reality of limiting their perceptions of who humans
truly are capable of becoming. Fear begins the restriction process and the outcome is
predictable. You have the opportunity in your lifetime to refute fear, to replace it with
curiosity and technology to move far beyond previously set limitations. If you had not
done so we would not be here having this conversation!”

They ordered me a delicious fruit drink that seemed to renew my energy and
clear my mind to continue posing the next question. “More people in my time do
believe there is intelligent life somewhere outside of our planet and many have had
personal experiences. My desire is to be able to take someone who needs healing with me
into another dimension in our physical bodies for appropriate healing and return safely.
Can you instruct me how to do this?” I ask.

Jolie laughs in a joyous way and the others join in. “You are the one who taught us,”
she replies, still laughing. “Because of the ‘training’ of you and others like you we have
developed satisfying and beneficial relationships with many dimensional beings who con-
tinue to impact who we all are becoming. We are all part of a grand Whole that is still
expanding!”

“Let’s take a walk and I will show you something.” Jolie extends her hand as she gets
up, clearly not expecting me to resist, so I don’t! We walk down a stone path
lined with beautiful flowers, arriving at a domed building much like the one I go
to visit with Glorianna. “The acoustics in this building facilitate easy shifting of our
frequencies to converse with whomever we have selected for the occasion,” she reports.
She escorts me to a small glass cylinder that looks much like some of the steam
bath glass containers found in spas during my time period. She instructs me to
enter one and begin to breath into a meditative state. Very quickly I begin to see
images of someone who does not look like ‘one of us’. Jolie says, “Her name is
Olivia and she and I are good friends. Our frequencies are tuned to each other so we can
communicate wherever each of us resides. I bring you here to show you how I learned to
connect with her. We have taught each other many useful methods of relaxing and
shifting our emotional states. You already have many methods and we have perfected
some and developed more in our time. I cannot imagine my life without her consult and
she has indicated the same for me. What a gift. It keeps my relationships with my dear
ones more coherent and joyful.”

A: “Have you gone to her ‘home’ to visit her?” I ask.

Jolie: “Yes, much like you travel for a vacation to a place that holds interest for you,” she
replied. “Our lives are busy here, so it really is like your vacation time, a real treat to visit
when the occasion is timely.”

A: “What did you have to do to prepare to visit Olivia?” I ask.

J: “We are trained as children to shift our frequencies to be in harmony first with
whomever we choose among ourselves. As we mature, we are introduced to our many
‘neighbors’ in other dimensions when it is appropriate and beneficial for all parties. It is
the same skill, with different frequencies. We have people here whose job it is to support us
to select what contacts would be beneficial at any one point in our lives. My mother is one
of those who has this calling and gift. Perhaps you would like me to arrange a meeting
with her?” Jolie asks with a mysterious twinkle in her eyes.

A: “I would like that very much,” I responded, trying unsuccessfully to contain my

excitement.

J: “So it shall be done.” Jolie said firmly. Yet as exciting as this invitation was, it
would be some time before this meeting would take place.

I found it challenging to maintain a focus on multidimensional experiences due

to the requirements of everyday life. However, my spirit teachers have their ways
of calling me back to my task. At the Crossings, a lovely retreat center in Austin,
Texas, my partner and I were asked to give the keynote address and breakout
session for a wellness conference. In sharing our experiences as shamanic
practitioners in an integrated medical center, we spoke of facilitating soul
retrievals among our healing practices. We also mentioned a special category of
soul retrieval that we are finding more and more common. We spoke of people
who come to us who we have termed the phrase “from away”. They have never
felt that they belonged to their family of origin or this planet earth. Some suffer
severe loneliness that eventually creates physical, mental, emotional and or spiri-
tual disease. Some have adapted to be successful, yet with an underlying sadness,
distress that can be easily uncovered when the opportunity presents itself. Some
people express this as believing that they have been born in the wrong century.
Some remain “lost” to themselves and to those who have come to love them.
Whatever their story, when we start speaking about our experience of those
“from away” and offer some concrete examples of people we know personally,
they begin to share, perhaps for the first time in their life, their own experiences.

I was then, not surprised when an attractive woman came up following the
workshop and thanked me for speaking of this subject. As she spoke, tears ran
down her cheeks. She is a successful business woman who described with pas-
sion her feelings of not belonging in a human body and on this planet. She did
not believe she had a choice about coming to the earth plane. I could deeply feel
her grief and confusion. I spoke briefly about how we had found it useful for
people with experiences like hers to learn the shamanic journey process which
creates a bridge for a part of their spirit to go back home to clarify the “contract”
or terms of coming to this earth dimension. This bridge often makes it more ac-
cessible to receive reinforcement and contact that relieves the extreme loneliness
without interfering with the effectiveness of why a soul comes to earth in the first
place. I spoke of the number of people we know that once meeting their family
“from away” they felt they could more consciously bring the gifts of their original
home to this planet.

I knew in that brief and interrupted conversation that it was also a reminder from
my spirit teachers to continue writing this book and somehow make the time to
open up a far greater source of information than I had experience so far.
Sitting in a circle of my council members, a being called Lacea responded to my
request for clarification regarding people here on earth who feel they were sent
here without their consent. Lacea said that all who come here do give their
permission at a soul level. They may agree to be part of a soul group of beings
with many agendas including support of the earth transition. Their specific
assignment may not have been in their awareness at the time they chose to
become part of a specific group, so it would be perceived as if they were not fully
aware of a commitment that involved the earth plane personality level.

Lacea further clarified that when people have this disconcerting experience of
feeling that they are “from away”, they are experiencing themselves as having
DNA that is from their parental units plus additional DNA awakened. This
awakening may be from as long ago as they remember, or what is described as a
kundalini experience, or during fetal development and or at such times as a time
clock set in their DNA to become operational at a certain age or circumstance is
met. Lacea continued that “...when there is no apparent context for this awakening, the
person may be confused, angry, even worry about their sanity.”

“Perhaps,” I said, “It was helpful when the term ’spiritual emergency‘ was brought into
the culture to offer a non pathological explanation when this awakening is unexpected.
But I feel there is still not enough support for people who so often suffer in silence rather
than move through the fear of being seen as different or ‘weird.’ It involves a journey of
self-exploration that brings many to the scene of all of their fears while trying to live a
daily routine, managing families, jobs and sustaining the personas they developed to
protect themselves.”

At the point I feel a sternness from Lacea yet quickly recognize it as sorrow.

“Each one of you has a great deal of support offered to you each and every day by many of
us in different dimensions who have chosen to offer assistance to you who are willing to
take the risk of the ‘awakening journey’. Some of us are baffled by the reluctance we
observe and some of us are continuing to go through changes where we exist that offer
perspective. What we do not have is the fear vibration that entraps countless humans.
Yet, as has been spoken before, it is exactly the fear vibration that a wide variety of souls
have made the agreement to inhabit a human body to learn how to transmute. The
transmutation of that vibration of fear can only occur by human choice! We will not get
into the subject at this time of how the fear vibration has come to have so much power on
your planet. We are here to offer support for its transmutation. It is energy and as such
can be refocused.”

“What are the ways this fear vibration, this fear energy can be transmuted?” I ask my
council member. She laughs a musical, whimsical laugh. “It is oh so easy,” was her
response. “I am listening”, is my retort. The two of us are now seated at a small
round table. She takes my two hands in hers. I feel a surge of energy move
through my body like a gentle current, like watching a small brook wind its way
down a mountain. I feel peace fill every cell until I can no longer hold my hands
in hers, but lay them softly on the table. I feel the energy of the table. It is no
longer solid, but moving dots of light that ‘feel’ solid to the touch one moment,
and yet I now know are moving in a pattern to create the table. I know that the
energy can transform itself into anything I name. I name a ball. The table disap-
pears and the energy is a ball. So I quickly perceive Lacea is showing me that ALL
energy can be “reassigned.” I perceive that energy is vibration and it is I or we
who decide its configuration.

I ask to see an image of the vibration of fear. I first see it as a large blob like a
black cloud that continues to metamorphosize and change shape as I observe it.
I notice the shape changes because my mind is spinning out images of past times
I experienced fear. I clear my mind and bring in an image of my favorite place in
nature on my planet. The dark blob does not disappear. Rather, it changes into
what could be described as the northern lights, shifting sheets of light to which I
know I could be assigned an image. So I assigned an image of my partner.
Quickly, the sheets of morphing light become her image, also in varigated hues.
Along with the image came a flood of feelings of gratitude and joy for the
richness of our life together. I try on several other images, each with their own
flood of feelings. I find myself having fun playing with this technology!

All of this confirms what I have known for some time about the power of our
feelings to shift our vibration to the point that we can boost our own immune
system. This has been replicated in our scientists’ laboratories. Feelings like love,
appreciation, and gratitude create measurable increases in the ability of our
immune system to function and contribute to our optimal health. Lacea nods.
“You see. It is very simple. That is why it is so difficult for us sometimes to see the human
suffering that is not necessary and why we choose to be available to help you remember
what you already know. It is not so much that we are more advanced than your species.
It is, rather, that we consistently live what we know to be true!”

At this point Lacea looks suddenly wistful. “You have a beautiful home planet. Yet
most of your people do not have a personal relationship with her. I am not lecturing you.
I am simply moved to say that much of your fear as humans has increased as you forget to
be in relationship with your ’home’. Moving from fear toward a sense of gratitude and
desire for change is necessary. It is those individual, personal choices that shift the vibra-
tion on your planet.”

During a Science and Consciousness Conference in Alburquerque, New Mexico

several years ago, Peter Russell made a statement that influences my choices to
this day. He said that to create a meta-paradigm shift in any given population, it
only takes the square route of one percent of that population to accomplish it.
The square root of one percent of the population of our planet is a little more than
eight thousand people! Eight thousand people making a choice to shift out of the
vibration of fear can and will radically change how we are in relationship with
our planet and all her species.

With a thoughtful expression, Lacea concluded our time together with the mutual
awareness that this paradigm shift on my planet would also impact her in ways
that I could not yet understand.
 27. Meeting Olivia’s Mother

It has been arranged. Time has passed since Jolie introduced me to Olivia who had
extended this invitation to me to meet her mother. I know I need to tell my
rational mind to observe from the sidelines! It begins as a tall, slender woman
smiles warmly at Olivia and waits for an introduction. Olivia simply looks to me
to state my intent for this meeting. As I state that I am trying to learn how to
bring appropriate people into a designated dimension for their healing, she
seems thoughtful. Then she smiles warmly and takes my hand. She guides me
into a large hall that is filled with maps, but not the type of map I am familiar
with. They are more like holograms of “places,” each with their own frequency.
“There are coordinates that when correctly designated, easily transport a being from one
location to another location,” she tells me, smiling at my excitement.

Quite overwhelmed with the thought of learning yet another system that seems
complicated beyond my ability to incorporate into my life, I ask, “How do you
know which coordinate is the right one for the designation one would choose?” The being
responds, “Of course initially you have guidance from one specifically trained in
that skill. You would not be here if this were as overwhelming as you are now
feeling!” She is smiling at me with humor, not concern. “And by the way, my name
is Henrietta and those who know me call me Rita.” I am embarrassed that I had not
followed the protocol to ask her name before this, but her smile dissolved my
uneasiness at this breach of etiquette.

Rita reminded me that I was already offered a process with Glorianna that could
easily be continued with her at any time. It is safe and can be followed at a pace
that is right for me. “So let’s go there right now,” she said firmly. She saw my
confusion and realized that as a descendent she was in my future and I had
perceived Glorianna as being able to accessed in my present time. “This also is only
about frequencies,” she explained as we started moving. She took my two hands in
hers and I could feel subtle shifts in my energy as she mentally calibrated the
frequency necessary to locate Glorianna. In times past I have experienced some
nausea or disorientation with frequency shifts, but not this time. This confirmed
for me that this kind of training can yield a gentle transition, and that our bodies
really are more flexible—more space than matter--than our minds might believe!

Glorianna was waiting for us and greeted each of us with an air of mystery. I felt
safe and curious with these two powerful beings. “So here we are right where we
started,” she greeted me! “Yes, but I am a little wiser than when we last met,” I
countered. “I understand even more clearly that this is all about frequencies. I do not yet
understand how to shift my frequencies to go where I need to go in my physical body.
Are you the one to teach me this? At this point it seems quite overwhelming.”

She nods to Rita and says, “We will teach you together for already you know that the
variables of frequencies are based on what intention is set. Much of the confusion on your
planet is caused by indecisive intentions and/or intentions set without thorough
exploration of what they create. This is not a judgment, but an observation that indicates
that intentions can be realigned. The people in your temporal period are in the process of
realigning intentions on a myriad of levels. That is why your times are perplexing and
chaotic. You might call this a dismemberment or dissolution of forms, protocols and ways
of living in your world so that something new can be created that is more in keeping with
what sustains life. Not just human life but life in all its forms. But enough speaking. Let
us experience. That is what you are best at doing!”

Without a word, she turned and we followed her. She led us to a chamber. The
circular wall had signs and symbols that appeared to be etched in, yet I sensed
they were more like our digital technology that could be easily change or
rearranged. Glorianna asked me to scan the wall and allow myself to be drawn
to an image or symbol. One, in particular, seemed almost to glow as I invited my
breath to regulate itself to sustain a relaxed state. My excitement quickly
overcame any reticence. I could feel myself being drawn into the image.
Suddenly, the wall disappeared and all three of us were suddenly in an entirely
different location!

Rita said, “Why are you so surprised. In your shamanic journeys you easily shift from
one location to another. The meditators of the old times were transported to other times
and spaces, both inside and outside of time through focusing on mandala images. This
technology has been part of your human capabilities for eons of time. Is it such a stretch to
find yourself physically transported as well?”

“Yes, as a matter of fact, I do find this to be a stretch. Right now I am seated on a

comfortable sofa in the healing room, the furnace cranking away as the winter cold creeps
in our drafty one hundred and sixty year old house. With my wool shawl bundled around
me, I balance my small laptop that is enabling me to write what I’m experiencing in a
shift of consciousness. My body is here. My mind is here, yet, some part of my spirit is
shifting enough to become aware of specific possibilities that I just experienced. I know it
is possible and I know it must be a simple process to be useful, but I still do not know
what is involved in supporting my physical body to be here with you. That is what I am
researching.”

We are back suddenly in the circular room. I don’t know how we got here. We
just arrived effortlessly. Glorianna and Rita are laughing at me this time. “When we
put our mutual intentions together, it is effortless,” Rita informs me.”So I need to know
the correct symbol or image to set the intention or direction,” I state. “Yes, because this
is like dialing your telephone to connect with whom you wish to connect. If you dial
correctly, you will connect and if you dial incorrectly, you will also receive that message.
So you see it is not really foreign to your perceptions,” Glorianna replies.
“My perceptions are not the issue.” I continue pressing them for guidance. “How do I
get the information about what image or symbol takes me to a specific destination in my
physical body that I select or is selected for me?” I’m aware that my persistence might
be exasperating to my hosts, but this is the information I really require for all of
this to be practical on our plane of existence.

Rita picks up the conversation. “You have said over and over on your planet that rela-
tionship is what is most important in any organization, project, endeavor. And so it is
with inter-dimensional travel. As you connect with any one of us, we give you the image
that enables you to access us easily. In our relationship with you we have begun with ex-
change of names. For some of you, the image will come before the name. But a relationship
must be established to accomplish this kind of transition. Some of you have been given im-
ages in meditations, prayers, shamanic journeys or in spontaneous visions. These are
ways we are attempting to coordinate with you. It is easier when we begin meeting as we
are now.”

And so began a new phase of my training!

 28. The Value of Our Multidimensional Relationships in Healing The Earth

In this early morning journey, I wanted to explore more about the dimensions
that I had been shifting into. I was reading Barbara Hand Clow, Alchemy of Nine
Dimensions.47 Some part of me resisted that dimensions were being limited to a
defined number. My current process seemed to be more fluid and exploratory.
Clow’s purpose appeared to be somewhat more scholarly, blending latest science
with what she calls “spiritual science” but I always prefer checking such concepts
with my own spirit teachers.

In my journey, I was immediately taken to the dimension where there is a

familiar council that I visit. This council includes beings from many other
dimensions. Over time, I have been introduced to and interacted with several of
them when they each determined that their particular knowledge was useful to
me. In gratitude for their
assistance, I created a prayer
necklace with one bead to
represent each of the beings to
whom I have been introduced.
Wearing it is part of my daily
prayer ritual and keeps me
connected with them. It is a way
of honoring each of them and
how our relationship continues
to evolve. At one such meeting, I
was shown an empty seat on the
council. I was informed that this
seat would be where I will sit
one day when this lifetime is
complete. They also reassured me that my arrival there wouldn’t be anytime
soon!

The speaker came to greet me and all the council members came and formed a
line on each side of the speaker and myself. I asked the speaker for a name by
which I can address him. He laughed and gave me the name Elderone which is a
conjunction of the words, Elder One. This council is made up of representatives
from other dimensions rather than one specific dimension. He did not go into any
detail, but rather guided us to a place where there was an oval place of light, like
a pool, but not filled with water. Elderone and I walked into a radiant portal.

We were met by a group of beings who stood about three feet tall. They are not
like the Little Gold Beings in the core of the earth that I had previously met. These
beings shared their role in the life of our planet by showing me images. The first
was looking down at an ashram in India, then other places where groups of peo-
ple were meditating. They said their role is to augment the energy these groups
generate for the purpose of helping our earth and so other places in All That Is, as
well. Their focus seemed to be to enhance the energy of groups more than indi-
viduals. Witnessing their work was to allow me know that other dimensional
beings are aiding us at this crucial time on the planet earth.

Elderone then affirmed that my experience of fluidity in accessing different

dimensions is certainly right for me. He said that in the soul retrieval work that I
do, I go into many different vibrational dimensions without having to specify
what dimension. He affirmed again that my process of merging with my spirit
teachers shifts my vibration for any dimension, effortlessly. I said I would like to
be able to take my physical body into other dimensions. I have the intellectual
knowledge that I am mostly space and my primary teacher, the Christ Being, has
shared that I could easily go through doors and walls, but my rational mind still
puts up blocks to that process. Perhaps it is easier for beings in other dimensions
outside our space/time limitations to come here than for us to shift into their
dimensions. This will continue to be a quest of mine. For now, it is helpful to
witness and experience how beings in other dimensions are concerned and active
in supporting the transition occurring on our planet which has been described in
so many ways and is undeniably happening!

Elderone said that when our warm weather returns it would be useful for me to
begin exploring portals wherever I am. I will also look for other portals on our
land since the Crystal Rock is now content in its place in our rock garden. As I
write this, it is clear to me that for the winter months I will keep exploring how to
shift dimensionally by intention alone. Of course it is always done with very clear
intention, even when a portal presents itself!

I continue connecting with Elderone by sharing that we had recently received a

request for healing from a woman who has been diagnosed with lymphoma,
which had metastasized to her brain. She had been told that a shaman could pull
the cancer from her brain and asked if we could do that. In my journey my
teachers were clarifying a perspective on healing. They said that as I merged with
their vibration(s) they would interact with the vibration of the person asking for
healing. They specified that healing is an interactive relationship, not a “do to
you” form of healing. They also shared that in some situations, the physical body
is unable to accommodate the vibrations that would assist physical healing.
When I first shared this with the woman who called us her response was, “so the
spirits only heal some.” As I elaborated on my understanding of vibrations of en-
ergy, (asking for on the spot guidance as I engaged with her!), she began to
understand. Surprisingly, she expressed relief, for she was afraid that she was not
doing something right and that was why she was not able to heal her cancer.
In understanding it was that her body could not sustain the energy, she forgave
herself. In this state of self-love and forgiveness, she was more able to allow a
graceful transition. It is for this reason that our interactions with spirit for healing
are always left, open-ended. By letting go of any specific outcome, the healing
that is most crucial can occur.

This “conversation” with my spirit teachers also clarified why participants’

experience with the Twelve-Point Star were so varied. Some people were taken to
other dimensions that were challenging to describe, but that they understood at
their “knowing” level. Some were able to report healing on a DNA level. Others
went to more familiar journey sites that also held rich experiences of information
and healing. At the time I was sharing that process, I was somewhat startled that
many or even most of my dear peers were reticent to specify a dimension versus
a designated journey site of some familiarity. Of course this was an important
reality check for me to do a great deal more study with my spirit advisors,
especially regarding assessing the comfort zone of those I was working with.
It meant paying even closer attention to the meanings of the words I use and
encouraging each person to continue clarifying unfamiliar concepts with their
own helping spirits.
 29. Relationship Between Other Dimensions And The Earth

I am aware that much of the focus of this book is on individual healing. I am,
therefore, equally aware that it is crucial to be absolutely clear that any individual
healing contributes to the healing of this beautiful planet and beyond. My spirit
teachers and my partner’s spirit teachers have been insistent about our sharing
this truth for over twenty years. In our holographic universe, the healing of any
aspect on any level radiates, expands to the Whole. It can be no other way. A
personal example of this reality is described in the following account that
occurred in the first few days of 2007.

I was awakened in the very early morning with the message from my teachers
that it was important for me to share an experience that my partner, Evelyn and
our friend Suzanne, had participated in 1993. This is an example of my own
personal interaction with other dimensions in this reality rather than journey
state. To me this experience also demonstrates the interconnection between the
earth and other places of existence.

During a visit from our dear friend, Suzanne, she had rather shyly shared an
experience with us. Tsultrim Allione, had handed her a crystal that she had taken
to power spots all around the world. Tsultrim told our friend that spirit had
communicated to her that Suzanne was to be the one to take this special crystal to
Mount Monadnock in New Hampshire. In that location, it would be joining
crystals that had been placed in a cave by Native Americans thousands of years
ago in preparation for this time in history. As our friend related this request from
Tsultrim, I shared my experience of studying with Tsultrim at Omega Institute
many years prior. It was the time when Tsultrim had just returned from Europe
to begin her life in the United States as a Buddhist teacher. Now as Suzanne
shared this unexpected request from Tsultrim, I felt a surprising draw to want to
accompany her. It also felt like an egotistical notion until my partner, Evelyn had
a dream that suggested we were to accompany her and the exact date of April 30,
1993. This caught both of us by surprise as I hadn’t shared my desire to go on the
mission. Evelyn’s dream told her we were to have the crystal in place for the first
of May.

About six weeks later we arrived at Mount Monadnock. We were not encouraged
by a sign that said ”pass at your own risk. It you get stuck, don’t call me!” It was
mud season in New Hampshire. This is a time in early Spring when the ground
hasn’t yet fully thawed. The melting snow and rains saturate the shallow, upper
levels of the soil and create incredible amounts of mud everywhere. True enough,
the road seemed impossible to navigate, but at every point of considering it was
too dangerous for Suzanne’s car to continue, a sign would appear. The first was
in the form of a mother and child, just standing by the side of the road we were
trying to navigate. The woman said this is the only way open to the mountain
this time of year. Several large potholes and exposed rocks later, a large wild
turkey continued pointing the way.

We eventually arrived at the beginning of a trail up the mountain. However, soon

after making our way up the trail, our different spirit guides made it clear that we
were to begin bushwhacking off the trail. While we each received our information
in a different way, the information about direction was always corroborated by
each other. As we made our way through the thick woods, we noticed that the
usual nature sounds were absent. We did not hear one bird singing or any small
creatures rustling through the underbrush. It was quite surreal. A short time
later, we all noticed one beautiful small bird singing. It flew a short distance
ahead of us and at each juncture, we were clear that the direction we were to take
was toward the bird! This little scout guided us for some time and was especially
helpful as we made our way through marshy, thorny territory. He even called
our attention to a snake curled upon itself to remind us to pay attention to not
backtrack.

During a shamanic journey to prepare for our trip, Suzanne had been shown the
exact cave where the Native Americans had placed the crystals, so for some time
we continued looking for a cave. Close to dusk, the appointed time for the ritual
that Suzanne had also been given in her journey we realized that our time was
running out. Even with flashlights it would soon be unsafe for us to travel in
this uncertain terrain. Evelyn sat at a point that we all felt was close to our
destination, holding space for Suzanne and I to continue exploring for the exact
sacred spot. As we continued searching Suzanne placed her hands in a small cave
that she said felt like a womb. In her journey the cave was large and spacious and
she began doubting that this was the right cave. I was nearby, scrambling up an
incline for a wider view. I began slipping down the side of the steep bank.
Looking up to grab something to catch myself, I saw two hawks cross over each
other, in an “X marks the spot” gesture. It was then that I noticed the distinct
outline of a large cave, now completely filled in through the years of melting
snow and shifting earth. We had advised only one friend of our location and in
her journey she had seen two birds mark the exact spot. Suzanne and I both
noticed two deer across the nearby stream looking up at us steadily, making it
easy to mark the site.

Suzanne was still concerned that with the cave filled in she could not complete
the ritual of placing the empowered crystal with those set in place 2,000 years
ago. As we headed back to where Evelyn had been, Suzanne’s knee went out
from under her and she collapsed in enormous pain. We quickly all journeyed
together for the next step and were each shown or told that the filled in cave was
the right location. As we described it to Evelyn, she remembered seeing that
outlined cave in her preparation journeys. Suzanne’s knee was immediately fine,
(later she remembered that her knee going out had occurred several other times
in her life and that the pain immediately cleared her mind of self doubt). As we
explored the area in more depth, she realized that the deer were showing us that
the stream was filled with crystals perfect for the ritual! There was also a natural
bowl shape in the earth to place our sleeping bags for the night.

Suzanne led us in a powerful ritual with her sacred pipe, which had already been
used in several Sun Dance ceremonies. We had each been guided to bring certain
of our own crystals. We cleansed them all in the brook, held the ignition crystal as
instructed and returned to our “camp” to rest until the time was right for the
ritual. Suddenly a brisk wind came up as if the wind spirits were calling us to our
work. We went to the “cave”, rolled sacred tobacco, lit sage, sweet grass, cedar.
We smudged the cave site, the crystals and ourselves. We prayed from our hearts
each in our own way, sometimes singing a fresh spirit song that came to us in
that moment. Suzanne placed the crystals in the manner she had been shown in
her journey. Between the crystals from the brook and the ones we had been
guided to bring with us, we had the exact number Suzanne had been shown. The
sacred ritual felt complete and night quickly descended around us.

As we nestled in our sleeping bags, we first noticed electrical currents running

under the earth. Evelyn saw the trees telling one another of this event through
their roots. We all felt the earth tremble. I felt energy currents coursing through
my body. The three quarter full moon gave us all the light we needed. The
sudden drop in temperature continued, but the wind had stopped. There were no
sounds this night. We were awed by this unusual silence.

Then a huge star appeared in the night sky which I can best describe as looking
like twin stars with a longer ray pointing down, like the star at Bethlehem,
shining a beam directly toward the crystals. There were also two other stars in
alignment with the moon. We watched and felt the power of this unusual star
until it was as if we were “put to sleep”. We all seemed to know that we were not
intended to witness what was to happen to the crystals so carefully placed in the
ceremony. In a dream state, Suzanne saw an ancient Native elder who was
confused about what was occurring. He was caretaker of this sacred mountain.
She explained to him about the igniter crystal calling the stars to open the Eastern
Gate. (At that time none of us were told the significance of opening the Eastern
Gate and our understanding of this action continues to evolve for us).

We all slept, awakening simultaneously from time to time to check on one

another and to notice that the position of the unique star never changed its
position, although the myriad of other stars continued progressing across the
night sky as usual. We also experienced hearing light musical sounds. At 5:30 in
the morning, we again woke up to see the star leave. We experienced tremendous
energy in the earth and in the space all around us. We knew that we were and
would continue to experience cellular changes within ourselves without knowing
the full extent of this entire mystery!

Falling asleep again, we were awakened a short time later by the squawking of a
persistent blue jay and to the welcoming cacophony of all the other expected
sounds of nature. The woods’ silence had been broken! We offered sage and
tobacco to the earth in gratitude and noticed signs that many deer had quietly
surrounded us during the night.

The sounds of nature were joined by our spontaneous laughter as three

porcupines sleeping on a branch pointed our way back down the mountain by
easy access to the well-worn path. In writing this years later it seems clear that
the arduous trip up the mountain the day before was to clear us of any self doubt
or expectations, so focused did we have to be on the step in front of us. The
adventure concluded with a visit to a Native American shop where the native
owner was making a garment of white buckskin. “What a night on the mountain,”
she addressed us. “I have lived at the base of the mountain all my life and never experi-
enced such energy!” We smiled and mutely nodded. Several customers entered the
shop at that point, which prevented us from engaging the owner any further and
so we left to get some breakfast.

How do you interpret such an experience? From a spiritual perspective I can best
describe it as Mystery. My spirit teachers often say that our present minds are not
capable of understanding all the complexities that are occurring on the planet at
this time. I did, however, not resist the compulsion to journey to the council of
beings I was presently working with to ask to understand our earth plane experi-
ence. I was taken on several journeys to an image of that same star where I was
shown and felt in my physical body some of the implications of this event, for the
planet and for my own life path.

On our return trip from Mount Monadnock, Suzanne received a communication

from her spirit teachers that in the future Evelyn and I would be doing a ritual on
Mount Washington, the highest mountain in the East. Also located in New
Hampshire, this peak was also somehow connected to the opening of the Eastern
Gate. We recalled this one foggy Summer Solstice, driving up Mt. Washington in
fog so thick that we could not see the road ahead of us, with sheer cliffs off both
sides and no guardrails. In pouring rain, we made our offerings simultaneously
with dear friends who had hiked up Cadillac Mountain in Bar Harbor, Maine.
This is known to be the location where the sun first touches at dawn in Maine.
The rain, drizzle, fog and chilling weather had postponed each of our original
time tables, and as we compared them later over hot chocolate, our respective
delays still somehow had us making our prayers and offerings at the exact same
time!
Sometimes it is fun to contemplate all the spirits go through to support our
human efforts! They frequently remind us that we are in a partnership with them.
Since they no longer have physical forms and some never experienced form at all,
they count on us to work with their nonphysical perspective and guidance for the
benefit of all beings! I have also discovered that they are very open to negotiation
when those of us in physical form feel unprepared for follow-through. Perhaps
all that is ever required of us is our trust in ourselves, in those who love us, and
this earth. This also includes trusting our neighbors in other dimensions enough
to guide us even when we do not or cannot understand all the implications of
that guidance.
 30. The Practical

They are all there waiting for my arrival. I asked to meet with the beings in my
advisory group for my book to check about what comes next. I wanted to confirm
a strong intuition about my direction and also some concerns to address. They
greet me warmly as they sit around the familiar round table in what I have come
to think of as my “cosmic coffee shop.” I have met a wide variety of beings here
for many different reasons. They seem somewhat amused as they somehow
know that I had lost hours of my work yesterday struggling to negotiate
computer work with my dyslexic brain. They kindly suggest that I just start fresh
with the focus I had come to ask them about. So I state my intention. “My
intuition is that it is time to address more specifically how meeting with other
dimensional beings can be practical in our daily life. For myself I can affirm that my
entire perspective on life has been transformed by my evolving relationships with these
beings. How can I translate this transforming process to my readers?”

They encourage me to ask to meet with Oliva’s mother, Rita and Glorianna for
this focus. With this intention clarified, I find myself immediately transported to
the meeting place. Rita and Glorianna are clearly glad to greet me and they
reassure me that nothing of significance was lost-- that my focus is to be on
present experience not scholarly discourse. They wait patiently for me to shift my
frequency to connect more strongly with their energy.

R&G: “We have heard your request and will honor it with glad hearts. The language of
images is very much a part of your culture so this is where we will begin. From the begin-
ning of your earth time shamans, medicine healers, seekers of the holy have drawn images
on the walls of caves and canyons as a way to express, experience and re-experience the
‘other’ worlds than the physical one you inhabit. Those images carry power even in your
new century, not only as the importance of art in human life, but also as carriers of the
power of vibration. Each image carries its own vibration that is contained and transmitted
over eons of time without losing its potency. How amazing is that!”

They continue and I’m eagerly following their conversation.

R&G: “We see you work with a woman who brings her book of fresh personal images to
your work sessions. She drew them on blank pages with colored pencils to express her
moods. As she shares them with you, the vibration of those images she herself has drawn,
shape themselves into new insights. These insights create a vibrational shift within her in
a way that no one else can offer. Is this not so?” They don’t wait for me to acknowledge
before moving on. “As you and others meet other dimensional beings you expand your
repertoire of images that have meaning for you and you expand your ability to experience
vibrations. This then expands your perceptions of who/what it is to be a human being.
And you know that is definitely useful for your planet today!”

They then encourage me to review and reflect upon information that has already
 been offered to me in previous
connections with other
dimensional beings, focusing on
the practical significance for this
time in the transition on our
planet. The following is one of
those connections.

The water on the shores of Lake

Ossippee in New Hampshire was
slipping into the quietness of
twilight. Stars were beginning to
make their presence known in the
sky above the lake. As we sat
around the fire, the loons were of-
fering their evening concert. Participants in our Two Year apprentice group were
seated in a circle on the floor of the Long House with views of the Lake on three
sides. There was excitement as we prepared the space to begin a special evening
of meeting with the beings who come when the Whistling Vessels are played.

Years ago, the sounds of the Whistling Vessels filled a different gathering space,
creating a portal for me to move through. A Spirit Woman called Geotoah came
and grabbed me by the hand. With a sense of urgency, she took me to a location
she told me was in Peru. Waiting for me was a group of five women shaman.
They have lived at different periods of history and in different geographical
locations around the planet. At this time, they were meeting as a spirit group to
introduce themselves to me for the purpose of becoming part of my healing
retinue. I have continued to work with them for since that initial meeting. Over
time they have given me a spirit song for calling them for healing work for
others. They have specified their varied and unique gifts, but often prefer to offer
themselves as a collective vibration during our healing sessions. As a way to
concretize our connections, they gave me an assignment to create dolls or effigies
to represent each one of them. In the process of listening to each one describe
how she wished to be represented, I grew to know, trust and love them. This rich
relationship has continued to flourish with my Circle of Women Shamans.

Many years after our first meeting, the Circle of Women Shamans added another
member. At the time I met her in a journey, she was still on this planet in physical
form. She refused to reveal her location, because she did not want people to
discover her and intrude upon her life! When we met, she would sit on a long log
with the Circle of Women Shamans. at her feet. From their interchanges, it was
obvious that the women enjoyed each other’s company. At one point, I became
aware that I did not feel my new teacher’s presence. I checked in and the Circle of
Women Shamans showed me the profoundly moving experience of her death.
They also shared the celebration of life they had offered her, both before and
following her release from her body, including the ceremony of lovingly placing
her body in the earth.

Over time, during other whistling vessel experiences, the Circle of Women
Shamans. have shown me that when they come to work with me in this reality for
healing sessions, they create an energetic portal. This dimensional portal is
created by the combination of their collective vibrations. Through this portal that
they create together, other multidimensional beings can come into the earth plane
to offer their healing vibrations. The more I become comfortable with these other
dimensional beings and their vibrations, the easier it is for them to work through
my energy body to provide healing. This is coherent with my own desire to pro-
vide relief from suffering and healing for people and our planet!

During a recent whistling vessel ceremony, they met me at their preferred gather-
ing place. They said I still had some unconscious fear about the coming transition
on the earth and about my own readiness for what might occur. They said that
they understood, for I had been given a vivid and accurate vision of what is oc-
curring on our earth now, decades before during my Three-Year Shamanic
Training Program. The Circle of Women Shamans. respected my unconscious fears
but assured me that they were unnecessary. They then took me to see all the
spirit councils that are working in other dimensions to support this earth
transition. I saw a Galactic Federation of Beings. I saw my own council of spirit
teachers. I saw groups upon groups of beings, who have all gathered together to
support our world at this critical time. I was told that the earth is too important
in the ongoing evolving of souls to allow it to be destroyed.

They also reassured me that because all of the members of these councils know
about connectedness they are like a great web communicating and sharing
energies. They know how to sustain the necessary balance the earth requires.
The Gold Beings I had met long ago in the core of the earth I already knew have
a vital role in maintaining this balance. The Circle of Women Shamans reminded
me that my job is to be as gentle as possible in continuing to support people to
come into their fullness. Their parting words as my attention was being drawn
back into the room, filled with the amazing sounds of the Vessels, were that the
vessel’s sounds and spirits were working with our apprentices at a cellular level.
I was informed that this would continue for three days.
 31. Meeting Great White Bear At Half Way Point

In 2004, my partner and I were given an enormous gift by some of our students
and friends. This gift was to take a trip to meet the polar bears that gather at
Churchill, Manitoba in Canada. Before Evelyn and I had ever met one another,
we had each been introduced to polar bears as our primary power animal. On
this amazing trip, we lived for
several days and nights out on the
tundra in a temporary lodge set
up near the shores of Hudson
Bay. While staying in the Tundra
Lodge, we had polar bears
roaming all around us as we ate
and slept. Watching these amazing
animals living their lives moved
us to tears many times. Observing
them, we become fully aware that
we humans are not on the top of
the food chain! While staying on
the tundra, we also took shamanic
journeys inside the warmth and
comfort of the lodge. In our
journeys, we met the spirit of The
Great White Bear. We had come to
know this huge spirit bear as the
Guardian of the Arctic and all of
its endangered life forms,
including our beloved polar bears.

During the days, we would make

excursions on tundra buggies to
see the bears and watch them interact with each other. One of the places that we
could safely observe these amazing animals was called Half Way Point. This
inspired me to take the following journey.

Great White Bear and other teachers create a portal for my power animal, She Ma
and I. Once the portal was created, She Ma and I step through it accompanied by
the Great White Bear (GWB). Once in the new dimension, we meet a woman who
is clothed in white fur. “Come with me,” she instructs us. We find ourselves walk-
ing in a temperate forest and soon come to a cave. She stoops low to enter. It is
dome-shaped. Inside there is a spirit that resembles a Tibetan monk or lama with
an orange/brown robe. He invites me to sit by the fire with him. The fur-clad
woman steps to the back of cave making it clear that I am to interact with the
monk. I ask him if he is my teacher for this journey. In response, he brings out
scrolls made of ancient parchment. In the back of the cave, I can see an old
wooden trunk where these scrolls are stored. A low table appears. Placing the
scrolls on the table, he unrolls one and begins to read.

Teacher: “Are you ready?”

Allie: “Yes. Am I to remember this?”

T: ”You have your modern machine on, do you not? This is not a language you can read.
It is a very ancient language that holds great wisdom. When people spoke in this language
they used to communicate very specifically. Not a lot of words.” He laughs a very
musical laughter! He is shape shifting to be very old and then very young to help
me know that he carries ancient wisdom.

T: ”Put in your tape machine every word I say beginning now.”

”In the beginning, there was wonder. Everything was as you call magic. Everything had a
name. Everything had an essence. Everything had its own energy. All the energies were
related and relating to one another. The energy of the sun was relating to the energy of the
moon. The energy of the stars was relating to the energy of the blades of grass. The blades
of grass were relating to the flowers and the birds. The birds were relating to the trees
and the tree roots to the water, and the water to the earth and the earth was relating to
and relating with the deep levels of core in the earth, the different layers in the earth.
Everything has an amazing beauty about it as if it is all vibrating with energy.”

He looks up to see if I am paying attention. I am, and I reassure him that I am lis-
tening.

A; “I can see it beautifully, like the essence of everything. It is beautiful!”

T: ”Everything knew everything else. Everything knew of its connection with everything
else. And there was a sense of wholeness and order.”

He is letting me take that all in. I can feel it in my body. I’m seeing a star coming
down heading into a place on the earth, and it is as if everything starts to wake
up. It is as if everything that had been singing the same note then began to have
their own frequencies. He is looking at me now, not reading, but sharing his own
memory of that time. Things start to take on different colors. Before it was all
glowing all the same golden essence. Now everything starts to take on different
colors, hues from the energy radiating from the star. It is as if things are coming
to life and starting to interact with each other. Not that it was static before. It was
as if all things were on the same frequency, now the frequencies are all shifting
and changing. And each species is seeking its own frequency that feels right for
it. Like a tree is seeking its own frequency.
Again there is a feeling of harmony, a feeling that the original vibration was all
the same and as they seek different frequencies yet beneath it all the “hum” of
that original vibration remains.

The Teacher nods. “What is happening next?” I ask as I watch this unfolding.

The scene shifts and now I’m seeing a lot of stars falling down on different parts
of our planet. From those stars there begins to be life. In different parts of the
earth the life forms are different. I see all the different species that existed at the
beginning of time. They come into the place where there is harmony in the
frequencies, although the frequencies are different. And they begin to find their
own frequencies that are right for each of them. They gather into groups where
the frequencies are similar. The frequencies create characteristics.

As I’m watching, I see a place where several stars have landed. I’m beginning to
see a species develop that is very human-like. When these beings look around
they see that everything is beautiful. When they touch things they can read the
frequency of each thing. So there is a sense of harmony and trust. I’m watching
someone who looks like a male go up and touch a tree and smile with acknowl-
edgment of the frequency of the tree being very similar to his own even though
the tree looks different from him. This reminds me of how human DNA carries
aspects of the genetic code of many other species.

The male being moves around touching things and feeling the frequency of each
thing. He is touching a big boulder, running his fingers over the boulder much
like a blind person would. He is on his knees acknowledging the vibration of the
sun and thanking the sun and thanking the stars. You can see the stars in the
daylight. They are bright enough to do that!

He goes about touching everything and becoming familiar with the area he is in.
He sees coming from a distance another being who looks similar to him. It
appears to be in female form. They wave and touch each other’s hands and
realize that it was also was a similar frequency. So they are looking around,
touching and becoming familiar with the landscape and being very pleased
with it. They move down to a brook, tasting the water and it tastes sweet. They
are putting their feet in it, laughing as they feel the coolness on their feet.
There seems to be a sense of harmony and wellbeing. I'm drawn back to the
teacher with his finger in the scroll.

A: “What happens next?” I ask with anticipation.

He shows me that from this couple come many children and there is a very long
time of peace and harmony and well-being. Even the animals that come in their
areas are of the same frequency and so there is harmony. There is plenty to eat for
all thanks to the fruits and things that grow naturally. The vibrations are all
compatible.

T: “Time goes on for a long time in this manner where all is one and all is aware of the
same frequencies and interacting from those frequencies in a way that all are nurtured
and fed.”

A: “What happened to change the frequency so there was not so much compatibility?
What changed that interrupted this harmonious interrelationships and interconnec-
tions?”

He looks at me to see if I really want to know.

A: “Yes, I really want to know. Knowing that information can perhaps contribute to a
clarity about what needs to change today.”

T: “No. It will not change that. You already know this. You already know that the
vibration of knowing that you are divine and connected to everything and everyone is
what brings harmony to your planet. So it is not even necessary to be aware of what
disrupted this original harmony. What is important is to look at the factors of how do
you return to it.”

A: “Is it possible to return to this state of harmony where all the frequencies are once
again compatible with each other?”

T: ”Of course. If you experienced it once you can experience it again. This is the task of
your generation, though it will not be accomplished in your generation. The task is to
begin to understand both from science and spiritual perspectives how to live from that
frequency of harmony. Even though it seems improbable from witnessing the world in
your modern communication media.”

A: “How do we return to that frequency since there are so many factors interfering with
people believing that they are sacred and divine? There is fear and that vibration
perpetuates the opposite of harmony creating discord.”

T: ”There are many ways this can happen. But first you must understand that at the
beginning everything WAS in harmony. This was not a chaotic planet. This was not as
some have predicted a place of violent storms. It was a place where everything that existed
at that time existed in a frequency that was in harmony with everything else that existed
at that time, and that is how your planet began. Because it began that way it is possible to
return to that frequency of harmony although it will not look the same. It will not look in
the same way you saw it. It will look however it looks! The frequency of harmony is
possible! Yes!”

A: “What is my part in returning this planet to the frequency of harmony?”

T: ”First of all, that is why you are here with me, that is why you are here on this planet--
to do your part in returning your planet to the frequency of harmony. It will not look the
way it looked in the beginning, for all things change. But harmony is harmony! The
frequency of harmony is the same whether on this planet or any other place of existence.”

A: "I understand that. So the first point is that it is possible to return to the frequency of
harmony?”

T: ”Yes.”

A: “What is my part?”

T: ”Right now your part is to record as you are doing and will continue to do for this
message. This comes from wisdom that has been stored (he indicates the scroll) for
centuries upon centuries in sacred places where the frequency of harmony has not been
disturbed. You will not be taken there, for even your frequency would disturb that, not
because you are not good, but because it is not possible for your body yet at this point to
enter into this frequency. However, it will be. And it is something for you to look forward
to as well.”

A: "So if it is not possible for me to go into that frequency, how is it possible for this
whole planet to go into that frequency?”

T:(smiling) “I am from that frequency and I have no problem interfacing with you, nor
you with me. That lets you know that this is possible. It is simply that steps must be taken
for it to happen in a way that is beneficial for the human race that is now on the planet.
In a blinking of an eye that frequency could be restored by those from other places, but
that is not the way it is intended to be. It is intended to be that those of you who live on
this planet and those of us who live in a different vibration on this planet become the
restorers of that frequency. We are doing it in our way, which is to be the keeper of the old
and ancient records that hold the knowing that this is the way it was in the beginning.
You are doing it in your way and everyone who is doing it is doing it in their way. It is
like
putting a grand puzzle together.”

A: “What part is mine to do in restoring this frequency?”

T: ”You have been told that you are the crystal which means that you already know that
you are about vibration--that you are about frequency. The more you order your own life,
the more you bring your own life into harmony with the frequency of the One, the Source
of All That Is, then you restore that frequency around you. Your overall life story has been
one of seeking to return to this frequency even when you did not know that was what you
were doing. It got you into quite a bit of trouble along the way and caused you a great
deal of pain when those around you had no clue what you were about, nor did you in
earlier parts of your life. Now you do know and you have been having this awareness
brought to you in many ways.”

A: "So you are saying that my overall soul purpose is to be part of this larger process of
restoring the frequency of wholeness, of harmony to this planet. Is that correct?”

T: ”Yes, dear one. And although it sounds like a big job, all you have to do is your part.
Others are in many ways are doing their part, and there are many who have no clue what
their life is about. Those in states of war believe that they are restoring the frequency of
harmony, however questionable their ways are about bringing this about. Many people
have forgotten that the way to restore harmony is to listen again to the ancient ones who
lived in the time when harmony existed. If their ways were followed they would bring any
race or any group of people into harmony. They have been planted on your planet
throughout time, these great leaders, to bring wisdom to each part of the planet. Because
the vibration of those who heard was not in harmony, they interpreted much of their
teachings through their own vibrations which were not in harmony.”

The Teacher continues. “Let us say that the differences in frequencies have led to
misunderstandings which have led to wars which have led to brother against brother,
sister against sister, mother against father, father against mother, people against people,
nations against nations, Yet it is all about returning to the frequency of Oneness. When
that Oneness is returned there is no need for differences to be perceived as threats. It is
simply to be perceived as part of the Whole and the richness of the Whole.”

A: "I understand what you are saying, wise, Teacher. What I am still not clear about is
my part in it. I know trying to keep a picture of the Whole is too complex at this point.”

T: ”But you can keep a picture of that earlier image when everything was in harmony
and that is possible to return to that: not that it will look the same, but to the place of
frequencies being One and within that One there is great diversity, and the frequency
can be One. The frequency can be compatible, not necessarily all the same. The awareness
is that the variations are all one frequency. The variations are always from the One
frequency. There is always interconnectedness, there is always harmony. It is not
necessary to experience discord. That is what must be repaired.” He smiles.

T: ”Your part is to hold the knowing that this is possible. That is your part. How you do
it on a day by day basis is up to you.”
Now he roles up the scroll signifying this session is over. The woman in fur comes
to lead me out of the cave. We return back into the Half Way Point Circle where
Great White Bear stands again as a guardian. I thank all of them letting them know
I’ll be back.
 32. Frequencies

Through the years of this cosmic adventure to more fully explore our relationship
with our multidimensional neighbors, a theme consistently re-occurred. That was
the crucial role of frequency in inter-dimensional shifting. This required more
research for clarification, including the relationship of frequency to intention.

My partner and I were fortunate to participate in Lynne McTaggart’s first global

teleconference, Living with Intention.48 McTaggart is author of the book, The
Intention Experiment49 and has initiated several global experiences that involve
shifting vibrations in a given location in the world for healing the toxins in that
place. Her focus in this teleconference was to elaborate upon the dynamics of
what is important to internalize and implement about intentions. She reminded
us gathered on the call that intentionality is a learned skill that involves practice,
and she moved on to communicate what she has learned about that skill. I found
myself laughing at the synchronicity since it was exactly what my spirit teachers
have been sharing with me. This information was also a validation of what
science now embraces-- that we are constantly receiving and transmitting
energies to each other on the quantum level. Since we are in constant
intercommunication, it is imperative that we become mindful or intentional
about what we are transmitting!

I found myself curious to see what additional information my own spirit teachers
wanted to offer to me and to my readers about this topic. As I set my intention to
meet with Glorianna and Rita I could feel my body shifting from an almost total
focus in my rational mind to an expansion of my energy field. I asked to meet
with Quan Yin and my spirit greeters and immediately found myself smiling and
relaxing. We met this time in the city I have been to before where the buildings
were all white with sparkles embedded in their surfaces. We were escorted to the
temple building, up many levels of long, closely spaced steps. We were ushered
forward and Glorianna was there to meet with us. She appeared happy that we
had come today. I greeted her and stated my desire to learn more about how in-
tentionally working with frequencies can shift vibrations both on our planet
earth, and support more healing wherever it is needed. Glorianna looked at me
intently to see if I was truly ready. Smiling, she said, “You have always been ready.
It is simply time.” I agree.

She takes me my right hand and leads me down several more steps into a domed
room. On the ceiling above me appears to be a starry heaven. “Not your heaven,”
she says. These are points on a different map. Which one are you drawn to?” I
take my time to locate one that I resonate with. It beams a ray of light straight
down into my heart chakra. My teachers call this the heart energy system. I feel
my body expand so it is almost too difficult to type. I feel warmth in my heart as
it expands. The warmth radiates down my arms and into my body core, circulat-
ing around as if it were looking for a specific area to “land.” As I watch it, much
like watching the red light of a laser pointer, I feel my shoulders relax. I see tiny
streams of dark energy wiggling its way around and becoming encapsulated by
the light and dissipating. The light disappears.

I am back to the awareness of Glorianna beside me. I smile at her and she at me.
“See, it is that easy. You set the intention and the Source of All That Is becomes free to
extinguish what is not beneficial while simultaneously reminding the person, animal, or
other species that it is capable of expansion beyond its present state of being. What is
important for you to know is that it was not the star that produced the light that offered
you your experience. It was you setting your intention that made it manifest in that
particular way. It could have been fulfilled in any infinite number of ways because your
own being knows you are within the quantum plenum, the All That Is vibration. The
specific frequency you experienced was what was most useful to accomplish your request.
Most people on you planet find it useful to have a specific focus during the process, like
the star we supplied for you. It is actually unnecessary to have a focus once the intention
is clearly set. It is the intention that is the focus, letting go of outcome of how and in what
way it is accomplished.”

Glorianna seemed pleased that I could articulate my experience. I responded that

it feels like just what I do when I am facilitating a healing session with someone
while I am transfigured. “Of course, you are already doing this. It is only your rational
mind that is dissatisfied with unanswered questions! Some people will need a system or
systems to give the mind what it requires until they are totally convinced that they can let
that go, too! So are you clear that when a person presents herself or himself to you for
healing, you simply set the intention for the healing that is beneficial for them at that
time after you have merged with your spirit teachers. You may ask for the appropriate
frequency from All That Is to accomplish that intention. It may be instant, or evolve over
time as is best for that person, species, or situation. That part is not under your control,
and perhaps not even theirs. The thing about frequencies is that when frequencies interact
with each other, it is the clarity of the intention that is set that orders these interacting
frequencies. That is why the clarity of intention is so crucial. You have been learning this
also through your other readings and personal life practice.”

I was grateful for this conversation and responded, “Yes, I do understand that if we
state an intention with our mind and our feelings are already saying this cannot happen,
then the frequency of feelings are stronger than the frequency of the mind. I guess I
thought it must be so much more complicated than that!” Glorianna laughs and laughs
at this comment and continues our dialogue. “Oh, if you humans could really get
how simple it is. It is as simple as agreeing to live each moment from the heart space. If
the heart space needs clearing, then this can easily be accomplished with the resources of
your times. What is necessary is this clearing. Your earth population has reached the
point where massive and delicate clearing is occurring in imaginable and unimaginable
ways at this time. It is important that you continue teaching people how to meet with
their own spirit teachers and guides to support this process. It is important that you teach
as many as you can how to transfigure, how to release the perception of form into the All
That Is. This can expedite this clearing process for all living creatures and the Earth,
herself.”

Her final words for this session were emphatic. “You must continue to practice
working with inviting the frequency that is appropriate for the set intention. Notice what
you notice while letting go of outcome, as you already know! Come back soon. There is
much else to teach you!”

Nearly a month passed by before I could carve out some time to move this infor-
mation forward. I set my intention to meet with Glorianna to continue my
“lessons” on frequencies. Quan Yin and the greeters are available to escort me.
Glorianna is sitting in a high backed chair in a relaxed position with a smile on her
face. She knew I would be back! I state my desire, “I have more questions about
frequencies. Can I harm someone by bringing in a frequency that their body is not ready
for?” is my first question. “Oh ye of little faith,” she responds. “We are monitoring
the energy system of those you work with in person or from afar. We can instantly, in
your time, correct what a system is not ready to receive. Let that concern evaporate!
Remember, we are all part of the same Universal System of Being. No one is separate, no
one is isolated, no one is left out! The greatest challenge of humans is to trust that this is
true.”

I can feel my response coming immediately. “I do trust this reality. I also take full
responsibility for the actions I as a human take with other humans in my care. That is
why I ask all these questions.”

Glorianna continues to listen attentively and responds, “I understand. What you re-
quire is enough experience with us vibrationally to communicate that to other humans. Is
that what you are telling me?” With relief, I press on. “Yes, I can let go of needing to
understand exactly what occurs within another’s energy system. However I can feel more
confidence with more experience. So, what else do I need to experience about frequencies
that I can facilitate occurring in another to support their acceptance of what seems ‘far
out’ to some?”

In front of me suddenly appears a holographic image of a human being. I am

shown their energy system, moving, expanding, contracting, and changing col-
ors. Glorianna asks me to notice what is not in balance. I see around their heart
chakra, the torus shape of their electromagnetic frequency. It is wobbling un-
steadily, rather than being a stable, strong image. She asks me what I would do
about that observation. I instinctively expand my own energy system even more,
and experience myself as merging with that person’s energy system. This seems
to stabilize their orb of energy. But I find myself questioning whether this is good
for me to do.

“What would happen to you when you have set the intention that you are in the quantum
plenum, connected with the Divine, Infinite Source?” Glorianna challenges me. I
laughingly respond, “I simply affirm this connection and ask for it to serve the well-being
of this person. There is enough to go around!” Glorianna continues, “That is the key,
there is enough to go around, there is no depletion of the Source, so there need be no
depletion of you! You are protected by the knowing that the source of All that Is restores
you as you offer that connection to another until they completely also know of their own
connection to Source. You are a bridge as you have always been to the worlds of spirit
within and without. When you merge your energy system with another, you awaken
within them the knowing, the hungering for their own connection to become stronger.
This may happen instantly, or over time as they are invested in this connection.”

I am enjoying this conversation and grateful for the confirmation of what I

already know, but is explained from a different perspective. “I would like to be
able to offer the frequency to support a healing of whatever a person is requesting. For
example, many clients have early messages in their childhood that they are not good
enough, that they are not valuable, or that they create problems for their family because
the Light they carry within them is experienced as a threat to their parents, rather than
the gift it is intended to be. I understand the dynamics of reprogramming the neural
pathways of the brain. How can frequencies be offered to shift, change, transmute or
redirect these early unbeneficial messages that have been internalized?”

Glorianna again shows me the hologram of the person in front of me. I am drawn
to the brain and see the synapses rapidly connecting to one another. She advises
me to continue looking. I begin to see a change in the connecting synapses. It is as
if a stream of Light is introduced and when the intention is set it seems to know
where to go to replace the old messages with the frequency of the Divine Source.
It is as if the body recognizes this energy as beneficial and seeks to come into
alignment with it! With the body cooperating, it is only a matter of time for a
transformation to be complete. Glorianna emphasizes her point, “Again, it may
be instant, or of necessity, it many be a more gentle process, progressing over time.
Neurotransmitters are just that, transmitters. They can transmit Light as well as
vibrations that are not as compatible with wholeness of the body unit.”

“Is it possible for a client to do a shamanic journey where they ask their own spirit teacher
to assist I this reprogramming?” I ask Glorianna. “Of course. Your client does not even
need to understand the process to request this of their spirit teacher. It is simply a matter
of desiring wholeness to be restored,” was her reply. I tell her that I am thinking of a
client whose early training was to always be on guard for the worst to happen.
Even though she was and is tiny in stature, she was often put in the place of
protecting an older sibling from being severely abused by her father. She
recounts memories at age four of crouching under the table while dishes were
being flung around the room by out of control adults who were supposed to help
her feel safe, supported and loved. This programming that the world is not safe
was instilled so young and so consistent that today as a highly functioning adult,
when something negative happens in her life, it overshadows all the other good
or positive things that might have occurred in that same day. Her “conditioning”
tends toward the negative is another way of communicating this. Her mind is
telling her not to allow this pattern, but the early entrainment is constantly pres-
ent which has created such anxiety for her that she has been diagnosed with
Panic Disorder. What she experiences, in day to day life is extreme anxiety of
being alone, of traveling on a bus to college, that she will have a panic attack dur-
ing class and have to leave the middle of a lesson. Yet, in spite of this terrible anx-
iety, she remains a deeply loving and lovable person.

I continued, wanting to be as clear as I can about the serious disruption of this

dear person’s life. In a soul remembering healing session for this client, the infor-
mation received was that her soul is here to bring unconditional love. The conflict
between her knowing this is her true nature and the survival pattern creates the
severe anxiety that limits her daily activities. As with many clients, there is also a
family genetic component to this anxiety. I ask, Glorianna “Can she be guided by her
spirit teachers and power animal to reprogram this pattern? At this time her spirit teacher
had offered her specific rituals that she can do to assist with her reprogramming. I wonder
if setting the intention to reprogram her neurotransmitters would go to the very source of
the unbeneficial programs?”

Glorianna is aware of my concern that there is urgency on our planet for people to
transmute unbeneficial programs as quickly as possible to be more available to
contribute to the healing. “This still must be done case by case, or person by person.
Some people’s energy systems could not handle a sudden shift and others are quite capable
of swiftly movement out of old patterns. You will always be guided by your own spirit
teachers to discern what is appropriate in any moment. By all means, use the intention for
reprogramming whenever it is advised. We will cooperate with you!” (It is important to
note here, that our client has followed through with neurotransmitter reprogram-
ming journeys. Her spirit teachers have given her several sessions of re-wiring
those early destructive thought patterns. They are moving slowly with her as she
continues to develop more trust in her relationship with them. At the writing of
this book, she has been able to complete graduate school!)

“What else do I need to know about frequencies?” I ask Glorianna. Her response was to
continue practicing!

As often happens when I get instructions from my teachers, I was guided to a

book by Penney Peirce entitled Frequency, the Power of Personal Vibration.50 Peirce
defines frequency as the number of waves that pass through a specific point in a
certain period of time; the rate of occurrence of anything. She refers to the term
“home frequency: as the vibration of one’s soul as it expresses through the body, emotions,
and mind; a frequency of awareness and energy that conveys the most accurate experience
of heaven and earth as possible.” 51

Peirce states the premise of her book in the introduction. “I absolutely know that
you can, under your own steam, dissolve the shell that separates you from a higher
experience of Self and a much better life. You don’t need gurus or to be catapulted into
supernatural experiences by dramatic events; you are becoming such a high -frequency
being right in you physical body that what used to be metaphysical, transpersonal, and
paranormal is now most ordinary. Some missing pieces of the big picture are making their
way into your consciousness now-- and this new understanding is facilitating the
‘tipping point’ into the Intuition Age for all of us.” 52

I appreciate Peirce’s inclusion of the scientific verification of her premise that

moves through her book as well as her style of recapping in each chapter. Her
recap of “home frequency” is beneficial. “You are surrounded by energy vibrations in
the outside world, from the eighty-one octaves of electromagnetic frequencies, to the vibra-
tions of sound and heat, to the earth’s Schumann resonance, to the basis wavicles
[wave/particle] of matter, Some are perceptible through your senses, but most are not. In
your inner world, you’re alive with vibrating waves of energy and consciousness, from the
cycles of your breath and heartbeat of your electrical brain waves. Within your brain wave
levels are a variety of awarenesses, from the seven kinds of chakric consciousness to
awareness of after-death experiences and other dimensions. You can traverse the
frequency scales with your sensitivity and discover new worlds and knowledge in each
frequency. Your personal vibration or energy state is a blend of the contracted or
expanded frequencies of your body, emotions, and thoughts at any given moment. The
more you allow your soul to shine through you, the higher your personal vibration will
be. Your personal vibration is affected by other people’s vibrations and the vibrations of
the world, yet ultimately, how you want to feel is your choice.” 53

Perhaps what Peirce’s most valuable contribution to her understanding of

frequencies is her clarification that the process of living from our own “home
frequency” is not mysterious or complicated. Living from one’s home frequency
requires a letting go. “Letting go is not about sacrifice, nor does it breed lazy inactivity;
it’s simply a return to Being. It is a shift from an assertive focus on action and results in
a softer, intuitive state where you will ‘be with,’ notice, and appreciate what’s in the
moment with you. It’s about moving from noise to silence. When done right, letting go is
about centering, and it always leads to your home frequency.”54

Reclaiming the ability to decide (based upon our “home frequency”) what fre-
quency works for us is part of the joy of being in physical form. In any given
moment in time we can be open to whatever emotion we experience. We can
choose what to do with that emotion or event based upon the frequency that we
consciously select. In this process of choice, we are participating in one of the
most profound transformational periods of history on our planet. It also seems
clear to me that the more adept we become at living from our home frequency,
the greater our comfort level will be to follow our birthright of communicating
with our multidimensional neighbors. It is as simple as setting our intention to
adjusting our frequency to what is compatible with those with whom we wish to
communicate. Whether we shift our physical body, or only our consciousness, to
other dimensions is less important than that we can, indeed, communicate and
commune in a clearly defined, intentional process.

Richard Bartlett, N.D. offers another perspective of frequencies in his CD series

“The Matrix Energetics Experience, Shift Your Consciousness with the Energies
and Hidden Frequencies of the Universe.”55 In his workbook included in the Ma-
trix Energetics Experience, Bartlett tells his own experience of walking into the
office of his medical practice one day several years ago and heard a voice saying,
“Today we are going to learn about the 21 universal frequencies that govern healing and
disease in the human species.”56 Being familiar with that “voice of his guides” 57 he
began listening and writing down the descriptions of all 21 frequencies. He also
gathered together others of like mind, concentrating on each frequency until they
all felt they had a solid foundation for describing the properties of each. He
teaches this process in his seminars. As he continued working with these
frequencies, he has come to believe that “they represent a kind of self-healing or self-
development program. They begin with a state of primal energy, and progress through the
development of the body, mind, and spirit. The final state is a point of integration that
allows you to pop into a unified field -- an experience of oneness or Zero-Point-field
consciousness. This transition is made in your nervous system, your body, and your
awareness. The 21 frequency system is thus, unlike any other technology I have
encountered or heard described. Each of the frequencies has its own set of attributes and
correspondences, based on what I and others have experienced. Frequency 21, for example,
seems to be able to take people into shamanic or out-of-body states, enabling them to talk
to spirits or even to have an experience of visiting the future.” 58

What I appreciate with Bartlett’s work is that he recommends we “play” with

these frequencies and learn for ourselves their possibilities. Session six of the CD
describes these frequencies and cards are enclosed for personal practice. He even
offers a design of a control panel for a more concrete “experience”! His main
emphasis is that by simply paying attention to what happens as you practice, you
will develop your sensitivity to each of the frequencies.59

This brings me full circle. I meet with my own guides to continue accessing their
contributions of how we humans can work with our frequencies to expand our
own potential as a species! I hear Glorianna calling to me. She is laughing. “Have
you counted how many frequency shifts you have already made in your earlier meetings
with us? We took you to a number of places that required a frequency shift and because
you trust us you simply allowed the necessary shifts to occur within you, with no ill
affects!” I remember how I used to feel somewhat disoriented initially and that
passed quite quickly. “Was that all in my head?” I asked. “Yes, and no” she replied.
“You were somewhat anxious initially because we were new in our relationship. You were
also guided to spaces with differing frequencies so that you could begin to trust your own
body’s ability to adjust more easily. Your body made the necessary adjustments in
frequencies, not aided by us. As you have read in your more scientific material your body
is, in fact, created to be able to shift frequencies as needed or chosen. It is simply that it is
time on your planet for the majority of people to become aware of and to live from this
ability inherent in all.”

A persistent question continues to plague my mind. “So, Glorianna, we have the

technology, both from a scientific and metaphysical evidenced based research, that we can
shift our vibration, our frequency to join you or others that are appropriate at any time.
Is it as simple as practicing this skill? ”Her quick reply to me is, “Both science and
metaphysics rely upon relationship for success! As you are experiencing in this moment,
relationship does not depend upon close proximity, only intention!” My dyslexic brain
is doing the equivalent of wringing its synapses! I feel the need of one of Bartlett’s
graphs! To which Glorianna responds “the holographic image will do for both of us.”

I suddenly see myself as a hologram in front of me, sitting on a large, red velvet
pillow. As I set my intention to meet with Glorianna I begin to see this image of
myself starting to glow from within. My vibration continues to expand out be-
yond my body while I remain peaceful as if in a meditative state. As the holo-
gram of my body remains on the pillow, I am also shifting my frequency and find
myself sliding into a space with Glorianna. Light is the constant. I am filled with
Light. My Light body self transports itself to meet with her. She is also Light in
her holographic self. The part of me who continues writing all of this experience
with my fingers on the computer is also created of Light. We are made of the
same energy perceived as Light. We simply live in differing vibrational frequen-
cies that we can connect to with our intentions.

“Are you communicating that as I truly understand myself as a holographic being I can
then easily come to meet you in your dimension including my physical body?” I’m
working on internalizing this and I want this to be accurate. “Yes!” was her quick
reply. “You’ve got it! Many have moved into other dimensions when they were immersed
in their imaginal state of being, removed from the demands of logic by their mind’s
training. The newly (re)discovered scientific understandings of the quantum plenum,
of non-local energy and additional dimensions of experience; gives the rational,
left-hemisphere mind the opportunity to allow itself to be retrained! You sometimes refer
to this as a ‘systems upgrade’, which helps you to move out of your head and into your
heart’s experience.”

As Glorianna was communicating this I began to feel the holographic image of

myself sitting on the red velvet pillow merge with the aspect of me typing this
message. I began to feel myself expanding to the point that my fingers would no
longer function on the keyboard. As I relaxed into the experience, I felt myself
expand into what is for me the familiar transfigured state with no awareness of
my physical body, yet aware of an essence of me hearing music from my
partner’s workspace. I had the clear sense that I am to practice this exercise and
at some point, again with clear intention in place, I will be in another location
with Glorianna in a more physical way than I have experienced so far. “Is this
perception correct?” I ask her. “Yes, of course. This is one way your brain will let go of
old limiting perceptions to permit you to experience what you choose. There are other
ways, of course. We believe this will work for you and be less frustrating for all your
endeavors. You are basically walking others through the corridors of belief that restrict
your human capacities and opening pathways into more beneficial avenues. It is simply
time for this to occur for everyone not just a select few.”

In the Ringing Cedar Series book entitled Co-Creation, the author Vladimir Megre
posses a next question to Anastasia, the wise woman recluse whom he met living
in the taiga in Russia. “Tell me, Anastasia, are you able to teleport yourself in space? I
mean: moving your body from one place to another?” Her response was, “Vladimir,
everybody has that kind of ability.” 60 She knows him well enough to know that he
must be shown rather than hear a lot of words, so she suddenly disappears and
appears across the lake. She then disappears from there back to be beside him
again. He continues to overcome his skeptical nature by pressing her further.
“And can Man also transport his body to another planet?” She replies, “Distance plays
absolutely no role here. It will move itself to whatever place your thought dictates. After
all, your thought goes to the destination first. It is also what assembles and puts together
again the body that was earlier dissolved in space.” 61

Vladimir presses her more. “If I wanted to dissolve my body, what should I be thinking
about?” “You have to visualize all of its matter, right down to the tiniest atom, right to
the nucleus, and see how the particles create an outwardly chaotic movement in the
nucleus, and then mentally dissolve them in space. Then assemble them in their former
sequence, in their outwardly chaotic movement in the nucleus, producing it accurately. It
is all very simple. Just the way children play with blocks.” Vladamir continues his
questions. “But mightn’t it turn out that another planet there wouldn’t be a suitable
atmosphere to breathe?” Anastasia patiently responds, “That is what I am saying -- it
is dangerous to transport one’s body without thinking it through carefully. There are a lot
of things to take into account ahead of time.” 62
As this dialogue continues it becomes clear that Anastasia is gently coaxing
Vladamir, an entrepreneur business man, to begin considering the value in his life
of choosing to use what she calls our second or nonmaterial self to experience an
expansion of his perceptions of reality. When he is ready she guides him into an
experience of another world. He writes of his experience, ”If it is to be assumed that
with Anastasia’s help I fell asleep and had a dream, the fullness of my sensations and the
clarity of my awareness of everything I saw can in no way be compared with any human
dream” 63

I realize that by including the above excerpts from the controversial Ringing
Cedars series, it brings into sharp focus my purpose for writing this book.
Even when I was a very small child, I knew that living in connection with other
realities beyond what we see, taste, and hear is part of our heritage as human
beings. This connection enriches, guides, and transforms the possibilities in our
day-to-day existence. So it seems natural to me to continue expanding that
connection by including our physical body, when appropriate. Vladamir’s
probing questions of Anastasia are a reminder that experiencing our nonmaterial
or second self and other states of reality, is still a stretch for many humans.

Tanis Helliwell offers another personal story of this ability to shift out of third
dimensional world. In her time spent living and visiting Ireland, she has contin-
ued developing a relationship with a leprechaun. Over time he has encouraged
her to learn how to move into other dimensions. The following is her description
of her process: “Although I have experienced it many times, it is difficult to describe in
words what a shift in time feels like. By using a neutral wisp of a thought -- almost a
thought before a thought -- I reverse the magnetic energy poles that keep us in this three-
dimensional world. This allows me to go through a black hole, a tunnel in my third eye, to
travel to other locations, as well as forward and backward in time. Elementals have no dif-
ficulty moving in space and time, and do so matter-of-factly. The leprechaun has informed
me that this skill will become a mode of transportation for humans in the future. An
evolved human, or elemental, can occasionally catapult someone else into another time.”64

In my healing practice, I see people of all ages shifting from feeling overwhelmed
by the complexities of their daily life to learning new perceptions about them-
selves and their personal abilities. These shifts occur through the experiences that
they have during the shamanic journey process. Of course, this is only one way
we humans can immerse ourselves in a totally different reality while we are
simultaneously living in this one. Yet, this oldest of humankind’s ways to enter
into other dimensions of reality--out of our ordinary time/space continuum--
changes our perceptions, thoughts, and feelings. It gives us new perspectives on
how to live in this life. these changes in perspective shift our perceptions of
reality and help us to realize that it is time for us all to embrace the abilities we
have. Becoming an expanded human being aware of our multidimensional con-
nections is a part of our birthright!

I feel Glorianna again trying to get my attention. “Remember,” I hear her tell me,
“that when Anastasia says it is as easy as children with their building blocks, it is. Your
cells knew exactly how to divide and create more of the correct cells to build your specific
body. Why would this innate wisdom not still be present with you for this adventure? It
is just a continuation of your becoming.” I tell her that I feel like I need to practice
right now! She agrees and says to keep on typing. I feel myself becoming filled or
expanding with Light from inside of me. This time I am immediately transported
into myself sitting here in my healing room typing. I then I feel my physical body
or its energy body expand. I can still hear the washing machine, hear the water
fountain’s gentle trickle, feel my thirst, and also sense a calmness that was not
present before.

This time I notice a rearranging of my energy system, especially in my head. I

ask, “Where shall we go?” and I hear, “Here of course to my domain.” A group is
gathered with Glorianna. At first I cannot see them very clearly. Then they move
forward more into my vision. As usual I feel their energies more than see details.
“This is a collective,” says Glorianna. “They have trained themselves to be of one
mind/thought/feeling in order to communicate on a frequency not possible for only one.
Would you like to join them?” she asks me directly. “Of course. What do I need to do?”
“Simply face them and tune your frequency in with theirs.” Somehow for the first
time I know I can do this. I first see them as colors. I move into a meditative
deeper state and it’s hard to type again. Then I am aware of somehow becoming
one with them without losing my sense of “me.” It is pleasurable.

“With your permission we will adjust your vibration a bit to relax your body more
effectively.” Glorianna instructs. “Ok with me,” I reply and immediately feel tension
in my head release. We form a circle around Glorianna. She somehow seems to be
conducting us! She says, “Just pay attention to what you notice.” What I notice is
more going on in my physical body, like shifting energy, releases of tension. My
thoughts are that she is preparing me to be more comfortable disassembling and
reassembling my atoms, becoming aware of what that feels like so I can always
know what is happening. In this way I can take my personal responsibility for
my safety. I feel her pleasure in this awareness.

“Should I be doing this in the middle of the night when there are less distractions,” I ask
her. “That would be easier and yet not necessary at this stage of your training,” she
replied. “Just continue noticing.” I feel as if the top of my head is lifting off, then
my atoms follow to reassemble or catch up. ”Perhaps you are sharing with me that I
can use a little more experience of disassembling and reassembling at this point in my
practice.” I said. “This is correct,” came her reply. I now feel myself disengaging
from the group and becoming my individual energy self again. This coincides
with my need to stop writing. “Thank you. I’ll be back soon,” I say and feel myself
clearly in my healing room and feeling hungry!
 33. New Teacher, New Assignment

As you have read in these pages, the Whistling Vessels ceremony has created
many opportunities for my spirit teachers to advance my multidimensional
training! I was aware from my previous encounters, that the sounds of the vessels
created a portal. I discovered a different perspective on how this occurs in
Jonathan Goldman’s book, Shifting Frequencies, Sounds for Vibratory Activation.65
His style is often to ask the reader a question and then proceed to answer it based
upon his extensive years of experience. “What does… any dimensional gateway do?
They allow a shift in frequencies. Travel to the different planes of consciousness or god
levels is simply a matter of frequency-shifting, which can be achieved through sound,
light, movement, geometry, crystals and many other modalities (including breathing and
visualization). These modalities can be done separately, or they can be combined. It does
not matter. What matters is that an individual (or a group) is able to shift frequencies.” 66

He continues expanding upon this subject. “It is also possible to travel not only
through vibrational levels but great distances using …gateways. It is thought that the
Mayans were able to move from one galactic system to another using the suns in those
systems as gateways. How? They would…’dematerialize’ in the heart of the Sun of our
system and ‘rematerialize’ in the heart of the sun of another system…The suns, vibrating
at similar frequencies, could be used to create portals from one place to another. It is a bit
like transporters in Star Trek.”

“The Mayans also had the ability of intragalactic travel on an individual basis…
Most of the more highly attuned beings in different galaxies and dimensions are able to
achieve individual (or small group) travel without a vehicle… but actually [through] a
unified field created as a group construct or thought form – built by collective group
consciousness and not a machine at all. The gateways to travel to other stars or planes
have been known about for many millennia…The key to any sort of transdimensional,
interstellar or any similar form of travel is the creation of a gateway.”67

Even though my own spirit teachers have given me similar information and
personal experiences described by Jonathan Goldman, I am still always surprised
at how quickly a frequency shift can open a gateway or portal. This time as the
frequency shift occurred through the sounds of the whistling vessels, my group
of women shaman came rushing through the gateway. They grabbed my hands
and I felt them encouraging me to keep up with them. We ended up in a clearing
that seemed like the one where I had first met this amazing group. We waited
silently. After a time of nothing happening but all our attention riveted in the
center of the circle, a glowing form of a being began to emerge. This being was so
filled with light that its features were indistinguishable. Yet the presence was of
pure unconditional love. I don’t think any of us knew what to expect. This being
then gazed around at each one of us, acknowledging us without words. When
she (it felt to me like feminine energy) faced me she extended her right hand
towards me in an invitation. I acknowledged her request and asked her why she
had appeared to us at this time. She replied that it was time for me to move
forward with new information for the multidimensional book. She chose to use
this opportunity to introduce herself to me and invited me to meet with her for
this purpose. I was so moved by her presence that I could only nod my head in
agreement. She slowly turned again to each woman in the shaman’s group and
moved up and out of our vision. My attention was then called back to ordinary
reality.

It was a few weeks later that the time opened up for the being’s next visit with
me. For several nights, I had been drawn to continue my meditation practice into
the early dawn hours. This time I was feeling curious about this new spirit
teacher. I set my intention in a journey to meet with her. My first awareness was
a large blue sphere ahead of me. As I moved toward it I felt myself being drawn
inside it. It was like no other dimension I had yet visited. The being of light was
there and greeted me warmly. She said again that it was time for me to move
forward in my “studies” of other dimensions. We walked down a long corridor
into a round room. There were several beings gathered there. All had large blue
spheres as their heads. Otherwise their forms appeared much like other beings I
have previously met.

I asked why I was invited to come to this place. The being of light responded that
it was time for me to begin mapping dimensions. I admit I felt the old reluctant
energy return inside me. I had no idea what mapping dimensions would entail. I
said I needed more information to begin to feel that this was real. “It could begin
with knowing how to call you.” I stated. Most of my spirit teachers have given me a
name to make connections with them easier. Moved by her presence of light, I
had not yet asked her name. She responded, “Just call me an enlightened one,”
with what clearly felt like humor. “It is time for you to learn mapping. You have
experienced quite a variety of beings and dimensions by now, your earth plane time. This
will also continue, but for those on your planet who like order to support their shifting
dimensions, a map is necessary at this point in your ‘lessons’. Most of the people on your
planet are accustomed to following some kind of a map when they are going to a place
they have not traveled to before. You are one who is capable of providing this for interested
people.”

She continued, “But now it is time for you to receive the sleep your physical body
requires, so return when you can and we will proceed with your training. You can use
your computer so that you do not have to transcribe this information. We have sufficient
connection with you to be as clear and accurate as we need to be.” With that she
dismissed me while she remained with the beings with blue sphere heads.
I noted that it seemed comfortable meeting beings with such a different
appearance and I realized that I am becoming more and more acclimated to other
life forms. This certainly is a combination of expanding trust in the guidance of
my teachers and trust in my own ability to discern what feels real even when
presented by a new experience or unusual looking beings.

At my next opportunity to connect with the enlightened being, I easily felt her
presence and knew I simply needed to ask my power animal to take me to the
blue sphere where she would be waiting. The frequency shift happened quickly.
There were several of the beings with blue spheres with her also. I greeted them
all and asked how I was to begin the mapping instructions. I didn’t feel the same
resistance this time, only anticipation. “You feel less resistance because you
experienced how easy it is to designate a destination, request your teacher and power
animal to guide you safely to it. And here we are! Because this is a new relationship for
you, feel free to request for us to slow down or provide additional information, as you
require it. Come and sit at this terminal.”

When I entered this space I had became aware of a vast screen that looked like a
computer or TV screen. One of the beings was sitting in front of it, attending to it
with great concentration. Without taking his eyes off the screen he motioned for
me to sit beside him. What I saw did not make any sense initially to my mind, but
something was very compelling about the images I witnessed.

“What am I looking at?” I asked. “Simply let go of your thinking self for a moment and
invite your heart center to open to this experience without censoring your perceptions.”
He responded. The enlightened being stood behind me and I begin to notice a
warmth filling me, relaxing me, and a feeling of melding into another frequency.
As this was happening I realized that the images in front of me began to make
sense. I saw some of the dimensions I have visited over the past few years. I
recognized a number of geographic features that I had been introduced to in
some of the images and in others I saw beings that I remembered. I had the
distinct feeling that I was simply to be aware of what I was perceiving without
trying as yet to understand what this all had to do with mapping. So I just
enjoyed the memories evoked by this process. I witnessed beings traveling from
one dimension to another and I recalled some of the journeys where I was shown
how this could occur.

My mind began to fill with questions, so I asked, “I can see how those of you in these
dimensions can transport from one to another but I don’t yet see how us earth bound
people can have the same potential.” The response was quick and clear. “You are only
earth bound if you choose to be earth bound. You are here, are you not? Much of the
turmoil on you planet would be seen as unnecessary as more of you learn to travel for
new perspectives. If you can do this why is it not also possible for many others of your
species? It is your job to convince people that this dimensional travel is practical and
beneficial, individually and globally.”
“What is my next step?” I ask in an attempt to overcome my first impulse that this
was too big a job for me. I have been assured in the past that I am not the only
one with this assignment. “You are sitting here right now doing it. You must feel as
comfortable as possible to reassure others and inspire confidence that this is the right time
for this evolution in your human destiny.” She replies. So I turned my attention back
to the screen in front of me. I intentionally relaxed even more deeply and moved
into my well-practiced transfigured state to observe.

I continued to feel my own vibrations shifting as I was shown scene after scene. I
was aware of when I felt out of my comfort zone and when there was a memory
recall of a dimension I have visited. My mind persistently wondered if the
mapping process was about images or coordinates as is described in the Remote
Viewing done by our military. My new teacher anticipated this question. “Images
are coordinates, my dear. On your earth plane maps and present GPS systems the lines
connecting specific towns and cities and numbering of the routes are the images. You set
an intention to follow the routes to your destination. Even on your smart phones you can
set your intention to see the house where you currently live and there it is. When you
asked to meet me at this time, you set your intention to meet me in the blue sphere. Your
mind recalled the blue sphere, so it was easy to facilitate that request. If you are guiding
someone else to this place, you also would set the intention or have them set the intention
to have their power animal or teacher guide them to the blue sphere for a specific purpose.
With the trust and confidence you have gained, and their trust in their own spirit
teachers, they will arrive safely with all the adjustments in their vibrations occurring as
needed. You will accompany those people designated for this experience if they do not yet
have their own guides and or power animals. That is really not so complicated, is it?”

“So to answer your question, your next step is to continue becoming more and more
comfortable with a variety of dimensions and how it feels as you shift your vibrations to
visit them. You are therefore mapping the dimensions in your own consciousness in
preparation for acquainting others to do so in their right time. This assignment is
intended to be an adventure in evolution of your species that alters the future for you
and for us as well. It is all about relationship as you already know.”

As my new teacher concluded her response to my question, there appeared to be

a “shift change” for the beings who attend to this huge screen. My teacher
advised me that this was a good time to return to my dimension and absorb this
“lesson” with more to follow. I thanked all who are near and gently felt myself
shifting back to my healing room.

At my next opportunity for dimensional exploration, I set the intention for a

meeting with the one who calls herself an enlightened one. I wanted to ask her
what dimension would be a good next one to visit and what frequency would I
need to set to accomplish this visitation. I could feel her presence waiting for me
to declare my intention. She appeared with a smile. “You see how well you have
integrated many of the steps required for this adventure to continue. We are pleased. Do
not worry that your earth plane activities often prevent you from participating with us on
a more regular basis. Your first commitment is to be fully present in the activities of your
daily life. Your life is one of service and requires balancing on all human levels. What is it
you wish of me?”

I replied that it had occurred to me to ask you what dimension would be the next
best one for me to visit as a part of my assignment. I appreciate your perspective.

She appeared thoughtful for a moment. “In general, any dimension where there is
wisdom to be gained that is useful for your planet is advisable from my perspective. I do,
however, have my favorites and would be glad to share those with you for direction. You
must be the one to decide what feels right for you. We, too, have places to visit for a
variety of purposes as you have previously been advised. It seems that what is best for
you are those dimensions where the inhabitants have acquired the ability to create, design
peaceful ways of being even in the midst of chaotic energies. Would you not agree?”

“I do agree,” I responded. “Would I simply ask for a shift in my vibrational frequency

that would transport me to such a dimension, or do I need to be more specific?”

“It is not necessary to be more specific for your own teachers know how to guide you
safely there with you setting the clear intention. The concept of clarity of intention cannot
be overly emphasized.”

“Thank you for this guidance. I’ll continue following through with my new assignment!”
And with this recommitment, she flows away, smiling at my excitement.
 34. The Training Continues With An Enlightened One

I feel the presence of the one who calls herself an enlightened one. I set my
intention to meet with her and immediately begin to feel a frequency shift. To my
surprise I am not guided to the blue sphere and wonder where I will be exploring
with her. As I think this, I feel her hand reaching out to mine, gently drawing me
through a membrane. She places her two palms up in the air inviting me to place
my own hands against hers. We are merging our energies. It is as if I am looking
out of her eyes. “This accelerates your ability to interpret what you experience.” I hear
telepathically.

We appear to be waiting for the arrival of someone. I see a group of four beings
gliding along towards us. As they approach I begin to see their energy systems.
The word I hear telepathically is balance. “You have been told previously, I believe,
that balance is what is frequently missing on your planet. These beings are responsible for
supporting and reinforcing balance in their dimension. They will take us to a place where
you can observe how they accomplish this ” I meet these beings with a nastase greet-
ing and they acknowledge me in the same manner. They then turn and we follow
them.

The best way for me to describe what I see is that it is like the northern lights
shifting and dancing all around us. The energy feels playful. I am aware that I am
observing the energy of everything wherever my eyes are drawn. Rather than
feeling chaotic, I feel peaceful. “When you are aware of everything as energy, it is
easier to remember that all is connected to the same Universal Energy of Creation.” This
comes from one of the four beings who turns to address me. “With this awareness,
why would anyone harm another or any other life form?” he inquires of me.

“I totally understand and agree. I am sometimes at a loss on how to communicate

this with people in my dimension who have been wounded by another or by life
circumstance.” I reply. He continues his explanation, “This is when we do ‘energy
repair’ work in this dimension. When balance is restored, the impact of being wounded by
any manner including diseases of the container you call your body can be corrected. This
does not have to be a painful process as we often observe on your planet. Your vehicles
[bodies] desire wholeness. In this dimension we invite you to learn additional ways to
create the harmony your bodies crave and are entitled to experience. As harmony is
restored internally, then your external harmony will also be restored. You know this to be
so.”

“Yes, I do know this to be so. What can you teach me that I can bring back to my world to
help us to restore this wholeness?” I ask. We are now entering a tunnel that has clear
glass-like material arching over the ceiling surrounding us with dancing colors.
The tunnel leads into a cathedral space with smaller clear cubes positioned
around like the spokes of a wheel. All these spaces are connected to the center
where we are standing. I see beings moving in some of them who appear to be
focusing on one or more beings like themselves. I ask if we can observe what is
happening in one of these areas. We move towards one closest to us. A tall being
smiles and invites us inside. Once inside I feel that all these spaces are connected
even though I see clear walls surrounding us. “Because these walls are also energy,
even as you are energy, there is no separation between any one of us.” The tall being
telepathically speaks to me. “This relative, for we are all relatives here, has been
experiencing fatigue from following his chosen purpose, so we are replenishing his energy.
This is much like you would offer a blood transfusion on your planet to someone in need
of that service. This, however, is a very natural replenishment of his energy to sustain him
to continue with his balance restored. If he were to forget this opportunity to restore his
balance or choose to overlook it as not important, then he would be less effective for
himself and for his community. When one of us is less effective, then we cannot move
forward as we each desire.”

“I understand this premise. How do you restore his balance in this place?” I ask. “We
support him to remember his connection to the Source of All Energy. Some can do this
through being in this space like a retreat from other stimulation. It is then easier to allow
the vibration of belonging to be restored. Some can do this with one of us assisting a
recalibration of their energy system to a higher vibration to sustain them more
adequately. There is no resistance to this process so it is quite effortless. Some who
come here do so not so much for repair but it is simply time for what you are used to
calling a ‘system upgrade’ in your contemporary language.”

“How do you know what kind of energy upgrade or repair is needed for each specific being
who comes to you?” I inquire. “When you are in tune with the vibration of harmony,
each one who comes here automatically aligns with the vibration of harmony. Each of us
called to this form of activity must remain in harmony with Universal Energy to be
effective. It is not so much different from you being in what you call your transfigured
self. Is not one of your goals to live in that state of being all of your days and nights? It is
what we do here and what is possible on your earth plane. When you come to this
dimension or bring others with you, you have the experience of being in complete balance
so that your body remembers it is possible. This encourages you to seek it out in whatever
ways are available on your earth plane. Energy is the same there as here. We simply
devote our priority to maintain harmony. It is what we do to accomplish what life requires
of us in this dimension.”

I am excited to ask this next obvious question. “So one practical purpose of
dimensional shifting is to offer opportunities for others to experience the frequency of
harmony. This, then, supports their body to remember this frequency and make daily
choices to remain in it back on the earth plane?” The being responds by offering a
challenge to me. “Indeed, but there is so much more for your dimension to learn about
energy that we can offer to you if you and others are willing.”
I quickly respond, “I am willing and I know of others who would accept such an
invitation also. Would you give me another example of something that would be helpful
in my dimension? The more specific I can be, the easier it is for others to choose to join
with me.”

This being asked me to unmerge from my guide, an enlightened one, so he

could observe my energy system. I do so and realize that by being here in this
dimension my frequency had already adjusted itself to this place. “We can
demonstrate and support you to learn more advanced ways to shift your frequencies for
any situation presented to you until it becomes an automatic process. This would be most
useful in your dimension.” I agree and press him to continue by asking, “How would
you do this?” He replies, “We would begin by assessing your abilities to assess a wide
variety of energy beings here. We would then teach you ways to facilitate each of these
diverse combinations to return to balance. Until you are here for this intention I cannot
be more specific.”

I thank him for his patience with my questions and say I will accept his invitation
to come to this dimension with this specific intention to learn advanced ways of
maintaining the frequency of harmony in a variety of situations. He appears to be
pleased and nods to my guide who is waiting to support my return to the earth
plane. I thank her for providing me safe passage for this next step in my training.
 35. The Training Continues Further

I again set my intention to meet with the enlightened one to continue my

training. I immediately feel her energy and ask to be guided to where she is
residing. She reaches out her hand, smiling and draws me forward. It feels like
we will be going to a different location than my previous visit. She nods in
agreement. “You have consistently stated your desire to be able to safely bring others to
dimensions that can offer healing even when you were unaware that what you desired was
far more complicated than you had first imagined,” I heard her say telepathically to
me. “It is not so much complicated as requiring serious intention and commitment to
this as a project. You have demonstrated this to us so we have decided to honor your
request if you are still willing.”

“Of course, I am still willing and excited,” I respond. “You do not show us evidence of
coming from your earth plane ego, but from a sincere desire to be of assistance to those
who are suffering and wish to be of service to your earth,” she continues. I respond
that it is also my desire to fulfill a soul agreement. She nods and it is evident that
she already knows this.

“What is my next step?” I ask her. “I can think of several people we work with whose
healing has reached the limits of our traditional medicine and who truly wish to continue
their life journey in a physical body that is healthy. I’m thinking especially of a fourteen
year old boy whose soul is new in a physical body and is suffering from unusual physical
and psychological symptoms. He is so fearful at this point that it does not seem probable
that he would be able to use the twelve-point star process.” Instead of a response, I see
and image of myself holding his two hands in mine. As my frequencies shift, I
find that I am transporting a part of his spirit to “the place of healing”. I am de-
scribing to him what I see and he is opening up to this experience. At one point
he also begins to describe what he is experiencing. “This experience is quite brief
and yet long enough for a vibrational shift to enhance his immune system. It will take a
few of these sessions to accomplish what is necessary”, I am told. “Any part of him that
finds this useful will accept this healing. It is gentle and regulated to his specific body
system. You will journey in preparation so you are familiar with the co-ordinates of the
dimension selected for this occasion.”

I am so excited. “I think his mother would be willing for this opportunity if I can
describe it in a way that is clear and useful. Her son will also say if it feels OK for him to
go ahead with this method. We are looking for something that will sustain him to be
comfortable in his own body. He is already weary of struggling to maintain his ordinary
daily life. A spirit teacher appeared to him once when he was with us but it frightened him
and this teacher said that perhaps it was too soon and disappeared. I feel like I would
invite him to take a guided imagery journey with me and see how he responds with the
agreement that if it is uncomfortable we will stop. I do feel that I have a comfort level of
other dimensions that will be supportive wherever you guide me on his behalf.” She
responds, “This is so and we will do our part.” Then she emphasizes, “It is the hold-
ing of his hands or some physical contact with him that will facilitate the transfer of
vibration to his body. Wherever he is comfortable being touched will be sufficient. If he
prefers his mother’s touch as well we will work with this quite proficiently. He need not
understand the extent of this ‘treatment’ but some part of him will be comforted.”

“What we are reminding you as you think of this young boy is that any essence of the
energy system of any person you bring to us can experience whatever healing vibration is
appropriate. This accomplished healing is transferred to the entirety of the physical body.
As you have been shown and told many times now, everything is created of energy. All
energy is connected, taking different forms through different wave forms. Therefore, it is
natural for the energy healing experienced in any dimension to also restore the balance
the human body desires and requires. It is exactly what occurs in your healing practice
when you facilitate the return of a soul essence to a person. It has been in some place of
healing and restoration so that when it is returned, it then infuses that person with her of
his own vibration of wholeness to whatever extent they can receive. It is the same when
you bring an essence of a person to a healing dimension where restoration of balance can
occur and then returned to the physical container to which it belongs. The physical con-
tainer, or body, as you call it can then choose what is beneficial for the wellbeing of that
person. All is energy and therefore compatible. Any integration is usually only to
accommodate the personality that holds perceptions of what is and is not possible on your
earth plane. These perceptions can change with personal experience that expands a
person’s view of reality. This is greatly needed at this time on your planet.”

This teacher continues sharing her wisdom with me. ”What you will learn from this
is a perceptual shift of your own. Your original desire and focus was to learn how to bring
another human being from your dimension into a dimension that can offer healing. What
you are learning is that it is only necessary to bring an essence of a human being to a
healing dimension. When that essence is escorted to the appropriate dimension, the
appropriate healing is assessed and provided. The essence is then returned to the human
container and assimilated. At this point on your planet, this is a more advisable method of
dimensional healing. Each person who agrees to this form of healing becomes part of the
paradigm shift of your human race. They have received a personal experience of their
multidimensional neighbors and their perception of reality is changed.”

And with that final comment, she indicates my next step is to journey the next
time I am available and we can ‘walk through’ a possible rehearsal. I said I would
like that and as always thanked her for her guidance.
 36. An Open-Ended Conclusion

Hank Wessselman, PhD. has written a moving story about his relationship with
the famous Hawaiian Shaman, Hale Kealohalani Makua , in his book, The Bowl of
Light. 68 In part of his initial sharing with Makua, he described his perceptions as
an anthropologist about shamans. He writes; “All authentic shamans discover, often
in childhood, that they have the ability to perceive spirit worlds of hidden things. They
possess the ability to enter trance very easily, and when they do, they literally ‘
regeography’ their conscious awareness in an altered state into a parallel reality which is
all around us all the time. It is called the spirit world in every culture because the first
thing the shamanic initiate learns is that this hidden world is inhabited. It is populated by
spiritual beings of various kinds, the spirits of nature, of the animals and plants and
elementals, as well as spirits of dead humans, the ancestors, many of whom may maintain
an active relationship with living individuals in their kin groups. Also found here are
higher dimensional levels where shamans may encounter the higher organizing
intelligences, sometimes called angels or guides.” 70

Makua responded to Wesselman, encouraging him to continue expanding his

perceptions as an anthropologist by telling him stories passed down to him from
generations of his shamanic ancestors. One of these stories was about a culture of
people called the Waitaha. He explained that at one point in their history, their
time on this planet was done, their contract complete. When Wesselman asked
where these people went, Makua’s response was, “They were done here, and they
were ready to go somewhere else. There are many life worlds, you know!”

I include these excerpts to establish, again, that one of my objectives in writing

this book is that there are many ‘life worlds’ to explore. There are many
dimensional beings willing to engage in relationship with us. These relationships
are available to those of us who are willing to acknowledge the reality of other
dimensions. From my personal experiences and those who have explored with
me, it is evident that long held yet limiting perspectives are changed in these
encounters. People are healed outside of our ordinary time or location in ways
not yet possible in our ordinary, third-dimensional world.

My excitement and confirmation of the value of this exploration is also expressed

by Meg Blackburn Losey, Ph.D. in her book, The Secret history of Consciousness,
Ancient Keys to Our future Survival. She writes. “As I entered into the unlimited
realms of consciousness, I found myself in a room that seemed to have no walls, I felt as if
I was somewhere before time as we know it. No matter how far I reached into my aware-
ness, I could identify no boundaries. A holographic pyramid hovered all around me, and I
saw myself inside it. At the same time, I saw myself about twenty feet away, watching
myself. And all that time, I was aware of myself standing in my living room. There were
three of me and I realized that I had gone multidimensional.” 71

Dr. Losey continued. “Inside the pyramid chamber, a new Master came. His robes were
violet, he felt older than time…He told me he was from the before times—the times before
the earth was formed and before the people who came before us inhabited the earth…
Together the new Master and I began to work with the energy in an entirely new and
different way. He stepped inside of my body. As I looked down at my arms, they were no
longer mine—they were the Master’s. As we worked in unison, my mentor had me feel
the energy he and I combined as well as the energy inside the person on the table. My new
Master showed me, in geometric patterns, how the energy was transmuting into a
completely changed form. We were literally changing the energy field of the person on the
table, harmonizing it, altering the frequencies of the energies, the shapes, and even the
way the different energies related to each other…I was startled to see that we had been
working on yet another dimensional version of me!,,,This was true interdimensionality.
I felt as if I had finally gone home.” 72

The noted physicist, Russsell Targ, offers his own confirmation of nonlocal
exploration as he writes in his autobiography, “Questioning reality is the essential
first step in the greatest opportunity we have as a species – the evolution of consciousness.
I believe we have completed our physical growth. Our brains are big enough. I am
proposing that species transcendence is the next evolutionary step for us to take: starting
first as animals looking for food, then to moderately self-aware humans trying to
understand nature, and finally to our destiny as beings with personal awareness of our
spacious and nonlocal consciousness transcending time and space.” 73

In our shamanic practice, my partner and I continue to see more and more
adults who do not have shamanic training, and some who do, who are having
experiences of slipping into other dimensions unexpectedly. They are seeking
support to interpret and maintain their insights and life transforming
experiences. Some have had to be hospitalized or placed on medication to help
them to safely re-integrate back into their body. It should be noted that with
increased cultural awareness of nonlocal opportunities, this trauma will be
unnecessary. At this point in time, however, when we meet with them, it is with
great relief that they observe that we have personal experience with creating a
container for them to come to their own awareness of what they have
experienced. This container invites them to re-evaluate the priorities in their lives
and to explore how their expanded awareness opens them to remember the
agreements their soul made prior to coming into their present physical body.
By container, I mean that our own evolving personal relationships with other
dimensional beings provides an energetic foundation so that we can easily hold
sacred space and provide the necessary support for our clients. The clients can
then determine for themselves what value their experiences holds for them. We
guide the pacing of their integration so that they can continue navigating daily
life. We honor their awakening with timely support, helping them to determine
what their next step might be in bringing what they have learned into the earth
plane reality. We have an expression that we repeat over and over again in our
workshops, training programs and individual sessions, “It’s not how far out you go,
but how well you come back and implement what you have received!”

We continue seeing children and young adults whose parents are worried
whether or not their beloved child has a mental health diagnosis or that they re-
quire another non-pathological context for their behaviors and experiences. With
the additional shamanic knowledge we can impart, and the examples we offer,
both parents and children visibly relax. As a result, I am even more convinced of
the importance and practicality of developing multidimensional relationships. I
can convincingly validate the experience of other people with my personal
experiences during the years this book evolved. My spirit teachers are right
again, to remind me that it is a soul agreement for me to explore relationships
with my multidimensional neighbors, to write this book and to speak of my
encounters whenever and wherever appropriate!

Most exciting to me are the results I’m seeing with my clients as I work with one
of my multidimensional teachers, Glorianna. Having worked with me for some
time, it has become easier for her to work with my clients in this realm. Her
relationship to me in this realm also allows her to also continue working with
some clients in their own living space, even when I am not present. Once I
introduce the client to working with Glorianna and a relationship is established,
she is able to offer vibrational healing as is needed. The benefit to clients who are
severely ill with diseases such as cancer is that she is available to aid them around
the clock! She shifts her own vibrations to be present in our earth dimension to
assist in pain relief and healing. With some individuals who feel more strongly
connected to other dimension than to this realm, Glorianna assists in reconnecting
clients with their other dimensional families. This “reunion” supports then to feel
more fulfilled and so more comfortable in the human world. It is very humbling
to witness the impact of these relationships!

My experiences have led me to confirm what I have always known since meeting
my first guide as a young child, relationships with the spirits and beings in other
dimensions can heal even the deepest wounds and can transform outmoded
ways of perceiving the world. In these relationships with my multidimensional
neighbors, I have learned to heal wounds that could have debilitated and limited
me. From the perspective of personal experience I can affirm realities not yet
confirmed by science. I honor a “comfort level” in these relationships that
deepens trust in myself as well as the variety of beings who continue to present
themselves to me. I can say with great certainty that relationship is the most
important portal. Relationship opens up and nurtures the ability to trust that, in
spite of all the chaos of this earth dimension, we are not alone. We have the
physical work of evolving to do because we are physical humans. We also have a
great deal to learn about the potential of intentionality and about trust. We have
much to explore about the significance of frequencies and vibrations in healing
the earth and ourselves. Now is the time for exploring the untapped opportuni-
ties of interdimensional relationships. This is our part. We have come to do this,
and remembering this is crucial to lead us into creative action. It is time for us to
comprehend how our actions impact other dimensions. We have direct access to
the Source of All That Is to guide, heal, inform, and encourage us to continue
exploring our expansive possibilities. I find this hopeful, exciting, and beneficial
beyond our present understanding!

What I have not accomplished at this point, is actually taking my physical body
into another dimension and back for the purpose of being able to safely support
others to do so. The expert guidance offered to me in my on-going relationships
with the variety of teachers from other dimensions I have met, have provided life
changing personal experiences, protocols, guidelines, maps, rituals, portals,
perspectives and encouragement on interdimensional shifting. I have added
others’ personal stories, others’ research including some relevant scientific data in
this area of interest. The latter has been included with awareness that my spirit
teachers have confirmed again and again that this is a personal exploration not a
scientific investigation!

My explorations at this point lead me to my next step which is to practice the art
of shifting my atoms within the space of my body, to accurately calibrate the
specific frequencies of the dimensions that I am invited to visit. Only when this is
firmly in place will I be encouraged to bring myself and others physically with
me for their healing. To accomplish this requires me to follow the premises I have
learned in my explorations to date: intention is critical to manifesting desired
outcome; learning the protocol required in different dimensions is mandatory;
offering something in return for the wisdom of our mulitidimensional neighbors
is interdimensional ethics; impeccability is the foundation of relationship on any
level of existence. Perhaps most important is that though portals exist every-
where, relationship is the primary portal through which we enter other dimen-
sions. This includes the dimension of ourselves.

I am deeply moved by the openness of the beings I have been introduced to, of
their concern for our planet and their desire to be of assistance to us. At one
point, one of my interdimensional teachers reminded me that this book is a
“walkthrough” kind of exploration. Again, I acknowledge that many of you who
read this have gone way beyond my recorded experiences. I encourage you to
continue your explorations--as will I!
 Acknowledgements

There is a saying that it takes a village to raise a child. It is also true that in many
cases it takes a community of loyal people to support the writing of a book. I
want to acknowledge their marvelous
assistance in this project. All of them
are like sacred points in a great circle.

My first spirit guide, Zelda introduced

me to her way of connecting with
helpful, healing spirits in non-physical
form. Ronette Stoddard, who is herself
now in the spirit world, introduced the
idea of becoming a shaman as the next
step my life path. This led me to take
to training in advanced shamanism
with the Foundation For Shamanic
Studies and to pursue on-going train-
ing with indigenous shamans.

I want to thank my readers who of-

fered useful and timely suggestions,
comments, and perspectives to
enhance this project. These include Carolyn Megan, Martha Jorz, Constance
Merrill, Johanna Leary, and Meg Bowles. I also want to thank all those people
who so willingly shared their stories with me.

There are no words to express my gratitude to my partner, Evelyn Rysdyk, who

was my writing coach, technical advisor, cover artist and offered her constant,
loving support beyond anything I could have imagined. Her acknowledgment of
me as a person and her incredible encouragement made this book possible.

My prayer for you is that you continue to develop supportive relationships in this
world and with your multidimensional neighbors so that you experience an
ever-deepening sense of joy.
 About The Author

C. Allie Knowlton, MSW LCSW, DCSW is a psychotherapist and shamanic

practitioner in private practice.

Ms. Knowlton’s primary commitment throughout her life is to support people

to tap into their profound inner resources and their connections to Spirit.

She is a graduate of Bangor Theological Seminary and was a pastor in rural

churches before shifting her focus to spirituality as a transformational resource
in psychotherapy.

Allie holds an MSW degree from University of Connecticut and is licensed in

Maine and New York.

Her shamanic training includes being a graduate of the Foundation for

Shamanic Studies East Coast Three-Year Program facilitated by noted
anthropologist, Michael Harner, PhD and Sandra Ingerman, LMFT, LPCC.
This program focused on shamanic healing and advanced shamanic techniques
from around the world. Ms. Knowlton has had the great privilege of being
able to study with Bhola Banstola from Nepal, AiChurek from Tuva, Fredy
“Puma” Quispe Singona from Peru and the late, Mikail Duvan, who was the last
remaining male shaman of the Ulchi People of Southeastern Siberia.

Ms. Knowlton co-founded Spirit Passages with her partner, Evelyn C. Rysdyk
to further provide individuals with the tools to become conscious
participants in their own healing, health and spiritual evolution. They have
worked with many hundreds of people in their private shamanic practice
through referrals from doctors, psychotherapists and other healthcare
professionals. They are founding practitioners of the multi-disciplinary,
integrative medical center, True North. They moved their thriving shamanic
healing practice there when the doors opened in 2002.

She and Evelyn have developed and taught workshops across the United States
and Canada on advanced shamanic methods since 1991.

Allie is also a minister of the Circle of the Sacred Earth, an animist church
fostering shamanic principles.
 Endnotes

1. Michael Talbot, The Holographic Universe (New York: Harper Colins Publishers, 1992).
2. Mark Commings, “The New Physics of Space, Time and Light,” from his keynote
speech given at the 2005 True North Annual Conference.
3. IBID. Cummings
4. The Shamanic Journey Process supports a person to expand his or her consciousness
for the purpose of exploring the Spirit World. It was brought into contemporary culture
through the work of Michael Harner, PhD. Please see the appendix for a fuller description
of the process.
5. Tsultrim Allione, Women of Wisdom, (London; Arkana, 1984)
6. C. Allie Knowlton, Odiana: A Story of Awakening and Wisdom, (e-book), Yarmouth,
Maine; Dreaming Bear Publishing, 2009)
7. Tsultrim Allione Recognized as an Emanation of Machig Labdrön”, Snow Lion, Fall
2007, p. 11
8. Odiana p.52 and p.64
9. IBID p.65
10. Women of Wisdom, p.45
11. Odiana p.65
12. Paul Pearsall, PhD, The Heart’s Code, Tapping the Wisdom and Power of Our Heart
Energy, (New York; Broadway Books, 1998) p. 42.
13. IBID, p.42
14. IBID, pp. 42-43.
15. Joseph Chilton Pierce, The Biology of Transcendence, A Blueprint of the Human
Spirit, (Rochester, Vermont; Park Street Press, 2002) cover description of his book.
16. A soul retrieval involves returning lost essences that a shamanic healing client may
have lost during traumas, surgeries or at other times. To learn more about this process,
read Sandra Ingerman’s book, Soul Retrieval: Mending the Fragmented Self.
17. I will be sharing more about my council in a later chapter.
18. Sandra Ingerman, Welcome Home, Life After Healing, (San Francisco ; Harper San
Francisco, 1993), pp. 118-121.
19. Sandra Ingerman, Soul Retrieval, Mending the Fragmented Self, (San Francisco;
Harper San Francisco, 1991), Sandra Ingerman brought this ancient shamanic practice to
the Western world and is the definitive book on this subject I have studied with her for
many years. Her teachings are an integral part of my shamanic practice.
20. Vladimir Megre, The Ringing Cedars Series, Book Three, (Ringing Cedars Press;
Kahului, Hawaii, 2000) pp. 187,188.
21. Fred Alan Wolf, Parallel Universes, The Search for Other Worlds; (New York; Simon &
Schuster Paperbacks, 1988), p. 273.
22. Tanis Helliwell, Summer with the Leprechauns A True Story, (Nevada City, Califor-
nia; Blue Dolphin Publishing, 1997), p.143.
23. IIBID. pp,141-143.
24. IBID.p.146.
25. IBID, p.149-150
26. Gregg Braden, The Divine Matrix, Bridging Time, Space, Miracles, and Beliefs, (Carls-
bad, California; Hay House, Inc., 2007), p. 199.
27. IBID, p. 201
28. IBID, p. 203
29. IBID p, 206
30. Richard Gerber, MD, Vibrational Medicine, (Rochester, Vermont; Bear & Company,
1988), p. 422. For more details on this subject please see the new edition of Dr Gerber’s
book, now titled: Vibrational Medicine for the 21st Century, the Complete Guide to En-
ergy Healing and Spiritual Transformation, (New York; William Morrow imprint Harper
Collins), Eagle Brook, 2000.
31. IBID. p, 319.
32. Larry Dossey, MD, Interview from Earth Star Oct/Nov/ 1999, p.33 based on his book
Reinventing Medicine: Beyond the Mind-Body to a New Era of Healing
33. Michael Talbot, The Holographic Universe, (New York; HarperCollins, 1991). pp. 139-
161
34. Odiana, p.15
35. IBID p.15
36. Dr. Eric Pearl in his book The Reconnection, Heal Others, Heal Yourself, (Carlsbad,
California; Hay House, Inc., 2001) p.99.
37. IBID p. 99.
38. See Chapter16
39. A friend had given me a five-feet tall pyramid created from separate copper tubes that
can be easily transported in a ski case and then reassembled wherever we are presenting
our work.
40. The Peruvian Whistling Vessels are small clay instruments used by early Peruvian cul-
tures to shift consciousness. We have a set of eight that are reproductions of a set from the
Chimu period that dates from approximately 1,000AD.
41. An example of a shift of emotional states that can ultimately lead to a DNA change oc-
curred in one of our drumming circles. My Teacher gave the journey focus for each of us
to experience, observe the vibration of a selected emotion that was not desirable. This was
to include an image of what it looked like and also to note what it felt like. Then each per-
son was to ask for an experience of an emotion that was preferable, including what the vi-
bration of that emotion looked and felt like. The shift was remarkable for each person.
42. Please see description of Twelve Point Star process in chapter 16.
43. This is a term Michael Harner uses when referring to the spiritual realms of the
shaman.
44. What is remarkable about this is that years after this journey, I found that I no longer
had this condition! The doctor insisted that I had been “misdiagnosed” in spite of having
had many physical exams by many different physicians over the years.
45. Shamanic Inner Body Healing is a method developed by Evelyn Rysdyk and me. In the
method, the practitioner assists a client to access their body/mind/spirit wisdom for the
purpose of healing old wounds and changing patterns. More about this method may be
found at: http://www.spiritpassages.com/shamanicinnerbodyhealing.html.
46. Lisette Larkins, Talking to Extraterrestrials, Communicating with Enlightened Beings,
(San Francisco, California; Hampton Roads, 2002) p. 23.
47. Barbara Hand Clow, Alchemy of Nine Dimensions, (San Francisco, California; Hamp-
ton Roads, 2004).
48. Lynne M. McTaggart Teleconference,11/12/09.
49. Lynne McTaggart, The Intention Experiment, (New York; Free Press, 2007).
50. Penny Peirce, Frequency, The Power of Personal Vibration, (New York; Atria Books, A
Division of Simon & Schuster, Inc., 2009).
51. IBID pp. 266-267
52. IBID xxxiiio
53. IBID, p, 49.
54. IBID p. 102
55. Richard Bartlett, DC, ND, The Marrix Energetics Experience, Shift your Conscious-
ness with the Healing Energies and Hidden Frequencies of the Universe, (Boulder, Col-
orado; Sounds True, Inc. , 2009).
56. IBID., p. 61.
57. IBID., p. 62.
58. IBID. p.62
59. IBID., p. 64.
60. Vladimir Megre, The Ringing Cedars Series, Book Four, p. 127.
61. IBID. p.130.
62. IBID. p.130.
63. IBID. p.134.
64. Tanis Helliwell, Pilgrimage with the Leprechauns, A True Story of a Mystical Tour of
Ireland, (Canada: Wayshower Enterprises, 2010), pp. 142-143.
65. Jonathan Goldman, Shifting Frequencies: Sounds for Vibratory Activation, (Flagstaff,
Arizona; Light Technology Publishing, 2010), 1998.
66. IBID, p.80.
67. IBID, pp. 80-81.
68. Hank Wesselman, PhD, The Bowl of Light, (Boulder, Colorado; Sounds True, Inc.,
2011)
69. IBID, p. 30
70. IBID 77-78
71. Meg Blackburn Losey, PhD, The Secret history of Consciousness, Ancient Keys to Our
future Survival, (San Francisco, California; Red Wheel/Weiser Books, 2010). pp. 12,.
72. IBID, p. 13.
73. Russell Targ, Do You See What I See? Lasers and Love, ESP and the CIA, and Mean-
ing of Life, (San Francisco, California; Hampton Roads, 2010.) Introduction, xxv.
 Dreaming Bear Publishing
A division of
Spirit Passages
PO Box 426, Yarmouth, Maine 04096
www.spiritpassages.com
ISBN: 978-1-4675-8286-5
This book is ©2013 C. Allie Knowlton, MSW, LCSW, DCSW & Spirit Passages
All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced or used in any form without written permission from the publishers.